ref data guide help 409

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide

Version 2011 (9.0) Service Pack 1

April 2011 / August 2011

DSP3D-PE-200026J-UPDATED

Copyright

Copyright © 1999-2011 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2010. All Rights Reserved.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.

Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813

Terms of Use

Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks

Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl, ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc. VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2009, All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma company. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide 3

Contents Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 15

SmartPlant 3D Documentation Set ....................................................................................................... 17 Documentation Comments ................................................................................................................... 21

What's New in Reference Data ................................................................................................................. 23

Understanding Reference Data ................................................................................................................ 25

Learning about Reference Data Types ................................................................................................. 26 Graphical Data ................................................................................................................................ 26 Non-graphical Data ......................................................................................................................... 27

Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In ...................................................................................... 27

Using the PDS Translator ......................................................................................................................... 29

Create PDS Export Data Files ........................................................................................................ 30 Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook .................................................................................. 30 Populate Dimension Table Name Rules ........................................................................................ 31 Translate PDS Reference Data ...................................................................................................... 32 Define Manual Information after Translation .................................................................................. 33 Create Commodity Codes .............................................................................................................. 39 PDS Piping Reference Data Translator Dialog Box ....................................................................... 39 Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility ......................................................................... 40 Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility ........................................................................................... 42 Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility .............................................................................. 43 Use the UoM Conversion Utility ..................................................................................................... 45 Using the OD to NPD Utility ........................................................................................................... 46

Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data .......................................................................... 49

Delivered Excel Workbooks .................................................................................................................. 50 Minimum Reference Data ..................................................................................................................... 54 Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks .............................................................................. 57

Administrative Sheets ..................................................................................................................... 59 Custom Interfaces Sheets .............................................................................................................. 61 Part Class Sheets ........................................................................................................................... 71 Catalog Hierarchy Sheets .............................................................................................................. 73 Using Catalog Hierarchy Sheets to Add Part Classes ................................................................... 75

Loading Reference Data into the Catalog ............................................................................................... 79

Using the Bulkload Modes .................................................................................................................... 79 Bulk Load Database with Data .............................................................................................................. 82 Bulkload Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................. 86

Bulkload from the Command Line .................................................................................................. 88 Uniqueness of Objects .......................................................................................................................... 90 Moniker Information for Special Process Sheets .................................................................................. 98

Contents

4 SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide

AllCommon Reference Data ................................................................................................................... 101

AllCommon.xls Workbook ................................................................................................................... 101 AllCommon Sheets ....................................................................................................................... 101 AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines ............................................................................................. 102 Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet .................................................................................................. 102 DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet ................................................................................................... 103 Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet ................................................................................................ 104 Piping Generic Data Female Sheet .............................................................................................. 110 Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet ........................................................................................ 111 Material Sheet .............................................................................................................................. 111 Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet ................................................................................................... 112 UOM Sheet ................................................................................................................................... 113

Insulation Reference Data ...................................................................................................................... 115

InsulationData.xls Workbook .............................................................................................................. 115 Insulation Sheets .......................................................................................................................... 115 Insulation Specification Sheet ...................................................................................................... 116 Insulation Thickness Table Sheet ................................................................................................ 116 Insulation Material Sheet .............................................................................................................. 117 HVAC Insulation Material Sheet ................................................................................................... 117 Equipment Insulation Material Sheet ............................................................................................ 117 Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet ........................................................................................ 118

Module Types Reference Data ............................................................................................................... 121

ModuleTypes.xls Workbook ................................................................................................................ 121 Module Type Sheets ..................................................................................................................... 121

Naming Rules Reference Data ............................................................................................................... 123

Creating and Distributing Naming Rules ............................................................................................. 123 Move Custom DLLs to SharedContent Directory (Option 1) .............................................................. 124 GenericNamingRules.xls Workbook ................................................................................................... 125

Naming Rules Sheets ................................................................................................................... 125 Naming Rules Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 126

Standard Nozzle Data .............................................................................................................................. 127

Standard Nozzle Data.xls Workbook .................................................................................................. 127 Nozzle Data Sheets ...................................................................................................................... 127 Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet ...................................................................................................... 128 Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet ........................................................................................................ 128 Conduit Ports Sheet ..................................................................................................................... 129 Cable Nozzle Sheet ...................................................................................................................... 129 Cable Tray Ports Sheet ................................................................................................................ 129

Working in an Integrated Environment ................................................................................................. 131

Using Catalog Data in an Integrated Environment ............................................................................. 131

Appendix: Select Lists (Codelists) ........................................................................................................ 133

Select List (Codelist) Column Descriptions ......................................................................................... 134 Select List (Codelist) Disciplines ......................................................................................................... 134

Contents


Select List (Codelist) Namespaces ..................................................................................................... 144 Align Component................................................................................................................................. 144 Anvil_Constant_Dir ............................................................................................................................. 145 Anvil_Constant_Sus ............................................................................................................................ 145 Anvil_Dyn_Config................................................................................................................................ 145 Anvil_Dyn_Finish ................................................................................................................................ 145 Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia ............................................................................................................................. 145 Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient .......................................................................................................................... 145 Anvil_Dyn_ResType ........................................................................................................................... 146 Anvil_Dyn_Stroke................................................................................................................................ 146 Anvil_Dyn_ValveType ......................................................................................................................... 146 Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia ........................................................................................................................... 146 Anvil_FIG137_Nuts ............................................................................................................................. 146 Anvil_FIG167_Insulat .......................................................................................................................... 146 Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW ...................................................................................................................... 147 Anvil_FIG255_Insulat .......................................................................................................................... 147 Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW ...................................................................................................................... 147 Anvil_FIG299_Config .......................................................................................................................... 147 Anvil_FIG86_Finish ............................................................................................................................. 147 Anvil_Finish ......................................................................................................................................... 147 Anvil_Rod_Finish ................................................................................................................................ 148 Anvil_Shoe_Base ................................................................................................................................ 148 Anvil_Shoe_Finish .............................................................................................................................. 148 Anvil_Shoe_Type ................................................................................................................................ 148 Anvil_Stanchion_Dia ........................................................................................................................... 148 Anvil_Strut_Finish ............................................................................................................................... 148 Anvil_Variable_ColType ...................................................................................................................... 149 Anvil_Variable_Dir .............................................................................................................................. 149 Anvil_Variable_RollMat ....................................................................................................................... 149 Anvil_Variable_Top ............................................................................................................................. 149 Anvil_WithWithout ............................................................................................................................... 149 Anvil_YesNo ........................................................................................................................................ 149 ApprovalReason.................................................................................................................................. 150 Aspect Code ........................................................................................................................................ 150 Assembly Inclusion ............................................................................................................................. 151 Assembly YesNoAuto ......................................................................................................................... 151 Assembly_BBXAlignment ................................................................................................................... 151 Assembly_RefPorts ............................................................................................................................ 151 Assembly_Variable_Dir ....................................................................................................................... 152 Assembly_WithWithout ....................................................................................................................... 152 Automated Flange Selection Option ................................................................................................... 152 Auxiliary Treatment ............................................................................................................................. 152 Axial Profile Category ......................................................................................................................... 153 Bend To Bend Tangent Basis ............................................................................................................. 153 Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option ...................................................................................................... 153 Bolt Extension Option ......................................................................................................................... 153 Bolt Length Calculation Option ........................................................................................................... 154 Bolt Length Round Off Option ............................................................................................................. 154 Bolt Lubrication Requirements ............................................................................................................ 154 Bolt Option .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Bolt Type ............................................................................................................................................. 154 Bolting Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 155 Bracket Category ................................................................................................................................ 157

Contents


Branch Reporting Ownership .............................................................................................................. 157 bsWeldType ........................................................................................................................................ 158 bsWeldSide ......................................................................................................................................... 158 Cable Route Status ............................................................................................................................. 158 Cable Tray Component Class ............................................................................................................. 158 Cable Tray Component Type .............................................................................................................. 158 Cable Tray Materials ........................................................................................................................... 159 Cable Tray Part Data Basis ................................................................................................................ 159 Cable Tray Type.................................................................................................................................. 159 Cable Type .......................................................................................................................................... 159 Cap Screw Length Round Off Option ................................................................................................. 159 Catalog Units of Measure Basis .......................................................................................................... 160 Check Piping Mfg Priority .................................................................................................................... 160 Check Piping Priority ........................................................................................................................... 160 Check Planning Priority ....................................................................................................................... 160 Clamp Option ...................................................................................................................................... 160 Clamp Requirement ............................................................................................................................ 160 Clamp Selection Basis ........................................................................................................................ 161 Cleaning Requirement ........................................................................................................................ 161 Cleaning Responsibility ....................................................................................................................... 161 Coating Color ...................................................................................................................................... 161 Coating Type ....................................................................................................................................... 161 Collar Category ................................................................................................................................... 161 Commodity Code Builder Option ........................................................................................................ 161 Commodity Option .............................................................................................................................. 162 Compart Coating Color ....................................................................................................................... 162 Compart Coating Process ................................................................................................................... 163 Compart Coating Responsibility.......................................................................................................... 163 Compart Coating Status ...................................................................................................................... 163 Compart Coating Type ........................................................................................................................ 163 Compartment Authorization Class ...................................................................................................... 163 Compartment Bulk Cargo Type .......................................................................................................... 163 Compartment Bulkhead Tightness...................................................................................................... 164 Compartment Capacity Context .......................................................................................................... 164 Compartment Cargo Context .............................................................................................................. 164 Compartment Coating Applicability ..................................................................................................... 164 Compartment Coating Certification ..................................................................................................... 164 Compartment Coating Inspection ....................................................................................................... 164 Compartment Compartment Group .................................................................................................... 165 Compartment Compartment Type ...................................................................................................... 165 Compartment Contact Material Type .................................................................................................. 165 Compartment Damage Location ......................................................................................................... 165 Compartment Damage Type ............................................................................................................... 165 Compartment Design Requirement .................................................................................................... 165 Compartment Function Type .............................................................................................................. 166 Compartment Insulation Category ...................................................................................................... 166 Compartment Naval Nuclear Class..................................................................................................... 166 Compartment Naval Safety Category ................................................................................................. 166 Compartment Naval Security Class .................................................................................................... 166 Compartment Noise Category ............................................................................................................ 166 Compartment Positional Rel Type ...................................................................................................... 167 Compartment Property Context .......................................................................................................... 167 Compartment Relevant Cargos .......................................................................................................... 167

Contents


Compartment Structure Type .............................................................................................................. 167 Compartment Surface Preparation ..................................................................................................... 167 Conduit Selection Basis ...................................................................................................................... 167 Connection Type ................................................................................................................................. 168 Construction Type ............................................................................................................................... 168 Control Point Subtype ......................................................................................................................... 168 Control Point Type .............................................................................................................................. 168 Create Exclusive WBS Item ................................................................................................................ 168 Cross Section Cardinal Points ............................................................................................................ 169 Cross Section Edges .......................................................................................................................... 169 Cross Section Shape Types ............................................................................................................... 169 Deck Category .................................................................................................................................... 169 Design Responsibility .......................................................................................................................... 169 Design Standard ................................................................................................................................. 169 Door Frame Position ........................................................................................................................... 170 Door Type ........................................................................................................................................... 170 Doors Windows Kinematics ................................................................................................................ 170 Drawing Style Codelist ........................................................................................................................ 170 Drilling Template Pattern .................................................................................................................... 170 Eccentric Offset Basis ......................................................................................................................... 170 Edge Reinforcement Category ............................................................................................................ 171 Elevation Plane Type .......................................................................................................................... 171 EMI ...................................................................................................................................................... 171 EMI Radiator ....................................................................................................................................... 171 EMI Suceptor ...................................................................................................................................... 171 End Preparation .................................................................................................................................. 171 End Standard ...................................................................................................................................... 172 Environmental Zone ............................................................................................................................ 172 Equipment Component Types ............................................................................................................ 172 Equipment Types ................................................................................................................................ 172 Examination ........................................................................................................................................ 173 Exterior Surface Treatment ................................................................................................................. 173 External Welded Pipe Part .................................................................................................................. 173 Fabrication Responsibility ................................................................................................................... 173 Fabrication Type ................................................................................................................................. 173 Fabrication Type Basis ....................................................................................................................... 174 Feature Type ....................................................................................................................................... 174 Fireproofing Exposure Type ................................................................................................................ 174 Fireproofing Method ............................................................................................................................ 174 Fireproofing Type ................................................................................................................................ 174 Flange Category.................................................................................................................................. 174 Flange Face Surface Finish ................................................................................................................ 175 Flange Facing ..................................................................................................................................... 175 Flange Insulation Kit Type .................................................................................................................. 175 Flip Component ................................................................................................................................... 175 Flow Direction ..................................................................................................................................... 175 Fluid Code ........................................................................................................................................... 176 Front End Type ................................................................................................................................... 176 Gasket Inside Diameter Basis ............................................................................................................. 176 Gasket Option ..................................................................................................................................... 176 Gasket Outside Diameter Basis .......................................................................................................... 176 Gasket Requirement Override ............................................................................................................ 176 Gasket Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 177

Contents


Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code .............................................................................................. 177 Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted Ends Option ....................................................................... 177 Gasket Style Number .......................................................................................................................... 177 Gasket Type ........................................................................................................................................ 177 Geometric Industry Standard .............................................................................................................. 178 Geometry Type ................................................................................................................................... 179 Grid Plane Type .................................................................................................................................. 197 Hand Wheel Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 197 Handrail Connection Type .................................................................................................................. 197 Handrail End Treatment ...................................................................................................................... 197 Handrail Inline Connection Type ......................................................................................................... 198 Handrail Offset .................................................................................................................................... 198 Handrail Orientation ............................................................................................................................ 198 Handrail Side Connection Type .......................................................................................................... 198 Hazardous Fluid Category .................................................................................................................. 198 Header Branch Size Basis Option ...................................................................................................... 198 Heat Tracing Medium .......................................................................................................................... 199 HngSup Associated Part Type ............................................................................................................ 199 HngSup Association Type ................................................................................................................... 199 HngSup BOM Type ............................................................................................................................. 199 HngSup Bounding Box Type ............................................................................................................... 199 HngSup Class Node Type .................................................................................................................. 200 HngSup Command ............................................................................................................................. 200 HngSup Connect Obj .......................................................................................................................... 200 HngSup Connection Type ................................................................................................................... 200 HngSup Cut Type................................................................................................................................ 200 HngSup Discipline ............................................................................................................................... 201 HngSup ET Type................................................................................................................................. 201 HngSup Face Selection Type ............................................................................................................. 201 HngSup Joint Type ............................................................................................................................. 201 HngSup Manufacturer ......................................................................................................................... 201 HngSup Mating Joint Type .................................................................................................................. 202 HngSup Part Class Type .................................................................................................................... 202 HngSup Physical Connection ............................................................................................................. 202 HngSup Port Category ........................................................................................................................ 202 HngSup Port Type .............................................................................................................................. 202 HngSup Rule Type .............................................................................................................................. 203 HngSup Strict Face Selection ............................................................................................................. 203 HngSup Support Type ........................................................................................................................ 203 HngSup Type Selection Rule .............................................................................................................. 203 HVAC Component Types .................................................................................................................... 203 HVAC Lining Material .......................................................................................................................... 204 HVAC Part Data Basis ........................................................................................................................ 204 HVAC Part Generation Basis .............................................................................................................. 204 HVAC Width and Depth Basis ............................................................................................................ 204 Icarus Column Base Option ................................................................................................................ 204 Icarus Concrete Type .......................................................................................................................... 205 Icarus Exclude End Bent ..................................................................................................................... 205 Icarus Grating Type ............................................................................................................................ 205 Icarus Pipe Rack Type ........................................................................................................................ 205 Icarus Struct Steel Analysis ................................................................................................................ 205 Icarus Third Column ............................................................................................................................ 205 IFCAspectCodeValue ......................................................................................................................... 205

Contents


IFC Process Status ............................................................................................................................. 206 IFC Required Action ............................................................................................................................ 206 IFC Type ............................................................................................................................................. 206 Ignore Boundaries ............................................................................................................................... 206 Industry Commodity Code Option ....................................................................................................... 206 Inlet Port Geometry Type .................................................................................................................... 207 Installation Responsibility .................................................................................................................... 207 Instrument Functional Type ................................................................................................................ 207 Insulation Material ............................................................................................................................... 207 Insulation Purpose .............................................................................................................................. 207 Insulation Temperature Basis ............................................................................................................. 207 Insulation Thickness Basis .................................................................................................................. 208 IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs ............................................................................................................ 208 IntelliShip Msgs ................................................................................................................................... 208 Interior Surface Treatment .................................................................................................................. 208 Is Bend Planar..................................................................................................................................... 208 Jacketed Closure Method ................................................................................................................... 209 Jacketed Piping Basis ......................................................................................................................... 209 Lining Material ..................................................................................................................................... 209 Load Case Liquid Pressure ................................................................................................................. 209 Load Case Sea Pressure .................................................................................................................... 209 Load Span Classification .................................................................................................................... 210 Longitudinal Beam Category ............................................................................................................... 210 Longitudinal Bulkhead Category ......................................................................................................... 210 Longitudinal Profile Category .............................................................................................................. 210 Longitudinal Seam Category ............................................................................................................... 210 Longitudinal Tube Category ................................................................................................................ 210 Loose Material Requirements ............................................................................................................. 210 Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option ................................................................................................... 211 Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 211 Manufacturing Method ........................................................................................................................ 211 Map Type ............................................................................................................................................ 211 Material Description Builder Option .................................................................................................... 212 Materials Grade................................................................................................................................... 212 Materials of Construction Class .......................................................................................................... 212 Materials Type..................................................................................................................................... 212 Member Fireproofing Application Method ........................................................................................... 213 Member Fireproofing Application Type ............................................................................................... 213 Member Fireproofing Exposure Type ................................................................................................. 213 Member Orientation ............................................................................................................................ 213 Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction ................................................................................................. 213 Methods of Trimming .......................................................................................................................... 214 Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option ............................................................................................. 214 Mirror Behavior Option ........................................................................................................................ 214 Misc Requisition Classification ............................................................................................................ 215 Multiport Valve Op Req ....................................................................................................................... 215 Note Purpose ...................................................................................................................................... 215 Nozzle Entrance Type ......................................................................................................................... 215 Nozzle Flange Type ............................................................................................................................ 215 Nozzle Function .................................................................................................................................. 215 Nut Creation Option ............................................................................................................................ 216 Nut Option ........................................................................................................................................... 216 Nut Type .............................................................................................................................................. 216

Contents


Open or Blind Spacer Install State ...................................................................................................... 216 Opening Category ............................................................................................................................... 216 Orifice Flange Tap Orientation ............................................................................................................ 217 Outlet Port Geometry Type ................................................................................................................. 217 Painting Responsibility ........................................................................................................................ 217 Part Class Types ................................................................................................................................. 217 Part Data Basis ................................................................................................................................... 217 Part Data Source................................................................................................................................. 218 Pipe Bend Radius By User Option ...................................................................................................... 218 Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option .................................................................................................... 218 Pipe Bend Type................................................................................................................................... 218 Pipe Bending Machine Type ............................................................................................................... 218 Pipe Stock Usage................................................................................................................................ 219 Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number Basis Option ...................................................................... 219 Piping Commodity Override Option .................................................................................................... 219 Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option ..................................................................................... 219 Piping Commodity Type ...................................................................................................................... 220 Piping Point Usage ............................................................................................................................. 221 Piping Spec Status .............................................................................................................................. 221 Piping Spec Version Management Option .......................................................................................... 221 Piping Specification Notes Option....................................................................................................... 222 Plane Of Flip ....................................................................................................................................... 222 Plane of Turn ....................................................................................................................................... 222 Plate Part Category ............................................................................................................................. 222 Pressure Rating .................................................................................................................................. 222 Profile Part Category ........................................................................................................................... 223 ProfileEncasementType ...................................................................................................................... 223 Property Categories ............................................................................................................................ 223 Property Categories ............................................................................................................................ 223 Purchase Length Basis Option ........................................................................................................... 224 Rear End Type .................................................................................................................................... 224 Reference Plane View Directions ....................................................................................................... 224 Reporting Requirement Basis ............................................................................................................. 225 Reporting Type.................................................................................................................................... 225 Requisition Responsibility ................................................................................................................... 225 Requisition Type ................................................................................................................................. 225 Respect Assembly Boundaries ........................................................................................................... 226 Revision History Notes Option ............................................................................................................ 226 Ring Number ....................................................................................................................................... 226 Ring Profile Category .......................................................................................................................... 226 Rotation Offset Type ........................................................................................................................... 227 Route Direction ................................................................................................................................... 227 Route Layout ....................................................................................................................................... 227 Route on Face..................................................................................................................................... 227 Rule Class Type .................................................................................................................................. 228 Rule Type ............................................................................................................................................ 228 Schedule Thickness ............................................................................................................................ 228 Selection Basis.................................................................................................................................... 229 Shell Category..................................................................................................................................... 230 Ship Design Loading Condition Type ................................................................................................. 230 Short Code Hierarchy ......................................................................................................................... 231 Signal Type ......................................................................................................................................... 233 Size Reduction Preference ................................................................................................................. 234

Contents


Size Reduction Type ........................................................................................................................... 234 Slab Boundary Reference ................................................................................................................... 234 Slab Composition ................................................................................................................................ 234 Slab Continuity .................................................................................................................................... 234 Slab Corner Type ................................................................................................................................ 235 Slab Cross Section Symbol ................................................................................................................ 235 Slab Direction Reference .................................................................................................................... 235 Slab Face Position .............................................................................................................................. 235 Slab Fastener Type ............................................................................................................................. 236 Slab Layer Role................................................................................................................................... 236 Slab Manufacturing Process ............................................................................................................... 236 Slab Nosing Material ........................................................................................................................... 236 Slab Nosing Type ................................................................................................................................ 236 Slab Priority ......................................................................................................................................... 236 Slab Reference Direction .................................................................................................................... 237 SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs .................................................................................................. 237 SmartMarine 3D Msgs ........................................................................................................................ 237 Space Access Type ............................................................................................................................ 237 Space Adjacency Contact Type .......................................................................................................... 237 Space Adjacency Geometry Type ...................................................................................................... 237 Space Arrangement Orientation ......................................................................................................... 238 Space Arrangement Type ................................................................................................................... 238 Space Item Purpose ........................................................................................................................... 238 Space Physical Orientation Type ........................................................................................................ 238 Space Positional Relationship Type ................................................................................................... 239 Space Product Structure Type ............................................................................................................ 239 Spectacle Position .............................................................................................................................. 239 Spool Break by Control Point .............................................................................................................. 239 Spool Include Welded Parts ................................................................................................................ 239 Spool Sequence Type ......................................................................................................................... 240 Spooling Basis .................................................................................................................................... 240 Steamout Requirement ....................................................................................................................... 240 Stress Relief ........................................................................................................................................ 240 Stress Relief Requirement .................................................................................................................. 240 Struct 2L Back to Back Rule ............................................................................................................... 241 Struct AC Left Right Both .................................................................................................................... 241 Struct AC Pad Type ............................................................................................................................ 241 Struct AC Sizing Rule ......................................................................................................................... 241 Struct AC Splice Types ....................................................................................................................... 241 Struct AC To Do Messages ................................................................................................................ 241 Struct Alignment .................................................................................................................................. 241 Struct Boundary Conditions ................................................................................................................ 242 Struct Can Diameter Rule ................................................................................................................... 242 Struct Can Length Compute Method .................................................................................................. 242 Struct Can Type .................................................................................................................................. 242 Struct Cone Length Compute Method ................................................................................................ 242 Struct Compute Rule ........................................................................................................................... 242 Struct Continuity .................................................................................................................................. 243 Struct Coord Sys Reference ............................................................................................................... 243 Struct Custom Plate Part Type ........................................................................................................... 243 Struct End Releases ........................................................................................................................... 243 Struct Eqp To Do Messages ............................................................................................................... 243 Struct FC Chevron WPO ..................................................................................................................... 243

Contents


Struct FC End Controlling ................................................................................................................... 244 Struct FC Offset Along ........................................................................................................................ 244 Struct FC Offset Direction ................................................................................................................... 244 Struct FC Supported Edge .................................................................................................................. 244 Struct FC Supporting CPs ................................................................................................................... 244 Struct FC Supporting Side .................................................................................................................. 244 Struct FC To Do Messages ................................................................................................................. 245 Struct Feature Radius Type ................................................................................................................ 245 Struct Feature To Do Messages ......................................................................................................... 245 Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule ........................................................................................................ 245 Struct Footing To Do Messages ......................................................................................................... 245 Struct Frm Conn Position Ref ............................................................................................................. 245 Struct Insulation Purpose .................................................................................................................... 246 Struct Member End Selection Rule ..................................................................................................... 246 Struct Member Position Rule .............................................................................................................. 246 Struct Plate Part To Do Messages...................................................................................................... 246 Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes......................................................................................................... 246 Struct SC To Do Messages ................................................................................................................ 246 Struct Wall Boundary Size .................................................................................................................. 247 Struct Wall Boundary Type ................................................................................................................. 248 Struct Wall Connection Type .............................................................................................................. 248 Struct Wall Reference Attribute ........................................................................................................... 248 StructInsulationSetbackReference...................................................................................................... 248 Structural Load Case Source .............................................................................................................. 249 Structural Member Priority .................................................................................................................. 249 Structural Member Type ..................................................................................................................... 249 Structural WPO Intersection Index ...................................................................................................... 249 Supplementary Nut Requirement........................................................................................................ 249 Supplementary Washer Requirement ................................................................................................. 250 Supply Responsibility .......................................................................................................................... 250 Surface Preparation ............................................................................................................................ 250 Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option ...................................................................................... 250 Testing Responsibility ......................................................................................................................... 250 Testing Type ....................................................................................................................................... 250 Tightness ............................................................................................................................................. 251 Transverse Beam Category ................................................................................................................ 251 Transverse Bulkhead Category .......................................................................................................... 251 Transverse Profile Category ............................................................................................................... 251 Transverse Seam Category ................................................................................................................ 251 Transverse Tube Category ................................................................................................................. 251 Tray Specification Type ...................................................................................................................... 251 Type .................................................................................................................................................... 252 Undefined Service Limits Rule Option ................................................................................................ 252 Utility BOM Units ................................................................................................................................. 252 Utility Brace Orient .............................................................................................................................. 253 Utility_Holes ........................................................................................................................................ 253 Utility_Nuts .......................................................................................................................................... 253 Utility_PlateThickness ......................................................................................................................... 254 Utility_Tabs ......................................................................................................................................... 254 Utility_YesNo ....................................................................................................................................... 254 Valve Flow Pattern .............................................................................................................................. 254 Valve Model Number .......................................................................................................................... 254 Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard ..................................................................................... 255

Contents


Valve Operator Is Rotatable ................................................................................................................ 255 Valve Operator Part Data Basis .......................................................................................................... 255 Valve Operator Type ........................................................................................................................... 255 Valve Port Option ................................................................................................................................ 255 Valve Trim ........................................................................................................................................... 256 Vendor ................................................................................................................................................. 256 Vertical Beam Category ...................................................................................................................... 256 Vertical Profile Category ..................................................................................................................... 256 Vertical Seam Category ...................................................................................................................... 256 Vertical Tube Category ....................................................................................................................... 256 Vessel Head Type ............................................................................................................................... 257 Voltage Grade ..................................................................................................................................... 257 Washer Creation Option ..................................................................................................................... 257 Washer Option .................................................................................................................................... 257 Washer Type ....................................................................................................................................... 257 WBS Assignment ................................................................................................................................ 258 WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type .......................................................................................................... 258 WBS Item Purpose ............................................................................................................................. 258 WBS Project Purpose ......................................................................................................................... 258 WBS Pull In Associated Items ............................................................................................................ 259 Weld Type ........................................................................................................................................... 259 Welding Procedure Specification ........................................................................................................ 259 Welding Requirement ......................................................................................................................... 260

Appendix: Units of Measure ................................................................................................................... 261

Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data .................................................................................. 293

Appendix: Other Reference Data ........................................................................................................... 295

Appendix: Questions and Answers about Reference Data ................................................................. 307

Appendix: Metadata Consistency .......................................................................................................... 311

Appendix: Importing SmartPlant Reference Data Specs into SmartPlant 3D ................................... 313

General Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 313 Exporting from the SmartPlant Reference Data Standard Database ................................................. 314

EN/DIN Specifications .................................................................................................................. 315 Bulkloading into SmartPlant 3D .......................................................................................................... 320

EN/DIN Bulkloading ...................................................................................................................... 321

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 325

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 345

Contents



This document is a user's guide for SmartPlant 3D reference data. The purpose of this document is to describe how to customize the reference data so that it fits your company or project.

For information about the specific reference data for each discipline, see the reference data guides available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

Document Audience

This document is intended for advanced users who should:

Have a good understanding of Microsoft® Office products, especially Microsoft Excel.

Be familiar with SmartPlant 3D database architecture and relational databases in general.

Related Documents

For more information about SmartPlant 3D, please see the following documents:

SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide

SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide

SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide

Preface

Preface



SmartPlant 3D Documentation Set SmartPlant 3D documentation is available as Adobe PDF files. The content is the same as online Help. To access these PDF documents, click Help > Printable Guides in the software.

The documentation set is divided into four categories:

Administrative guides contain information about installing, configuring, customizing, and troubleshooting SmartPlant 3D.

User's guides provide command reference and how-to information for working in each SmartPlant 3D task.

Reference data guides define the reference data workbooks. Not all tasks have reference data.

ISOGEN guides

Administrative Guides

SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide - Provides instructions on installing and configuring the software.

Project Management User's Guide - Provides instructions for setting up the databases, creating permission groups, backing up and restoring project data, assigning access permissions to the model, defining and managing locations for Global Workshare, and version migration.

SmartPlant 3D Global Workshare Guide - Provides instructions for setting up the software and the databases to work in a workshare environment.

SmartPlant 3D Interference Checking Guide - Provides information on installing, configuring, and using the interference detection service.

SmartPlant 3D Integration Reference Guide - Provides information about installing, configuring, and using SmartPlant 3D in an integrated environment.

SmartPlant 3D Interpreting Human Piping Specifications - Provides information about how to interpret human piping specifications so that you can create the corresponding piping specification in the software.

SmartPlant 3D Export to PDMS - Provides information about how to export model data from SmartPlant 3D to PDMS. Specific guidelines relating to best practices and known limitations of the export functionality are also included.

SmartPlant 3D Point Cloud Reference - Provides information for referencing point cloud files provided by point cloud vendors in SmartPlant 3D.

SmartPlant 3D Troubleshooting Guide - Provides information on how to resolve errors that you may encounter in the software by documenting troubleshooting tips, error messages, and to do list messages.

SmartPlant 3D Plant Design System (PDS) Guide - Provides all information needed to use PDS with SmartPlant 3D. Topics include referencing active PDS projects in SmartPlant 3D, exporting PDS data and importing that data into SmartPlant 3D, and converting PDS reference data to SmartPlant 3D reference data.

SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide - Provides information about custom commands, naming rules, and symbol programming.

User's Guides

Catalog User's Guide - Provides information about viewing, editing, and creating reference data and select lists (codelists).

Common User's Guide - Provides information about defining workspaces, manipulating views, and running reports.

Preface


Electrical User's Guide - Provides information about routing electrical cable, cableway, cable tray, and conduit.

Equipment and Furnishings User's Guide - Provides information about placing equipment.

Grids User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating coordinate systems, elevation grid planes, vertical grid planes, radial cylinders, radial planes, grid arcs, and grid lines.

Hangers and Supports User's Guide - Provides instructions on placing piping, duct, and cableway supports in the model.

HVAC User's Guide - Provides instructions for routing HVAC duct.

Orthographic Drawings User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing orthographic drawings.

Piping Isometric Drawings User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing piping isometric drawings.

Piping User's Guide - Provides instructions for routing pipe and placing valves, taps, and pipe joints.

Reports User's Guide - Provides information about creating and managing spreadsheet reports.

Space Management User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing space objects such as areas, zones, interference volumes, and drawing volumes in the model.

Structural Analysis User's Guide - Provides instructions for defining loads, load cases, load combinations, and the importing and exporting of analytical data.

Structure User's Guide - Provides instructions for placing structural members such as: beams, columns, slabs, openings, stairs, ladders, equipment foundations, and handrails.

Systems and Specifications User's Guide - Provides instructions for creating systems and selecting which specifications are available for each system type.

Reference Data Guides

SmartPlant 3D 2D Symbols User's Guide - Provides command reference information and procedural instructions for creating 2D symbols used to represent collars, clips, profiles, brackets, and other items.

SmartPlant 3D 2D Symbols Reference Data Guide - Provides information about the two-dimensional symbols used in all tasks.

Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide - Provides information about reports reference data.

Electrical Reference Data Guide - Provides information about electrical cable, cableway, cable tray, and conduit reference data.

Electrical 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the cable tray and conduit 3D symbols that are available.

Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide - Provides information about equipment reference data.

Equipment 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the equipment, equipment component, design shapes, and design aides 3D symbols that are available.

Hangers and Supports Reference Data Guide - Provides information about hangers and supports reference data.

Hangers and Supports 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the hanger and support 3D symbols that are available.

HVAC Reference Data Guide - Provides information about HVAC reference data.

HVAC 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the HVAC 3D symbols that are available.

Preface


SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide - Provides instructions about the Bulkload utility, codelists, and the reference data common to several disciplines.

Piping Reference Data Guide - Provides information about piping reference data including piping specifications, piping specification rules, piping parts, and piping symbols.

Piping 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the piping 3D symbols that are available.

Space Management Reference Data Guide - Provides information about space management reference data.

Structure Reference Data Guide - Provides information about structural reference data.

Structure 3D Symbols Reference - Provides information about the stair, ladder, footings, and equipment foundation 3D symbols that are available.

ISOGEN Guides

Symbol Keys Reference Guide - Provides information about the symbol keys for isometric drawings. This guide is from Alias, the makers of ISOGEN.

Preface



Documentation Comments We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at: [email protected].

Preface



The following changes have been made to reference data.

Version 2011 (9.0) Service Pack 1

Added information on exporting files from SmartPlant Reference Data and loading them into SmartPlant 3D. For more information, see Appendix: Importing SmartPlant Reference Data Specs into SmartPlant 3D (on page 313). (P2 CP:171193)

You can now modify UserClassName and OccClassName for part classes using the bulkload utility with the Modify method. For more information, see Using the Bulkload Modes (on page 79). (P3 CP:62503)

The Symbols share on the reference data server has been renamed SharedContent. This document has been updated to reflect this change.

New select list has been added: Door Frame Position (on page 170).

You must follow a specific order when you bulkload Hangers and Supports reference data. For more information, see Minimum Reference Data (on page 54). (P3 CP: 190442)

Added information about the ApprovalReason.xls file. For more information, see ApprovalReason (on page 150). (P2 CP:46112)

The Excel Migration Tool is no longer delivered with the product. This document has been updated to reflect this change. (P2 CP:200373)

What's New in Reference Data

What's New in Reference Data



S E C T I O N 1

In order to use the software for process design, you must have reference data. Reference data can be graphical or non-graphical in nature. For example, reference data includes graphical symbols that you can place in the model, such as equipment or piping components. Reference data also includes non-graphical, tabular data, such as catalog data and specification data. Catalog data includes the parts that you place in the model, such as piping components and equipment. Specification data includes the rules that govern how those parts are placed and connected.

Understanding how the reference data in the software works is essential to effective use of the software. For example, when you route pipe, nearly everything you see on a Properties dialog box comes from reference data. While you route pipe, you are also constrained by piping specification rules in reference data.

The software delivers the reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks. In this flexible format, you can edit the reference data, as well as add your own. For example, Excel allows you to copy entire sheets of data and then modify some parameters. Another way to add or edit the reference data is to use the commands in the Catalog task in the software. For more information, see the documentation available for the Catalog task.

The catalog information is also user-customizable in terms of its data structure. You can organize the delivered reference data into groups in the way that makes sense for your company or project. For example, you can group the objects by type. These groups are often referred to as classes.

You can migrate PDS piping specifications to use with the current software. The software provides a tool that allows you to populate dimension table rules to update industry commodity codes. For more information, see Using the PDS Translator (on page 29).

Solid Edge®, Visual Basic®, and SmartPlant 2D Symbols (Symbol 2D) are important tools for creating reference data. You can use Solid Edge to create parametric or non-parametric symbols; however, client computers used to modify Solid Edge parametric symbols after placement must have Solid Edge loaded. Visual Basic provides programming tools for creating more sophisticated, parameterized parts. Both Solid Edge and Visual Basic are used for creating three- dimensional symbols. Symbol 2D provides the ability to create layer-based cross sections for use in the Structure task.

To add a large amount of reference data to the catalog, use the Bulkload utility to transfer Excel workbook data into the Catalog database. Each workbook is organized in a particular way in order to specify the objects, their properties, and the relationship of the objects to the rest of the hierarchy.

Understanding Reference Data



The following picture shows the overall workflow of creating reference data for the software. You can create graphical data in Symbol 2D, Solid Edge, or Visual Basic (A). Excel workbooks contain tabular data (B). You use the Bulkload utility (C) to populate the Catalog database (D). Using the software, you place items in the Model database (E).

(A) - Graphical data (B) - Tabular data (C) - Bulkload utility (D) - Catalog database and schema (E) - Model database

See Also Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In (on page 27) Learning about Reference Data Types (on page 26)

Learning about Reference Data Types Reference data can be graphical or non-graphical in nature. Graphical data includes Visual Basic .dll files, Solid Edge .par and .asm files, and Symbol 2D .sym files. Non-graphical data includes Microsoft Excel workbooks.

Graphical Data The software supports multiple ways of representing a graphical symbol.

Visual Basic® (VB) Symbols

Routing components are typically represented using a VB definition of the symbol. VB provides an easy-to-use language to parametrically define the graphical representation of the symbol and its connect points. Many VB symbols are delivered with the software.

Solid Edge® Symbols

"One-off" equipment design can be done using Solid Edge, which provides several graphical primitives to build the geometry of the equipment definition. The geometry can be parametrically defined but requires Solid Edge to be loaded on every client workstation that will be used to place the equipment in the model. Or, you must make sure that every possible size has been generated and cached in the catalog.

SmartPlant® 2D Symbols

Cross-section symbols for structural applications can be defined in the SmartPlant 2D Symbols application. Using the Variable Table, you can parametrically define and constrain the geometry of the symbols.



Non-graphical Data This type of data includes specifications, rules, and other tabular information.

Classes and Parts

A part class is a group of related parts. For example, a part class can be an Inline Centrifugal Fan. The parts could be models that run 1/3, 1/6, or 1/8 horsepower. Each part is a separate, selectable object in the Catalog.

Specifications and Rules

Specifications are the collection of standards for the types of objects placed in a model. Rules determine how the specifications are applied. You can customize both rules and specifications based on what makes sense for your company. For information about piping specifications and rules, see the Piping Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software. Other rules include interference checking rules and naming rules, both described in this guide.

Tables

The reference data tables in the Catalog contain non-graphical property data. For example, the codelists in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook are stored in tables in the Catalog database.

See Also Understanding Reference Data (on page 25) Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In (on page 27)

Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits In The software can use up to seven databases: Catalog, Catalog Schema, Model, Site, Site Schema, Reports, and Reports Schema.

The Catalog database contains reference data, which includes part dimensions and industry standards. This Reference Data Guide is about the data in the Catalog database.

Using the Bulkload utility, you can create a starting Catalog database and schema from a data file delivered with the software. You can use your own custom Excel workbooks and custom symbols to create a new Catalog database specifically for your project.

After creating the Catalog database, you can modify the delivered reference data. Two methods exist to modify the reference data: edit the workbooks in Excel and bulk load the data, or use the commands in the Catalog task to edit the data (bulkload is not necessary in that case).

The Model database contains all instances of parts in the physical model. The Catalog and Model databases share the same schema.

The Site database and schema are containers for the other databases. The Site database stores work-breakdown and user access for the model. A site database can have multiple model and catalog databases. Typically, there is one site database set for each customer location. For information about site databases, see the Project Management User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

The Reports database and schema interact with the other databases to generate tabular reports from the model data. For information about reports, see the Reports User's Guide and the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.



To view the hierarchy and contents of the Catalog, start the Catalog task. To view the Site database, start the Project Management task. For more information about the functionality in these tasks, see the Catalog Help and Project Management Help files.

For creation date and size information on each database, you can open SQL Server Enterprise Manager. This software also provides further technical details about the relational tables in each database.

The following picture shows the relationships of the databases:

(A) - Reports database (B) - Site database (C) - Model database (D) - Catalog database (E) - Site Schema database (F) - Catalog Schema database (G) - Reports Schema database

See Also Understanding Reference Data (on page 25) Learning about Reference Data Types (on page 26)


S E C T I O N 2

The PDS (Plant Design System) Translator allows you to migrate your PDS piping specifications to SmartPlant 3D piping reference data. The tool also allows you to populate dimension table name rules and to update industry commodity codes.

The PDS translation process requires the specification writer to make some manual edits to complete the conversion.

Workflow

1. Create PDS Export data files (on page 30).

2. Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook (on page 30).

3. Populate Dimension Table name rules (on page 31).

Populating the dimension table name rules is performed only once, before the translation process.

4. Translate PDS reference data (on page 32).

You may need to run the translation step a number of times.

5. After translation, define necessary manual information (see Define Manual Information after Translation (on page 33)). For information about required reference data, refer to Required Worksheets (on page 35).

6. Create Commodity Codes (on page 39) (optional).

7. Bulk load the translated workbooks: piping specification data, piping commodity data, and codelist data.

8. Run the Verify Consistency command in the Catalog task. For more information, see the Catalog User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command.

9. Run the PDS Model Data Exporter, and import the PDS model data into the software. For more information, see the Common User's Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command.

See Also PDS Piping Reference Data Translator Dialog Box (on page 39)

Using the PDS Translator



Create PDS Export Data Files Create the following export data files, and place them in the ..\PDSAsciifiles folder:

implied.data

taps.data

us_lgbom.data

us_shbom.data

code148.edt

code 499.edt

PD_tbl_list

Physical Data Library text list (rename PD_tbl_lst and save)

Piping Job Spec Library test list (rename PD_tbl_lst and save)

PCD files (*.pcd)

PMC files (Any file(s) with a .pmc extension, in the PDSAsciiFiles directory, will be translated.)

Table checker report list

Table Checker Files text list -

Table checker output files (format table_chk_2)

Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook 1. In Windows Explorer, browse to [Product Directory]\CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Docs.

2. Open the applicable Piping Translation Rules workbook (one is for the DIN standard; the other is ANSI).

3. Modify the worksheets as follows.

Cap Screw Commodity Codes sheet - Edit this sheet to match your requirements. The delivered workbook is the Intergraph "standard".

Dimension Table Names sheet - Remove all the delivered file names.

Remove the gasket gap tables from the

Dimension Table Names sheet. Also, remove the gasket gap table name from the PDS PMC file, and replace it with the default gasket gap.

Elimination of Weight Code sheet - Map the user-defined weight codes from PDS to the applicable SmartPlant 3D codes.

End Preparation sheet - Edit this sheet to match your requirements.

Engineering Tag sheet - Modify the mapping from PDS valves to SmartPlant 3D tag numbers. The delivered sheet contains Intergraph "standard" valves.

Fabrication Category sheet - Add the user-defined fabrication categories, and apply the fabrication types and responsibilities as necessary.

File Names sheet - Edit the input file names as required, and remove unnecessary records. Make sure that all file names are correctly specified and that you do not have more files than needed.



Miscellaneous sheet - Edit the values on this sheet as necessary.

The size-dependent commodity codes flag refers only to the PCD format, and not to the Project Administrator option in PDS. Set this option to YES only if you have ALL individual NPD values in the PCD (for example, when you have all NPD values for piping commodities from 2" to 6"). The software includes a worksheet for size-dependent codes from pdtable_212. You must enter sizedep.txt (or other file name) on the File Names worksheet in the appropriate option row. This file is a report of size-dependent commodity codes.

PDS Commodity Name sheet - Add any user-created or modified AABBCC codes as required. Also, make sure all AABBCC codes used in your PDS specs are there.

PDS Model Code sheet - Add any user-created or modified Model codes as required. Also, make sure all Model codes used in your PDS specs are there.

Wall Thickness Reihle Number sheet - This sheet is only applicable for DIN specs.

Weight Table Name Format sheet - Edit codelists and commodity codes based on the specific customization. Commodity code issues may exist for cap screws, weight codes, end preparations, valve engineering tags, and fabrication categories and responsibilities.

You will need to revise and add information as required for commodity codes.

Nipples must be manually added to the Dimension Table Names sheet if the table checker was run without weight codes. In addition, blind flanges must be manually added to the Dimension Table Names sheet if the table checker was run without weight codes.

Populate Dimension Table Name Rules Before you start this procedure, edit the AllCodeLists.xls workbook to match any customization in the PDS project.

1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the software installation folder.

2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click PDSDatatranslator.exe.

The Workstation setup includes the PDSTranslator folder only if you have specified the Project Management option during installation.

3. Select the Populate 'Dimension Table Names' Rule option on the PDS Piping Reference Data Translator dialog box

4. In the PDS ASCII Files Location box, browse to the location that stores your PDS reference data.

5. In the PDS Translation Rules box, browse to the location that stores the edited PDS translation rules, which are in Excel workbook (.xls) format. Enter the name of a workbook.

The software includes two translation rules workbooks in the CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Docs folder: Piping Translation Rules DIN.xls and Piping Translation Rules.xls. You can edit these workbooks according to your project.

6. In the Translator Error Log box, browse to the location where you want the log file stored, and enter the name of the log file.

7. Click Populate.



Translate PDS Reference Data Before you start this procedure, edit the AllCodeLists.xls workbook to match any customization in the PDS project.




3. Select the Translate PDS Reference Data option on the PDS Piping Reference Data Translator dialog box.

4. Under Commodity Code Option, specify either the contractor commodity codes or the industry commodity codes.

5. In the PDS ASCII Files Location box, browse to the location that stores your PDS reference data.

6. In the PDS Translation Rules box, browse to the location that stores the edited PDS translation rules, which are in Excel workbook (.xls) format. Enter the name of a workbook.

The software includes two translation rules workbooks in the CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Docs folder: Piping Translation Rules DIN.xls and Piping Translation Rules.xls. You can edit these workbooks according to your project.

7. In the PDS Code Lists box, browse to the location where the codelist information is stored, and enter the name of a workbook.

The translation process does not convert PDS codelists.

The process uses two SmartPlant 3D codelists that relate to dimensional data. These codelists are located in AllCodeLists.xls.

8. In the SmartPlant 3D Piping Excel File box, browse to the location where you want the Excel workbooks to be stored, and enter the name of a workbook. The format is Excel workbook format (.xls).

If you provide a name for the Excel file, the translator uses this name as a prefix for the names of the generated Excel workbooks. For example, if you enter "PdsTranslation.xls", the utility exports two files: PdsTranslation_Catalog.xls and PdsTranslation_Specification.xls.


10. Click Translate. When the process finishes, the status bar on the translator displays Finished.

11. Review the error log.

Based on the errors, you can decide to: 1) Revise the input data, delete the output files, and re-translate, OR 2) edit the output files.



Define Manual Information after Translation

The specification writer usually performs this procedure.

For more information about required reference data, see Required Worksheets (on page 35).

1. Open the Piping Catalog and Specification workbooks.

2. In the Catalog workbook, do the following:

Add worksheets as necessary. For more information, see Required Worksheets (on page 35).

Add oa:Rotation to all valves with operators.

Add oa:Angle to all elbows.

Add oa:SpectaclePosition to all spec blinds.

Add oa:EccentricOffsetBasis to all eccentric reducers.

On the Piping Female End Generic Data sheet, define values for socket offset, thread depth, hub outside diameter, and hub thickness.

On the Piping Bolted End Generic Data sheet, define values for flange thickness tolerance, flange face projection, raised face diameter, flange groove width, standard nut height for studs, standard washer thickness for studs, standard bolt extension for studs, standard nut height for machine bolts, standard washer thickness for machine bolts, and body outside diameter.

Change the bolt extension to address the use of nut height and washer thickness.

Add the drilling template data for PDS through-bolted ends without bolt holes.

If "almost precise" STUD tables were used in PDS, remove the drilling template data.

On the Bolt Part Data sheet, define the values for the maximum temperature, fluid code, ring number, and type any comments as necessary.

On the Gasket Part Data sheet, define the values for ring number and gasket type.

If you chose to use the SP3Dolet symbol definition for all your olets, you must manually add the other two required symbol input dimensions (MajorBodyDiameter and HoleinHeader) that the translator does not add to the olet part sheets. Failure to add the two additional dimensions will cause the placement of olets to fail. As an alternative, you can use the SP3DOletG symbol which only requires the same single input dimension (FacetoHeaderSurface) as PDS.

3. In the Specification workbook, do the following:

Add worksheets as necessary. For more information, see Required Worksheets (on page 35).

Edit the Bend Angles sheet as necessary.

Edit the Weld Clearance sheet as necessary.

Edit the Pipe Takedown Parts sheet as necessary.

Check the Piping Commodity Filter sheet for zero entries for RCP (red connect point) for olets. For some olet type components, the translator may miss the second connect point data, so you must manually verify the correct mapping.

On the Piping Commodity Material Control Data sheet, define the values for cap screw diameter and for tapped hole depth.



On the Bolt Selection Filter sheet, define the value for bolt priority. Also, complete the comments as necessary.

If the PDS translator encounters two through-bolted fittings requiring a complete substitution of cap screws; and both through-bolted fittings have identical bolted ends in terms of end preparation, pressure rating, and end standard; and the two through-bolted fittings imply different cap screw commodity codes in PDS, only one cap screw record will be created in the Bolt Selection Filter. The PDS Translator will arbitrarily choose one of the two cap screw commodity codes, and the specification writer must manually add the second cap screw by use of the bolt option.

If the PDS translator encounters a through-bolted fitting requiring a complete substitution of cap screws; and the through-bolted fitting implies two different cap screw commodity codes in PDS based on two different size ranges, only one cap screw record will be created in the Bolt Selection Filter. The PDS Translator will arbitrarily choose one of the two cap screw commodity codes, and the specification writer must manually add the second cap screw by use of a different size range.

On the Gasket Selection Filter sheet, define the value for ring number. The maximum temperature was used as the ring number in the delivered PDS data, but a rule has not been defined to translate from the commodity code and maximum temperature to ring number.

On the Permissible Taps Data sheet, define the value for IsPreferredTap.

Optionally, edit the Index sheet. Add or edit hyperlinks.

Optionally, edit the Revision History sheet.

4. Save the catalog and specification workbooks and exit.

5. Open the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and edit as necessary. Save and exit.

For the CL51 through CL56 rating items, the rating must be changed to a schedule/thickness value.

PDS geometry standards must be replaced with industry standards. The following table shows the corresponding US Practice Geometry standards.

6 = 'PDS- P1'

7 = 'PDS- P2'

8 = 'PDS- P3'

11 = 'PDS- I1'

12 = 'PDS- I2'

13 = 'PDS- I3'

16 = 'PDS- Op1'

17 = 'PDS- Op2'

18 = 'PDS- Op3'

For reinforcing pads using a geometry standard of 6 (or other), the value can be removed from the PipingCommodityMatlControlData worksheet in column P. This record is not required for SmartPlant 3D.

Items using any user-defined or customized geometry standards require that the values are added to the AllCodelists workbook.



Required Worksheets

This topic provides information about the worksheets that are required for loading into a new Catalog database.

If you are translating reference data from PDS, this information will be helpful as you edit the output from the translator.

prefix_Catalog.xls

Worksheet Name Comments

CustomClassInterfaceList

CustomInterfaces

CatalogRoot

GUIDs

Revision History (optional)

Part Classes - dependent on the input files for the translation

Worksheets listed in bold are required.



prefix_Specification.xls


NPDEquivalence

MaterialsData

Bolt Extension

StandardNotesData

PipingMaterialsClassData

BoltCommodityCodeSubstRule

PipingCommodityMatlControlData

ValveOperatorMatlControlData

PipingSpecialtyClassData

PipingInstrumentClassData

PipingCommodityProcurementData

DefaultProjectOptions ShortCodeHierarchyRule PreferredStudBoltLength StudBoltCalculationTolerance PreferredMachBoltLength MachBoltCalculationTolerance PreferredCapScrewLength CapScrewCalculationTolerance WeldModelRepresentation PortAlignment SlipOnFlangeSetbackDistance WeldTypeRule DefaultChangeOfDirection DefaultCommoditySelectionRule MinimumPipeLength MinPipeLengthPurchase FieldFitLength MatingPorts FlaredPipe FluidDensity BoltExtension

These worksheets are project-related worksheets in the specification reference data.

Bulleted worksheets are present in the translated output file.

NPDEquivalence and MaterialsData worksheets are present in the output; however, they may be empty in the translated workbook.

Worksheets in bold are the minimum required.

Worksheets in italics are required only if the corresponding commodities exist in the piping commodity filter. For example, if stud bolts are present, then the PreferredStudBoltLength worksheet is required.



prefix_Specification.xls


Service Limits

Pipe Nominal Diameters

Pipe Branch

Permissible Taps

Joint Quality Factor

ThicknessDataRule

ReinforcingPadData

Reinforcing Weld Data

PipingCommodityFilter

BoltSelectionFilter

NutSelectionFilter

WasherSelectionFilter

GasketSelectionFilter

ClampSelectionFilter

CorrosionAllowance MinimumPipeLengthRulePerSpec MinPipeLengthPurchasePerSpec PipeBendingElongation PipeBendingElongationPerSpec PipeBendRadii BendAngles DefaultChangeOfDirectionPerSpec WeldClearanceRule InsideSurfaceTreatment ServiceLimitsForJackets PipeBranchForJackets PermissibleJacketAndJumperSizes PermissibleJacketSizeExceptions FlaredPipePerSpec PortAlignmentPerSpec FieldLiningThickness PipeTakedownParts

These worksheets are specification- related worksheets in the specification reference data.

The bulleted worksheets are present in the translated output file.

Worksheets in this row are required for each piping material class.

Worksheets in bold are the minimum required.



AllCodeLists.xls


All worksheets The translator does not convert codelists. Make sure that the codelists meet the project requirements.

AllCommon.xls


Material

OutfittingCrossSections

The required worksheets are shown in bold.

The AllCommon.xls workbook also contains worksheets with delivered generic data for piping.

BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls


All worksheets This workbook is required for isometric drawing extraction.

Equipment.xls


All worksheets This workbook is required for equipment placement.

GenericNamingRules.xls


All worksheets Required.

InsulationData.xls


All worksheets This workbook is required if you want to have insulation specifications.

StructCrossSections-AISC-LRFD-3.0.xls


All worksheets This workbook is required for placement of US steel sections.



Create Commodity Codes 1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to the software installation folder.



3. Select the Create Commodity Codes option on the PDS Piping Reference Data Translator dialog box.

4. Under Commodity Code Option, specify either the contractor commodity codes or the industry commodity codes.

5. In the PDS Code Lists box, browse to the location where the PDS codelist information is stored, and enter the name of a workbook. The codelists are in Excel workbook format (.xls).

6. In the SmartPlant 3D Piping Specification Data box, browse to the location that stores your piping specification workbook (xls). Enter the name of a workbook.

The software includes template files for piping specification and catalog data in the CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin folder: Piping Specification Template.xls and Piping Catalog Template.xls.

7. In the SmartPlant 3D Piping Catalog Data box, browse to the location that stores your piping catalog workbook (.xls). Enter the name of a workbook.


9. Click Create.

For the industry commodity code option, you can view the resulting Piping Commodity Filter sheet and the Pipe Stock sheet to see the updated commodity codes. The Bolt Selection Filter and Gasket Selection Filter commodity codes are also translated.

For the contractor code option, the following items will not generate a new commodity code unless the table checker output generated table names for these items: nipples, blind flanges, reinforcing pads, and reinforcing welds.

PDS Piping Reference Data Translator Dialog Box Allows you to translate PDS reference data to SmartPlant 3D reference data.

Translate PDS Reference Data - Translates PDS data.

Populate 'Dimension Table Names' Rule - Creates one of the translation rules.

Create Commodity Codes (optional) - Updates the contractor or industry commodity codes.

Commodity Code Option - Allows you to specify whether you want to update the contractor or industry commodity codes. This option is available when you are using the Translate PDS Reference Data mode or the Create Commodity Codes mode.

PDS ASCII Files Location - Specifies the location of the PDS reference data files.

PDS Translation Rules - Specifies the translation rules file. This file is in Excel workbook (.xls) format.

PDS Code Lists - Specifies the location of the SmartPlant 3D codelist file. This file is in Excel workbook (.xls) format. This box is unavailable for the Populate 'Dimension Table Names' Rule option.



SmartPlant 3D Piping Excel File - Specifies the SmartPlant 3D reference data file. This file is in Excel workbook (.xls) format. This box is unavailable for the Populate 'Dimension Table Names' Rule option.

SmartPlant 3D Piping Specification Data - Specifies the piping specification data file. This file is in Excel workbook (.xls) format. This box is only available for the Create Commodity Codes option.

SmartPlant 3D Piping Catalog Data - Specifies the piping catalog data file. This file is in Excel workbook (.xls) format. This box is only available for the Create Commodity Codes option.

It is possible that the catalog and specification information is in one file.

Translator Error Log - Specifies the location for the log file that provides the results of the process.

Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility The Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup utility is a tool for cleaning up translated PDS piping specification data by merging common records that can result from the differing structures of PDS and SmartPlant 3D piping reference data.

Here are some important points to remember about this utility.

The Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup utility deletes duplicate records in the piping commodity filter.

The utility scans the Piping Nominal Diameters sheet for valid sizes, then processes the Piping Commodity Filter (PCF, in this topic) sheet in the specified file, and merges common records when the values of all properties (except the First Size, From and First Size, To properties) are identical.

The utility does not support the cleanup of catalog (part) sheets.

The utility can clean only one piping commodity filter sheet at a time.

The utility overwrites the cleaned specification PCF workbook and reports results in a log file.

Limitations

The Piping Nominal Diameters sheet and the Piping Commodity Filter (PCF) sheet must be in the workbook specified for processing.

The utility does not merge multi-size items such as reducers, reducing tees, and so forth, unless all the records in the first size and second size match.

The utility may change the formatting of some merged cells. If you require specific formatting, it may be necessary to apply the desired formats to modified cells after the cleanup is completed.

For assistance with translating your PDS data, contact Intergraph Process, Power & Marine Support.

See Also Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 41)



Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility

Before running the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup utility, you must convert at least one PDS specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one catalog workbook per spec. The specification workbook contains the piping commodity filter and piping nominal diameter information.


2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click CleanupUtility.exe.


3. In the Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the Piping Commodity Filter and Pipe Nominal Diameter sheets. This workbook must not be read-only.

4. In the Log file box, browse to the location where you want the log file stored.

5. Click Start Cleanup. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on the dialog box. Once completed, "Finished" appears on the dialog box.

The process overwrites the Excel workbook.

The process does not mark any records in the workbook as changed.

See Also Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 40)

Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility

This utility allows you to clean piping commodity filter data after translation. Duplicate records in the piping commodity filter are deleted. The utility also merges records when the values of all properties (except the First Size, From and First Size, To properties) are identical.


Excel file - Specifies the Excel specification workbook (.xls format) that contains the Piping Commodity Filter and Pipe Nominal Diameter sheets.

Log file - Specifies the log file that provides the results of the process.

Start Cleanup - Starts the process. The utility saves the data upon completion of the process.

See Also Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 40) Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility (on page 41)



Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility The Pipe Branch Cleanup utility is a tool for cleaning translated PDS piping specification branch table data by removing invalid records based on available piping diameters per spec. These records may exist in translated PDS reference data or user-defined specification workbooks.


The utility scans the Pipe Nominal Diameters sheet for allowable sizes per spec.

The utility then applies the available diameters to the appropriate branch tables.

The utility removes records from the Pipe Branch sheet that reference invalid diameters for the spec as defined in the Pipe Nominal Diameters worksheet. Put another way, the utility eliminates pipe branch records for any sizes that are outside the permissible NPD rule for the corresponding piping specification.

The utility can clean only one branch sheet at a time.

The utility edits the branch sheet and reports results in a log file.

Limitations

The utility does not remove duplicate records from the branch tables.

The Pipe Branch and Pipe Nominal Diameters sheets must exist in separate workbooks. One way to set this up is to open the piping specification workbook, and cut and paste the Pipe Nominal Diameters sheet into another workbook. The specification workbook has the branch sheet in it. After the process is over, copy the nominal diameters sheet back into the specification workbook.


See Also Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42)

Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility

Before running the Pipe Branch Cleanup utility, you must convert at least one PDS specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one catalog workbook per spec.

For branch cleanup, the Pipe Branch and Pipe Nominal Diameters sheets must be in separate workbooks.


2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click PipeBranchCleanupUtility.exe.


3. In the PipeBranch Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the Pipe Branch sheet.

4. In the PipeNominalDiameters box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the Pipe Nominal Diameters sheet.




6. Click Start Cleanup. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on the dialog box. Once completed, "Finished" appears on the dialog box.

The process overwrites the Excel Pipe Branch workbook.

The process does not mark any records in the workbook as changed.

See Also Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42)

Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility

This utility cleans pipe branch data after translation. It eliminates records from the Pipe Branch sheet for any sizes that are outside the permissible NPD rule for the corresponding piping specification.


PipeBranch Excel file - Specifies the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the Pipe Branch sheet.

PipeNominalDiameters - Specifies the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the Pipe Nominal Diameters sheet.


Start Cleanup - Starts the process. The utility saves the data upon completion of the process.

See Also Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42) Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility (on page 42)

Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility The Piping Reference Data Merge utility is a tool for merging translated PDS reference data.


The utility does not support the merging of specification workbooks.

The utility can merge as many catalog (part) workbooks as required.

The utility merges the workbooks and reports results in a log file.


See Also Use the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43)



Use the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility

Before running the Piping Reference Data Merge utility, you must convert at least two PDS specifications using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one catalog workbook per spec. The Piping Reference Data Merge utility merges catalog (part) workbooks.


2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click PipingReferenceDataMergeUtility.exe.


3. In the Input Excel Files location box, browse and select the location that stores the files to merge.

4. In the Output Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook (.xls format) that will contain the merged data.


6. Click Start. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on the dialog box. Once completed, "Finished" appears on the dialog box.

The output workbook includes a Sheet1 worksheet. You can remove this sheet and save the workbook before bulk loading. Not removing it does not impact the load, although a message is printed in the log file.

Worksheets unique to a specific source workbook are copied to the new output workbook.

In the case of worksheets that are common to all the input workbooks, unique data records (rows) are included in the output.

In the case of worksheets that are common to all input workbooks, if data is duplicated, then the data from the first worksheet is taken. The utility ignores duplicate data from the subsequent common worksheets.

See Also

Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43)

Piping Reference Data Spreadsheet Merge Utility

This utility merges translated catalog (part data) workbooks into one workbook.


Input Excel Files location - Specifies the location of the workbooks that you want to merge.

Output Excel file - Specifies the single Excel workbook that will contain all merged data.


Start - Starts the process.

See Also Using the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43) Use the Piping Reference Data Merge Utility (on page 43)



Use the UoM Conversion Utility

Before running the UoM Conversion utility, you must convert at least one PDS specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one catalog workbook per spec.

If you have input data in more than one workbook, you can merge the data into one workbook using the Piping Reference Data Merge utility. The UoM Conversion utility must have the input data in one workbook.


2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click UoMConversion.exe.


3. In the Piping Parts Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with the piping part data to convert.

4. In the NPD Equivalence Rule Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with the rule data.

A default NPD Equivalence Rule workbook is delivered in the [Product Directory]\Core\Shared\UOMServices\xls folder. This file helps convert units from imperial (inches) to metric (mm).

You must remove the Read-only property on the NPD Equivalence Rule workbook before running the conversion process.

If you want to convert units from metric (mm) to imperial (inches), you must revise the delivered NPD Equivalence Rule workbook.


6. Click Start Convert. As the utility processes the files, you can view the status messages on the dialog box. Once completed, "Finished" appears on the dialog box.

Use the UoM Conversion Utility

Before running the UoM Conversion utility, you must convert at least one PDS specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one catalog workbook per spec.

If you have input data in more than one workbook, you can merge the data into one workbook using the Piping Reference Data Merge utility. The UoM Conversion utility must have the input data in one workbook.


2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click UoMConversion.exe.


3. In the Piping Parts Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with the piping part data to convert.



4. In the NPD Equivalence Rule Excel file box, browse and select the Excel workbook with the rule data.

A default NPD Equivalence Rule workbook is delivered in the [Product Directory]\Core\Shared\UOMServices\xls folder. This file helps convert units from imperial (inches) to metric (mm).

You must remove the Read-only property on the NPD Equivalence Rule workbook before running the conversion process.




UoM Conversion Utility

This utility converts the units of measure in translated piping part reference data.


Piping Parts Excel file - Specifies the workbook with the units that you want to convert.

NPD Equivalence Rule Excel file - Specifies the workbook that contains the NPD rule data used in the conversion process. A default NPD Equivalence Rule workbook is delivered in the [Product Directory]\Core\Shared\UOMServices\xls folder. This file helps convert units from imperial (inches) to metric (mm).



Start Convert - Starts the process.

See Also Use the UoM Conversion Utility (on page 45)

Using the OD to NPD Utility The OD to NPD utility is a tool for determining the NPD from the Plain Piping Generic Data using the OD, End Standard, and Schedule (OD Reihe number). The utility adds the NPD values for DIN male fittings to the piping catalog workbook.


See Also Use the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46)



Use the OD to NPD Utility

Before running the OD to NPD utility, you must convert at least one PDS specification using the PDS translator. The conversion results in one specification workbook and one catalog workbook per spec.


2. Under CatalogData\PDSTranslator\Bin, double-click ODtoNPD.exe.


3. In the Piping Catalog Excel file box, browse and select the piping catalog workbook (.xls format).

4. In the PDS Model Code Rule Excel file box, browse and select the PDS model code rule workbook (.xls format).

5. In the Log file box, browse to specify the log file for the conversion process.


See Also Using the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46)

OD to NPD Utility

This utility determines the NPD from the Plain Piping Generic Data using the OD, End Standard, and Schedule (OD Reihe number). The utility adds NPD values for DIN male fittings to the piping catalog workbook.


Piping Catalog Excel file - Specifies the piping catalog Excel workbook (.xls format), which contains the Plain Piping Generic Data.

PDS Model Code Rule Excel file - Specifies the Excel workbook (.xls format) that contains the PDS model code rules.


Start Convert - Starts the process. The utility saves the data upon completion of the process.

See Also Using the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46) Use the OD to NPD Utility (on page 46)


S E C T I O N 3

The software allows you to modify the reference data using two methods. One method is editing the Excel workbooks and then bulk loading your changes into the Catalog database. You must bulk load the Excel data in order to use the modified reference data in the software; it is not sufficient to change only the Excel workbooks. The second method is using the commands in the Catalog task.

To edit the Excel data, you must understand the content and format of the workbooks.

Many of the delivered workbooks contain data unique to a given function or discipline. For example, there are separate Excel workbooks for Piping, Structure, and so forth. There are also common workbooks that contain data for more than one discipline; one example is the AllCodeLists.xls workbook, which contains codelists. For a list of workbooks and corresponding documentation, see Delivered Excel Workbooks (on page 50).

Several sheets are common to most of the reference data workbooks. These sheets include comments about the revision history, links to the other sheets, custom interface and attribute definitions, and hierarchy information. For a list of the common sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).

Other sheets in the workbooks contain component-specific information for objects in reference data. These sheets define part classes, which are groups of related objects. Each part class contains one or more parts, which are unique instances of that type of object. For example, a part class can be Inline Centrifugal Fans. The parts in that part class could be models that run 1/3, 1/6, or 1/8 horsepower. Part class names must be unique across the entire Catalog. However, you can relate the same unique part class to different disciplines, such as piping and equipment.

Before you modify a workbook, save a backup copy. That way, you can always bulk load the previous data.

Do not modify the contents of the GUIDs sheets in the delivered sample workbooks or in workbooks that you used to create the Catalog database set for a project.

Naming limitations exist for some of the reference data. For example, custom attribute names and sheet names cannot exceed 30 characters. In addition, you cannot use reserved keywords and special characters in the names. For more information, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).

See Also Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57) Delivered Excel Workbooks (on page 50) Catalog Hierarchy Sheets (on page 73)

Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data



Delivered Excel Workbooks The delivered Excel workbooks are located at [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles.

Additional workbooks also exist. For more information, see Appendix: Other Reference Data (on page 295).

File Name Description For more information...

AllCodeLists.xls Defines all codelists in the software.

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide, Appendix: Codelists

AllCommon.xls Defines piping generic data, outfitting cross sections, and units of measurement.

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide, AllCommon Reference Data

AllStructCommon.xls List .bmp's used for cross-sections.

Structure Reference Data Guide

BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls Defines information for isometric drawings.

Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide

CableTray.xls Defines cable tray classes and parts.

Electrical Reference Data Guide

CableWay.xls Defines cableway specifications and rules.


Cabling.xls Defines cable classes and parts.


Carnes HVAC Catalog.xls Defines HVAC parts from the Carnes catalog.

HVAC Reference Data Guide

Conduit.xls Defines conduit classes and parts.


DoorsEquipment.xls Defines doors, windows, and louvers for placement in walls.

Equipment Reference Data Guide

Drawings.xls Defines volumes used in the generation of orthographic spatial drawings.

Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide

Ductbank.xls Defines ductbank specifications.


Equipment.xls Defines equipment classes and parts.

Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide

EquipmentComponent.xls Defines equipment component classes and parts.

Equipment and Furnishings Reference Data Guide

GenericNamingRules.xls Defines naming rule programs. SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide, Naming Rules Reference Data

GCGeomCmds.xls Structure

GCGeomDefs.xls Structure




GCMemberDefs.xls Structure

GCParamDefs.xls Structure

GCPortDefs.xls Structure

GridsCodelist.xls, GridsDrawingStyleIntf.xls

Provides data for controlling the display of grid lines in drawing styles.

Grids Reference Data Guide

HS_Anvil.xls, HS_Anvil_Codelist.xls, HS_Assembly.xls, HS_Assembly_Codelist.xls, HS_GTypeComponent.xls, HS_HgrAisc- LRFD-3.1 Deprecated.xls, HS_LRParts.xls, HS_S3DParts.xls HS_S3DParts_Codelist.xls HS_Str-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls HS_System.xls, HS_System_Codelists.xls HS_Utility.xls, HS_Utility_Codelist.xls

Defines hangers and supports. Hangers and Supports Reference Data Guide

Hvac.xls Defines heating, ventilation, and air conditioning materials.


IFCRule.xls Defines interference checking rules.

Interference Checking Guide

Instrument Data.xls Defines data for piping instruments.

Piping Reference Data Guide

InsulationData.xls Defines insulation specifications.

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide, Insulation Reference Data

Lindab HVAC Catalog.xls Defines HVAC parts from the Lindab catalog.


ModuleTypes.xls Defines part classes for the Copy to Catalog and Paste from Catalog commands.

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide, Module Types Reference Data

On-the-fly Instruments.xls Defines part classes for on-the-fly instruments.


On-the-fly Piping Specialties.xls

Defines part classes for on-the-fly piping specialties.


Piping Catalog.xls Defines piping part classes for specifications translated from PDS.





Piping Specialty Data.xls Defines piping specialties classes for specifications translated from PDS.


Piping Specification.xls Defines piping specifications and rules.


Piping.xls Provides sample piping reference data.


Reports.xls Defines reporting templates. Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide

Shapes.xls Defines shapes for designing equipment (Place Designed Equipment command in the Equipment and Furnishings task) and for volumes (Place Volume using Primitive Shapes command in the Space Management task).

SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide

SpaceMgmt.xls Defines areas, zones, and volumes.

Space Management Reference Data Guide

Spiral HVAC Catalog.xls Defines HVAC parts from the Spiral catalog.


Standard Nozzle Data.xls Defines nozzles for piping, conduit, cable, and cable tray.

SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide, Standard Nozzle Data

StructAssemblyConnections.xls

Defines assembly connections. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructCrossSections- AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls

Contains the American Institute of Steel Construction - Manual of Steel Construction (LRFD) version 3.0 cross sections.


StructCrossSections- MISC-SHAPES- 1.0.xls

Contains miscellaneous rectangular solid and circular solid cross sections.


StructCustomCodeList.xls Structure Reference Data Guide

StructEquipFoundations.xls

Defines equipment foundations. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructFootings.xls Defines footings. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructFrameConnections.xls

Defines frame connections, which describe the positioning relationship between member systems.


StructHandrails.xls Defines handrails. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructInsulationSpec.xls For Fireproofing Structure Reference Data Guide




StructLadders.xls Defines ladders. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructMemberFireproofing.xls

For Fireproofing Structure Reference Data Guide

StructOpeningsMetric.xls Defines standard opening shapes.


StructPlateDimensions.xls Defines plate information used in assembly connections.


StructSlabAssemblyConnections.xls

Defines assembly connections for slabs.


StructSlabGeneral.xls Defines slabs for structure. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructSlabLayer.xls Defines layers for slabs. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructSplitConnections.xls Defines split connections. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructStairs.xls Defines stairs. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructWallAssemblyConnections.xls

Defines assembly connections for walls.


StructWallCrossSection.xls

Defines wall cross sections. Structure Reference Data Guide

StructWallGeneral.xls Defines the walls that you want to add to your catalog and hence to your model.


StructWallLayer.xls Defines the individual layers of walls that you want to place.


StructWallOperators.xls Defines wall operators. Structure Reference Data Guide

Ten_Specs_CatalogData.xls

Defines piping part classes. This data is a subset of the data contained in Piping_Catalog.xls.


Ten_Specs_SpecificationData.xls

Defines piping specifications and rules. This data is a subset of the data contained in Piping_Specification.xls.


See Also Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data (on page 49)



Minimum Reference Data When you create a new catalog, you must bulk load a minimum amount of reference data in order for the software to function properly. You must bulk load the workbook(s) for the disciplines that you want to work with and any other workbooks with related data such as codelists, naming rules, and so forth.

For example, if you want to create a catalog for piping and equipment only, bulk load AllCodelists.xls, AllCommon.xls, Equipment.xls, EquipmentComponent.xls, GenericNamingRules.xls, InsulationData.xls, Shapes.xls (for designed equipment), Ten_Specs_SpecificationData.xls, and Ten_Specs_CatalogData.xls.

When using the Bulkload utility to create a new catalog, you must use the AppRepos.dat template file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the administrator computer.

Discipline Required Workbooks in Catalog

Cable AllCodelists.xls

Cabling.xls


Cable Tray AllCodelists.xls

AllCommon.xls

CableTray.xls


Cableway AllCodelists.xls

AllCommon.xls

CableWay.xls


Conduit AllCodelists.xls

Conduit.xls


MatingPort Sheet

Drawings and Reports

AllCodelists.xls

Drawings.xls for volume drawings

BulkLoadIsoKeys.xls for isometric drawings or spooling

Reports.xls for report templates

Equipment and Furnishings

AllCodelists.xls

AllCommon.xls

Equipment.xls

EquipmentComponent.xls


InsulationData.xls

Shapes.xls for designed equipment




Grids AllCodelists.xls


Hangers and Supports

AllCodelists.xls

AllCommon.xls


HS_Anvil.xls, HS_Anvil_Codelist.xls,

HS_Assembly.xls, HS_Assembly_Codelist.xls

HS_LRParts.xls

HS_HgrAisc-LRFD-3.1_Deprecated.xls

HS_Str-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls

HS_Struct-ASIC-LRFD-3.1.xls

HS_System.xls, HS_System_Codelists.xls

HS_Utility.xls, HS_Utility_Codelist.xls

StructCrossSections-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls

StructCrossSections-MISC-LRFD-3.1.xls

When bulkloading reference data for Hangers and Supports, you must bulkload the StructCrossSections-AISC-LRFD-3.1.xls and StructCrossSections-MISC-LRFD-3.1.xls workbooks before you bulkload the HS_Utility.xls workbook. Failure to do so will result in bulkloading errors.

HVAC AllCodelists.xls

AllCommon.xls


HVAC.xls

InsulationData.xls

Interference Checking

AllCodelists.xls


IFCRule.xls

Layout AllCodelists.xls

Auto Router Rules.xls

Piping AllCodelists.xls

AllCommon.xls


InsulationData.xls

Ten_Specs_SpecificationData.xls

Ten_Specs_CatalogData.xls

Piping instruments require Instrument Data.xls.

Piping specialties require Piping Specialty Data.xls.

A larger set of piping specifications and data are in Piping




Specification.xls and Piping Catalog.xls.

Metric piping specifications are in Piping.xls.

Space Management

AllCodelists.xls


Shapes.xls for volumes

SpaceMgmt.xls

Structural Analysis AllCodelists.xls


Structure AllCodelists.xls

AllCommon.xls


StructAssemblyConnections.xls

StructCrossSections_AISC_LRFD_3.1.xls

StructCrossSections-MISC_SHAPES-1.0.xls

StructEquipFoundations.xls

StructFootings.xls

StructFrameconnections.xls

StructHandrails.xls

StructInsulationSpec.xls

StructLadders.xls

StructMemberFireproofing.xls

StructOpeningsMetric.xls

StructPlateDimensions.xls

StructSlabAssemblyConnections.xls

StructSlabGeneral.xls

StructSlabLayer.xls

StructSplitConnections.xls

StructStairs.xls

StructWallAssemblyConnections.xls

StructWallCrossSection.xls

StructWallGeneral.xls

StructWallLayer.xls

StructWallOperators.xls

Systems and Specifications

AllCodelists.xls


The Copy to Catalog or Paste from Catalog commands require ModuleTypes.xls.

Control points require GenericNamingRules.xls.

Nozzles for piping, conduit, cable, and cable tray require Standard Nozzle Data.xls.



MatingPort sheet is required when placing the conduit fittings. This sheet is located in the Ten_Specs_SpecificationData.xls.

See Also Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data (on page 49)

Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks The following sheets appear in most of the Excel workbooks, which are located in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles folder on the administrator computer.

Revision History*

Legend*

Index*

Custom Interfaces

GUIDs

CatalogRoot

ClassNodeType

R-ClassNodeDescribes

R-Hierarchy

* The Bulkload utility does not process these sheets, so you can enter any comments and information on them.

In addition to the common sheets, each Excel workbook contains unique sheets. Some of the unique sheets define classes of objects, and other unique sheets define tabular reference data, such as pipe specifications. No two sheets in the same workbook can have the same name.

You should not change the sheet name for the Custom Interfaces, R- ClassNodeDescribes, ClassNodeType, and GUIDs sheets.

Revision History

This sheet contains comments that describe modifications to the workbook, the person who made the modifications, and the date modified. Updates to this sheet are not mandatory, but they are recommended for internal tracking purposes. This sheet is not processed by the Bulkload utility. The text on this sheet is purely for the benefit of change tracking, notes, and revision records. For more information, see Revision History Sheet (on page 59).

Legend

This sheet provides information about common conventions in the workbook. It lists the keywords and the associated meanings. This sheet is not processed by the Bulkload utility. For more information, see Legend Sheet (on page 60).

Index

This sheet provides a list of all the classes in the workbook and links to each sheet. This sheet is not processed by the Bulkload utility. For more information, see Index Sheet (on page 61).

Custom Interfaces

This sheet defines user attributes that are in the reference data. This sheet describes the names of attributes, such as length and weight, and contains information about the units of



measurement. The Custom Interfaces sheet also defines links between reference data parameters and parametric symbol arguments.

You can control whether the attributes are Read/Write or Read-Only. For more information about attribute access, see Controlling Access to Attributes (on page 63).

For more information about custom interfaces and attributes, see Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68). For more information about units of measurement, see Appendix: Units of Measure (on page 261).

Custom Class Interface List

This sheet lists any additional virtual interfaces that will be implemented by non-virtual classes. During the bulkload process, these interfaces are mapped to the specified classes. For more information, see Custom Class Interface List Sheet (on page 70).

GUIDs (Globally Unique Identifiers)

This sheet contains identification numbers for the part classes. For more information, see GUIDs Sheet (on page 70).

The Custom Interfaces, Custom Class Interface List, and GUIDs sheets are metadata definition sheets. Familiarity with the metadata is important when copying objects between models with different catalogs.

CatalogRoot

This sheet defines the name of the root folder for the data in a workbook. The catalog root is the highest allowable level in the hierarchy for a discipline. For example, in the Equipment.xls workbook, the root folder is Equipment. This name appears in the Catalog task user interface. For more information, see CatalogRoot Sheet (on page 74).

ClassNodeType

This sheet allows you to create classification folders in the Catalog hierarchy. A classification folder is similar to a folder in Windows Explorer, except a classification folder can only contain other folders, not individual items. The ObjectName column contains the folder object name, which represents the internal name for the node in the software. The Name column contains the identifier name that appears in the Catalog task user interface. An example is an item with V205 in the ObjectName column and Towers in the Name column. The Bulkload utility and internal catalog know the item by its object name, V205. The Catalog task user interface displays the item name as Towers.

The ClassNodeType sheet does not specify the hierarchy of the classification folders. For more information, see ClassNodeType Sheet (on page 74).

R-ClassNodeDescribes

This sheet defines the parent-child relationships between the classification folders and the part classes. This sheet uses the object names of the classification folders and the names of the part classes. The RelationSource column contains the parents (classification folders), and the RelationDestination column contains the children (part classes). For example, the Pumps classification folder is the parent of a part class named Pump. For more information, see R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet (on page 74).

R-Hierarchy

This sheet defines the parent-child relationships among the folders in the Catalog hierarchy that are above the classification folders. This sheet uses the object names of the folders. For



example, RefDataEquipmentRoot has a child named Pumps. This sheet does not define new classification folders or part classes. For more information, see R-Hierarchy Sheet (on page 75).

See Also Catalog Hierarchy Sheets (on page 73) Adding Part Classes to the Catalog (on page 75)

Administrative Sheets

Topics Revision History Sheet .................................................................. 59 Legend Sheet................................................................................. 60 Index Sheet .................................................................................... 61

Revision History Sheet

The Revision History sheet provides a place for you to maintain a written record of the changes made to the workbook, such as the addition of a new sheet or modifications to existing sheets. The Bulkload utility does not read or modify this sheet.

When you create or update a workbook, you should note the change on the Revision History sheet. You must enter the text on this sheet manually; the Bulkload utility does not enter the text for you. Updating this sheet is not mandatory, but keeping a revision history can be helpful, especially when multiple users make changes to a workbook.

You can modify the format and content of the Revision History sheet as needed. The only item that must remain unchanged is the name of the sheet.

Below is some suggested information to include on this sheet.

Worksheet Name - Lists the name of the worksheet that was added, deleted, or modified.

Revision Description - Provides a description of the modifications and additions made to the workbook. For example, one description might be Added company standard butterfly valve.

By - Provides the name of the person who made the changes. You can provide the name in any format, such as first name and last name, initials, or Windows network logon name.

Date - Lists the date that the revisions were made. You can provide the date in any format, such as mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy.

Version Implemented - Lists the version of software in which the revision is included.

Not all workbooks have the Version Implemented column on this sheet.

See Also Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57)



Legend Sheet

The Legend sheet defines the keywords that you can use in the Excel workbooks for reference data. This sheet also contains a description of what each keyword does. The Bulkload utility does not read or modify this sheet.

You can modify the format and content of the Legend sheet as needed. The only item that must remain unchanged is the name of the sheet.

Below is some suggested information to include on this sheet.

Keyword - Lists the keywords used on many part class sheets.

Meaning - Contains a description of each keyword.

Keyword Meaning

! Denotes comment text. The Bulkload utility ignores workbook rows that begin with an exclamation point (!). You can insert a comment anywhere in the workbook.

Head Denotes the header row of the part data. The header row contains the names of the properties for the parts, not the actual values. The actual values are in the rows beneath this keyword, in the Start/End section.

Start Denotes the beginning of the part data. This section contains actual values for the properties.

End Denotes the end of the properties data for parts. The Bulkload utility ignores anything after the row marked with the End keyword.

Definition Denotes the overall definition of the part class, including the part class type, symbol definition, and nozzle identification and types.

The Definition section can contain occurrence attributes, which are properties that you can change for a specific part in the model.

You define an occurrence attribute by entering oa: in front of the property name on the part class sheet in the workbook. These properties appear on the Occurrence tab of a Properties dialog box.

SheetName (without the prefix R-) Denotes a worksheet name in the Excel workbook.

ObjectName Denotes a unique object identifier.

LikeThis Denotes a column heading. Italicize the column headings in the workbook.

Nozzle(i):Type Denotes a nozzle type such as Piping or HVAC. The designation (i) is the nozzle number. The Nozzle(i):Type keyword appears in the Definition section of a part class sheet.



Keyword Meaning

Nozzle(i):XXX Denotes a nozzle property on the nozzle type or generic nozzle. Some properties that can be defined are NPD (nominal piping diameter) and end preparation.

RelationSource Denotes the unique identifier for a source object.

RelationDestination Denotes the unique identifier for a destination object.

CreateTable Creates a codelist table in the database.


Index Sheet

The Index sheet contains links to all of the other sheets in the workbook. You can use this sheet to jump quickly to another sheet in the workbook, especially when that workbook contains many sheets. The Bulkload utility does not read or modify this sheet.

SheetName - Contains links to other sheets. Click a link to jump to that sheet in the workbook. When you add new classes to a workbook, you should update the Index sheet with the name of the new class, a comment, and a hyperlink to the sheet. See the Excel documentation for more information about how to do this action.

Remarks - Contains comment text to describe each sheet.

You can add columns to the Index sheet as needed.


Custom Interfaces Sheets

Topics Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces ...................................... 61 Controlling Access to Attributes ..................................................... 63 Add User Attributes to a Class....................................................... 67 Custom Interfaces Sheet ............................................................... 68 Custom Class Interface List Sheet ................................................ 70 GUIDs Sheet .................................................................................. 70

Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces

You should plan the addition and modification of custom interfaces, categories, and attributes in your catalog. To bulk load interfaces and attributes, you must have write or full control on at least one of the catalog permission groups, which are defined in Project Management. The following paragraphs describe the restrictions on additions, modifications, and deletions of the custom interfaces.



Interfaces

You can create a new interface on the Custom Interfaces sheet and then add it to the catalog using the Bulkload utility. You can also add an interface by adding an attribute associated with the interface to an existing part class sheet and running the Bulkload utility in the Add/Modify/Delete mode.

You can delete an existing interface by typing the letter D in the first column of the interface row. This action does not actually delete the interface from the database; it removes the interface from all of its implemented classes.

You should not modify the name of an interface, but you can change the category to which it was assigned.

If you add new interfaces after creating the Reports databases, you must re-generate the Reports databases in order to report on the new interfaces. If you modify an existing part class, you also must run the Synchronize Model with Catalog command in Project Management on any model that has occurrences of the class that you modified. (In addition, re-synchronizing the model with the catalog requires re-generation of the Reports databases).

For more information about re-generating database views and synchronizing the model, see the Project Management User's Guide.

When you add, modify, or delete an interface, the Bulkload utility re-generates views, but only virtual interface views and relation views (not interface views).

Categories

Categories are listed in the Property Categories codelist. If you want to use a new category name on an interface, you must add the new category name in the codelist and then bulk load. You can modify category names by editing the codelist.

Categories are across a model and dependent on the catalog. If multiple models make use of the same catalog, then the two models' interfaces and attributes are categorized identically.

Attributes

You can add attributes to existing interfaces by typing A in the first column of the rows to add.

You can also modify some attribute data. For example, you can modify the text in the Attribute User Name column, and you can change the category in which the attributes appear (for example, in the Standard, Dimensions, or other category). The category is governed by the CategoryName column on the Custom Interfaces sheet.

However, you cannot delete existing attributes after bulk loading them. If you try to delete existing attributes, the Bulkload utility will include warnings in the log file.

In addition to adding custom interfaces to part classes, you can add custom interfaces for systems and interference checking objects. The software includes sample workbooks that demonstrate how to add custom interfaces to systems and IFC objects. For more information, see Appendix: Other Reference Data (on page 295).

See Also Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68) Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57) Add User Attributes to a Class (on page 67)



Controlling Access to Attributes

It is possible to control whether an attribute can be modified or not. You can specify that certain attributes are Read-Only, and others are Read/Write.

Grouping Attributes

Because the Bulkload utility adds the entire interface when it processes an attribute, an attribute that needs to be Read- Only should have its own interface, or it should be grouped into an interface with other Read-Only attributes.

The following picture shows one-to-one relationships between attributes and interfaces on an example CustomInterfaces sheet. There is one attribute per interface.

It is not recommended that every attribute in the catalog have its own interface due to performance concerns. The recommended procedure is to group parameters logically, so that an interface contains either all Read-Only attributes, or all Read/Write attributes.



Assigning Read-Only to Attributes

You can specify that an attribute is Read-Only by setting the flag on the CustomInterfaces sheet.

The attribute will be Read-Only for every part class in the workbook. If users will need to change the value of the attribute for one type of part but should not have access to the same attribute on another part, than this approach cannot be used.

The Read-Only flag is set on the part that is placed on the model, and it is also set on the attribute in the Catalog database.

Bulkloading Attributes

The following steps happen when the Bulkload utility adds attributes to a part class.

1. The interfaces are defined in the Catalog Schema. These interfaces come from the CustomInterfaces sheet that appears in each workbook.

2. A part class is added to the Catalog Schema.

3. The Bulkload utility processes the part class and adds it to the Catalog database, along with its attributes.

4. The Bulkload utility processes the attributes on the part class sheet. Here is what the Bulkload utility does:

Gets each attribute and looks for its interface on the CustomInterfaces sheet.

Adds the interface to the Catalog Schema and gives the attribute the appropriate (Read/Write or Read-Only) access.

Every attribute in an interface is given the same access.



Moving Attributes to New Interfaces

The following procedure moves attributes to new interfaces in the catalog. In this example, a group of attributes is split among two new interfaces.

1. Delete the interface on which the attributes had been placed. Locate the interface on the CustomInterfaces sheet, and type a D in the first column in that row. Run the Bulkload utility in the Add/Modify/Delete mode.

2. On the CustomInterfaces sheet, create new interfaces and group the attributes.



3. To use the new interfaces, all part classes and items that use the attributes must now be modified. On a part class sheet, type an M in the first column of every row that uses the interfaces, including both the part class and item.

4. Run the Bulkload utility in the Add/Modify/Delete mode. This operation adds the interfaces from the CustomInterfaces sheet and modifies each part class and item to use the attributes from the new interfaces.

5. Synchronize the model and catalog to update all model occurrences to use the attributes form the new interfaces. For more information about synchronizing, see the Project Management User's Guide.

If the part class sheets use fully qualified interface names (example: Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>), you must edit the names on the part class sheets to reflect the new interfaces. Remember that the same attribute name can be used in multiple interfaces as long as a fully qualified name is used to define it for a part class.

Occurrence Attributes

Occurrence attributes are attributes with Read/Write access. These attributes are denoted by oa: at the top of a part class sheet.

In the software, occurrence attributes appear on the Properties dialog boxes, on the Occurrence tab or Parameters tab. If all oa: attributes are removed from the part class sheet, and the Bulkload utility is run, then all of the attributes will be Read-Only (grayed-out) on the Properties dialog boxes for parts in that part class.



See Also Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces (on page 61)

Add User Attributes to a Class

1. Open the Systems.xls file, which is delivered in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\DataFiles\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder. This file provides a sample that you can follow during this procedure.

2. Create a new workbook.

3. Click Insert > Worksheet, and add two sheets: CustomInterfaces and CustomClassInterfaceList.

4. On the CustomInterfaces sheet, type a name in the InterfaceName column.

This interface will contain the attributes that you want to add.

Begin the interface name with "IJUA".

5. In the Category column, type a category, if necessary.

If you do not type a category name (leave the column blank), the custom attributes will appear in the Standard category in the software.

To add a new category, you must add the category name to a codelist. For example, in the delivered AllCodeLists.xls, you would add the category name to the PropertyCategories sheet and then bulk load. The short description text and the text on the CustomInterfaces sheet must match.

6. Complete the remaining columns as necessary. For more information about the columns, see Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68).

7. On the CustomClassInterfaceList sheet, type a name in the ClassName column.

You can find this name using the 3D Schema Browser. For example, the pipe run class name is CPMPipeRun.

8. In the InterfaceName column, type the same name you specified for the new interface on the CustomInterfaces sheet.

9. Save and exit the workbook.

10. Bulk load the workbook in the Append mode, to ensure the schema update and regeneration of the views in the database. If you are using any codelists, remember to add the codelist files on the Bulkload dialog box.

Bulk Load Database with Data (on page 82)

The added attributes are available for all objects in the class that you specified, including the objects that are already modeled. You can select multiple instances of this class and then define common values.

See Also Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces (on page 61)



Custom Interfaces Sheet

The CustomInterfaces sheet allows you to load a custom schema into the metadata of a catalog. This sheet defines the customized user interfaces and attributes (properties) for the part classes in the workbook.

When you bulk load a workbook, the software looks at each user attribute on the class sheets and uses the Custom Interfaces sheet to decode the information. When an object uses a single attribute from an interface, the object also inherits all the attributes for that interface regardless of whether the object uses the other attributes.

The outcome of bulk loading a Custom Interfaces sheet is the GUIDs sheet. The Bulkload utility creates the GUIDs sheet if you are bulk loading a workbook for the first time. Successive attempts to load the workbook attempt to reuse the GUIDs available on the GUIDs sheet.

An interface is a collection of attributes. A complete interface definition includes one or more attribute names with associated data type, unit type, and optional symbol parameter. An attribute with the same name can exist on more than one interface. On a part class sheet, you can scope the user attributes based on their interfaces and symbol parameters. The scoping syntax is Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>. For example, for a part class Vessel, the user attribute Length is a property of an Interface IJUAVessel and the symbol parameter is H. In a part class Tank, the user attribute Length is a property of an Interface IJUATank and the symbol parameter is L. Then, the complete definition of the user attribute in each part class is IJUAVessel::Length<H> and IJUATank::Length<L>.

If the user-attribute name is unique (that is, the attribute is not shared with another interface), you only need to type the user-attribute name and symbol parameter on the class sheet. In the preceding example, you can type Length<H> in this case. If the attribute name is unique and the default symbol parameter is the same on the Custom Interfaces sheet and on the class sheet, then you only need to type the user attribute name on the class sheet: Length.

When you are adding a new part class that uses custom interfaces, regardless of whether the custom interfaces already reside in the Catalog database, you must still include the definition of the custom interfaces for the part class on the Custom Interfaces sheet. This Custom Interfaces sheet must reside in the same workbook as the part class that you are bulk loading.

You can use the Systems.xls workbook in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder as a sample when you want to add customized user attributes to certain objects. An example is adding attributes to pipe runs.

InterfaceName - Specifies the custom interfaces, which are property sets. Start each user-defined interface name with IJUA. For example, if you want to define a new interface called CentrifugalPump, name the interface IJUACentrifugalPump. You should not change system-defined interfaces, which start with IJ.

CategoryName - Specifies the category for the custom interface. System-defined interfaces (starting with IJ) are in the Standard category by default.

The purpose of the category is to filter the grid on the Properties dialog box and to assist in reporting queries. When you are working on a part in the model, you can view the categories on the General or Occurrence tab of the Properties dialog box. All attributes in IJ interfaces appear in the Standard category, while the attributes in IJUA interfaces appear in their specified categories.

AttributeName - Specifies the attributes available for the part classes in the workbook. The names cannot have any blanks or special characters.

The attribute name is the UserAttribute component in the syntax Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>. If the attribute name is unique throughout the



catalog's interfaces, then you do not need to specify the Interface:: portion of the syntax statement.

AttributeUserName - Provides a user-friendly name for the attribute. This name is optional and can include blank spaces. When users view a Properties dialog box or build a report query for an object, they see attribute user names, not attribute names.

Attribute user names do not need to be unique within the model.

Type - Specifies the data type for each attribute. For example, many attributes are associated with the Double data type, which is used for real numbers. Available data types include Bit, Char, Double, Short, Long, Number, Single, and String. Double and Char are the two most often used.

UnitsType - Specifies the unit type, which is defined in the software. If there is no unit type, you can leave this cell blank or type 0. The unit types are defined in the Core component of the software. For more information, see Appendix: Units of Measure (on page 261) in the SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide.

PrimaryUnits - Specifies the units for the attribute. If there is no primary unit, you can leave this cell blank or type 0. Like unit types, primary units are defined in the Core component of the software. For more information, see Appendix: Units of Measure (on page 261) in the SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide.

Primary units are the default units for a particular attribute if you do not specify units in user tasks. For example, if you only type a number for the pump flow rate on a class sheet without specifying units, the units are whatever you specified in the PrimaryUnits column for the flow rate attribute.

CodeList - Specifies a codelist for the attribute. If you want the attribute to use a codelist, type the name of the codelist in this column; otherwise, leave the column blank. The names of the codelists are listed in the 'Head' line on each sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook. On part sheets that use the codelisted attribute, specify the numerical value from the codelist.

For example, if you want to use a codelist for the end preparation attribute, type EndPreparation in the CodeList column on the Custom Interfaces sheet. Then, on a part sheet that uses this attribute, type 301 to indicate male ends, welded with beveled end.

Do not type a 0 in the Codelist column. Leave it blank if there is not a codelist for the attribute.

CodeListTableNamespace - Specifies the namespace of the codelist.

The CodeListTableNamespace column is presented as a sample on the Custom Interfaces sheet in the StructHandrails.xls workbook. One namespace is called REFDAT. For user-defined codelist tables, the namespace is UDP. For more information, see Select List (Codelist) Namespaces (on page 144).

OnPropertyPage - Specifies whether the attribute is listed on the Properties dialog box for the part class. You can type TRUE or 1, or FALSE or 0 in this column. The reason this column exists is that you might want to prevent users from viewing some attributes on the Properties dialog boxes.

ReadOnly - Specifies if the attribute is read-only on the user interface. Attributes that are not read-only are generally occurrence attributes, which are marked with oa: beside their names on the part class sheets in the class definition section. For more information about occurrence attributes, see Controlling Access to Attributes (on page 63) in the SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide.

SymbolParameter - Specifies a default symbol input parameter that the interface uses to drive the symbol. The symbol parameter names cannot have any blanks or special characters.

The symbol parameter name is the <Symbol Parameter> component in the syntax Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>. If the symbol parameter name on the Custom



Interfaces sheet is the same as the symbol input variable in the Visual Basic project, the Solid Edge assembly file, or the Symbol 2D cross section, then you do not need to specify the symbol parameter portion of the syntax on the class sheet.

If an attribute is used for naming rules only and is not used in a symbol, then you can leave the SymbolParameter column blank.

Custom Class Interface List Sheet

The CustomClassInterfaceList sheet maps interfaces to classes. Each interface and class must already exist in the Catalog Schema database. During processing, the Bulkload utility relates the custom-defined virtual interfaces to the specified non-virtual, system classes. The utility does not recognize any of the bulkload update modes and does not create new interfaces or classes while scanning this sheet.

Class Name - Lists the name of the non-virtual class.

Interface Name - Lists the name of the custom virtual interface.

GUIDs Sheet

The GUIDs sheet contains Globally Unique Identifiers, which are registry identifiers. The GUIDs are visible only in the Excel workbooks; the GUIDs do not appear on the user interface in the software.

One of the purposes of GUIDs is to create a connection between part classes in reference data and the occurrences created in the model from those part classes. For example, when you delete a part class, redefine it, and bulk load the new definition, you should keep the old GUID if you want any previously-created occurrences in the model to be connected to the new part class definition in reference data.

Another situation in which GUIDs are used is when you bulk load a spreadsheet to another, new catalog. The GUIDs for the objects in the new catalog will be exactly the same as those in the original catalog.

The GUIDs sheet records the GUIDs used when bulkloading the spreadsheet the first time. This sheet is specific to a particular workbook and contains only those GUIDs of the user classes and interfaces in that workbook.

The purpose of storing GUIDs is so that you can replace a Catalog database in the middle of a project. The replacement catalog must have the same name and location as the previous catalog. The GUIDs sheet helps to avoid the situation in which a replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid. If the GUIDs were not saved, this situation would be impossible because the Catalog and Model databases share the same schema.

Two utilities generate GUIDs: the Database Wizard and the Bulkload utility. The Database Wizard generates GUIDs when creating the Catalog database set from the delivered CatalogDB.dat file. The Bulkload utility generates GUIDs when creating a new Catalog database set using the New mode. When the Bulkload utility creates new GUIDs, it uses Excel to write these values to the workbooks. You must not have any Excel instances running when bulk loading, or the process locks.

After you have bulk loaded a catalog using Excel workbooks, you must not modify the GUID entries in the workbooks used to create the live database. Only the Bulkload utility should change data on a GUIDs sheet that is linked to a live Catalog database.

It is essential that you not manually modify any generated GUIDs.

Class/InterfaceName - Lists the part class names and interface names of the classes defined in the workbook. Custom interfaces are defined on the Custom Interfaces sheet.

PackageName - Lists the packages, if applicable, for the class and interface names.



GUID - Contains GUIDs for the part class occurrences and interface occurrences in the model. The software identifies an occurrence by this GUID when you place an object in the model.

AttributeName - Lists the user attribute names. This column is applicable only to those user interfaces for which user attributes have been defined. The column is empty for user classes.

DispID - Lists the DispIDs for the user attributes. This column is applicable only to those user interfaces for which user attributes have been defined. The column is empty for user classes.

The AttributeName and DispId columns are necessary for achieving metadata consistency between multiple catalogs.

Part Class Sheets

Topics Part Class Sheet ............................................................................ 71

Part Class Sheet

Many of the reference data workbooks contain part class sheets. Each part class sheet consists of the class definition and the parts definition. The class definition is marked with the keyword Definition, and the parts definition is marked with the keywords Head/Start/End.

Once you delete a part class, you cannot re-create it in the Catalog using the same name. Internally, a record of it is kept after you delete the part class. You can re-create the part class under a different part class name. The part items in the part class can remain the same (same names).

Class Definition

The class definition portion contains information for the entire class. When you define the individual parts, you can override the class information. If you do not redefine the information for a specific part, the software uses the information for the entire class.

Part Class Type - Specifies the type of part class. The part class types are defined on the Part Class Types sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.

The Bulkload utility processes a new part class only if the type in the Part Class Type column is in the Part Class Types select list. This check is for both specific part class types and generic part class types.

Symbol Definition - Specifies the symbol file for the part class. The following list shows the symbol file for each application that you can use to create the symbols.

Visual Basic: Project.Class Module

Solid Edge: Assembly (.asm) file

SmartPlant 3D 2D Symbols: Symbol (.sym) file

The following columns in the class definition are optional.

Codebase - Specifies the symbol's cabinet file name relative to the location in the Symbol and custom program file location box on the Bulkload dialog box. If you specify a Codebase value, the symbol code downloads the symbol .dll file from the cabinet file located on the symbol server.

Here is an example of an entry in the Codebase cell.

%CAB_SERVER%\Pump.CAB

Enter the text CAB_SERVER literally; do not replace it with a server name.



The Codebase column must be in the class definition section, not the parts definition section.

The purpose of using cabinet files to package symbols is to avoid the requirement of registering the symbols on each client. For more information about creating symbol packages, see the SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

Symbol Icon - Specifies a graphic file for the part class. You can view this graphic in the Catalog task interface or on a Properties dialog box in the software.

If the part class worksheet has a symbol icon file name present, but the symbol icon file is missing from the SharedContent share, then the Bulkload utility generates a warning in its log file.

User Class Name - Sets the user class name. This name is also known as a definition class name. You can use this field to provide a more meaningful name for the class or a name with spaces in it. This name appears in the Catalog task and Catalog browser control.

Occ Class Name - Sets the occurrence class name. This name appears in the business object hierarchy on the Object Type tab on the Filter Properties dialog boxes.

Additional columns in the class definition portion can include nozzle and occurrence attribute (oa:) information. For more information about occurrence attributes, see Controlling Access to Attributes (on page 63).

Parts Definition

Name - Provides the name of the part.

Part Description - Provides a description for the part.

Other columns in the parts definitions section can include nozzle and attribute information. You can view these attributes on the Definition tabs of the Properties dialog boxes in the software.

For more information about the parts definitions in each discipline, see the reference data guides available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

Do not use special characters such as < > . - ! ? + ' % , ; | & ~ * in the names of part classes (sheet names). The Bulkload utility will not create or modify the part classes if their names include these characters. Microsoft Excel prevents the use of ! and *, and Bulkload writes an error message to the log file for the other special characters.

If you add new part classes after creating the Reports databases, you must re-generate the Reports databases in order to report on the new part classes.

You can type fractional values for NPD (nominal piping diameter) in the class or parts definition sections. For example, you can type 2-1/2 or 2 1/2. The Bulkload utility interprets the value as 2.5.

If an attribute is used for naming rules only, then you do not need to define the attribute on a part class sheet.

See Also Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57) Adding Part Classes to the Catalog (on page 75) Controlling Access to Attributes (on page 63)



Catalog Hierarchy Sheets

Topics Catalog Hierarchy Sheets .............................................................. 73 CatalogRoot Sheet ........................................................................ 74 ClassNodeType Sheet ................................................................... 74 R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet ....................................................... 74 R-Hierarchy Sheet ......................................................................... 75

Catalog Hierarchy Sheets

You can customize the Catalog hierarchy for multiple levels. Each successive level is designed to segregate and categorize the reference data.

The last folder in each branch of the hierarchy is called a part class, which contains individual parts. For example, one part class in the delivered reference data is Horizontal Centrifugal Pump. The part class contains horizontal centrifugal pumps with different dimensions. The last folder in a branch can hold rules instead of parts.

The folder directly above a part class folder in the hierarchy is called a classification folder. Folders above classification folders are termed hierarchy folders. You can add as many hierarchy folders down through the hierarchy as necessary. Once you define a classification folder, that classification folder can only contain part classes. Part classes represent the lowest possible locations in the hierarchy.

If a folder in the hierarchy has children, all the immediate children must be of the same type. For example, a folder's immediate children can be part classes, or other folders, but not both part classes and folders.

Internal object names of the hierarchy folders and classification folders must be unique in the Catalog. Part class names must also be unique.

In the picture, Components and Bends/Elbows are hierarchy folders. The item 45degElbows is a classification folder, and E45 is a part class.

To customize the Catalog hierarchy, you must edit the Excel workbooks, which contain four sheets that control the hierarchy: CatalogRoot, ClassNodeType, R-Hierarchy, and R-ClassNodeDescribes. Hierarchy sheets do not contain attribute names; they contain object names.



When you add a part class to the Catalog hierarchy, you must update the hierarchy sheets, where necessary, in order to see the data in the Catalog task.

See Also Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders (on page 77) Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders (on page 75) CatalogRoot Sheet (on page 74) ClassNodeType Sheet (on page 74) R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet (on page 74) R-Hierarchy Sheet (on page 75)

CatalogRoot Sheet

The CatalogRoot sheet defines the root folder for the data in a workbook. The catalog root is the highest allowable level in the hierarchy for a discipline. For example, the Cabling.xls data is stored in the Cable root folder in the Catalog task.

Available roots are listed on the Catalog Root sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook.

Name - Specifies the name of the root folder for that workbook. There cannot be a blank space or special characters in the name of the root folder.

ClassNodeType Sheet

The ClassNodeType sheet defines the folder object names and corresponding user interface names.

ObjectName - Specifies the object name of a classification folder. Use this name when you reference the node on other sheets, such as the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet. This name must be unique in the Catalog.

Name - Specifies the user interface name of a classification folder. This name appears in the Catalog task user interface and does not need to be unique in the Catalog.

R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet

The R-ClassNodesDescribes sheet maps the classification folder names to the part classes. For example, the delivered Cabling.xls workbook lists a classification folder called CablesNode. A classification folder can have one or more part classes. The CablesNode classification folder is associated with the Power Cables, Communication Cables, Radio Frequency Cables, Fiber Optic Cables, and Hybrid Cables part classes on the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet.

All children of a classification folder must be part classes. You cannot mix part classes with folders beneath a classification folder.

RelationSource - Specifies the classification folder name. This name is the object name in the ObjectName column on the ClassNodeType sheet. This name must be unique in the Catalog. For more information, see ClassNodeType Sheet (on page 74) in the SmartPlant 3D Reference Data Guide.

RelationDestination - Specifies the part classes associated with the classification folder name. Part class names are the same as sheet names in the workbook and must be unique in the Catalog. When you select a part class folder in the Catalog task, you see the contents (parts) in the right pane of the window.



R-Hierarchy Sheet

The R-Hierarchy sheet maps parent and child relationships between folders in the Catalog hierarchy. For example, in the Equipment.xls workbook, one of the parents is CatalogRoot. The child associated with CatalogRoot is RefDataEquipmentRoot.

These folder names are object names, not names that appear on the user interface. These names must be unique in the Catalog.

A parent folder can have any number of children. However, a child folder can only have one parent. A familiar example is the hierarchy of folders in Windows Explorer.

RelationSource - Specifies the parent object names.

RelationDestination - Specifies the children object names.

The R-Hierarchy sheet specifies relationships between all parent and children folders, except part classes and the classification folders right above the part classes in the hierarchy. These folders are related on the R- ClassNodeDescribes sheet.

Using Catalog Hierarchy Sheets to Add Part Classes

Topics Adding Part Classes to the Catalog ............................................... 75 Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders ........................... 75 Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders ...................... 77

Adding Part Classes to the Catalog

To add a part class to the Catalog hierarchy, you must edit the Excel workbook for your task.

Before you modify a workbook, save a backup copy. That way, you can always bulk load the previous data.

When you add a part class to an existing classification folder, you just need to edit the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet. When you add a part class to a new classification folder, you must edit the ClassNodeType, R-Hierarchy, and R- ClassNodeDescribes sheets.

You must also add a specific part class sheet to the workbook. You can copy an existing part class sheet and modify it as necessary. You must create the symbol definition for the new part using Visual Basic, Solid Edge, or SmartPlant 2D Symbols.

If you add new part classes after creating the Reports databases, you must re- create the Reports databases in order to report on the new part classes.

See Also Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders (on page 75) Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders (on page 77)



Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders

Before you begin this procedure, you should create a symbol definition for the part class that you will add. You can use Visual Basic or Solid Edge to create the symbol definition. For more information about symbols, see the SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

In the Excel workbook for your task, copy and rename an existing sheet with the name of the part class that you want to add. The example in this procedure uses MyDistillationColumn as the part class.

It is helpful to draw a picture of the reference data hierarchy that you want before following this procedure.

This picture shows the hierarchy in the procedure example.

1. Open a reference data workbook in Microsoft Excel.

2. On the ClassNodeType sheet, insert a row before the End keyword and enter a name for the classification folder in the ObjectName column. For example, if you want to add a part class called MyDistillationColumn to the hierarchy, this part class can be grouped under a classification folder that contains distillation columns. In our example, enter DistillationColObj in the ObjectName column.

The object name of the classification folder is important because you will use it again in this procedure.

3. Also on the ClassNodeType sheet, enter the user interface name for the classification folder in the Name column. This name appears in the Catalog task user interface. In our example, type DistillationColumns.

4. On the R-Hierarchy sheet, relate the folder object names in the hierarchy. In our example, CatalogRoot is a parent to RefDataEquipmentRoot. The default hierarchy contains CatalogRoot in the RelationSource column and RefDataEquipmentRoot in the RelationDestination column.

5. Also on the R-Hierarchy sheet, in another row, type RefDataEquipmentRoot in the RelationSource column and DistillationColObj in the RelationDestination column.

All folders must be related in the hierarchy on the R-Hierarchy sheet, except the classification folder and the part class (these folders are related on the R- ClassNodeDescribes sheet).

6. On the R- ClassNodeDescribes sheet, relate the part class to the classification folder above the part class in the hierarchy. In the RelationSource column, type DistillationColObj. This name matches the object name of the classification folder that you entered on the ClassNodeType sheet. In the RelationDestination column, type the name of the part class, MyDistillationColumn.



7. Mark all of the rows that you added on the ClassNodeType, R-Hierarchy, and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets with the letter A.

8. Bulk load the workbook in the Add/Modify/Delete mode.


See Also Adding Part Classes to the Catalog (on page 75) Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders (on page 77)

Add Part Classes to Existing Classification Folders

Before you begin this procedure, you should create a symbol definition for the part class that you will add. You can use Visual Basic or Solid Edge to create the symbol definition. For more information about symbols, see the SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

In the Excel workbook for your task, copy and rename an existing sheet with the name of the part class that you want to add. The example in this procedure uses MyPump as the part class.

It is helpful to draw a picture of the reference data hierarchy that you want before following this procedure.

This picture shows the hierarchy in the procedure example.

1. Open a reference data workbook in Microsoft Excel.

2. On the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheet, relate the part class to the classification folder above the part class in the hierarchy. In the RelationSource column, type Pumps. This name matches the object name of the Pumps classification folder on the ClassNodeType sheet. In the RelationDestination column, type the name of the part class, MyPump.

3. Mark the row that you added with the letter A.

4. Bulk load the workbook in the Add/Modify/Delete mode.


See Also Adding Part Classes to the Catalog (on page 75) Add Part Classes to New Classification Folders (on page 75)


S E C T I O N 4

In This Section Using the Bulkload Modes ............................................................. 79 Bulk Load Database with Data ...................................................... 82 Bulkload Dialog Box ....................................................................... 86 Uniqueness of Objects ................................................................... 89 Moniker Information for Special Process Sheets........................... 98

Using the Bulkload Modes In order to use reference data in the software, you can transfer data in the Excel workbooks to the Catalog database using the Bulkload utility.

Bulkloading is a process that imports data from the Excel workbooks into the Catalog database. You should back up the workbooks as needed before you make modifications and begin the loading process.

The loading process has several modes available: New, Append, Add/Modify/Delete, and Delete and Replace. In addition, the Bulkload utility includes an option for creating flavors of Solid Edge parts.

The time taken by the bulk loading process varies. More time is required when a schema change (such as adding a codelist value, a new interface, or a part class) is made. Schema changes trigger the re-creation of the views in the database.

In the Append and Add/Modify/Delete modes, the Bulkload utility first looks for the default permission group in which to create the objects. If the default permission group is not found, then the utility creates the objects in the first available permission group to which the user has write access.

New

You should use the New mode when you are creating a new Catalog database.

The New mode is different from the Append and the Add/Modify/Delete modes in that a live database set (Catalog and Catalog Schema) is not already available on the server. In the New mode, you choose the database type and enter a name for the catalog that you want to create. You also select a template file to create the Catalog Schema.

When you run the Bulkload utility in the New mode, the utility creates interfaces. For information on limitations associated with interfaces, see Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68).

Append

You can use the Append mode when you want to add data from many new workbooks or worksheets to the Catalog database. When you use this mode, the software scans the data and adds only the new classes and parts to the database. The software does not observe any Add/Modify/Delete flags in this mode.

The Append mode is normally used for large updates to the catalog.

Loading Reference Data into the Catalog



Add/Modify/Delete

The Add/Modify/Delete mode is best used when you are modifying the database on a smaller scale or when you are modifying pre-existing classes. In this mode, the Bulkload utility scans the workbooks for flags at the beginning of each row. The table below defines the flags and the actions associated with them.

Flag Operation Notes

A Add The Bulkload utility adds the object to the database and removes the letter A from the row upon successful addition.

M Modify The Bulkload utility modifies the object in the database and removes the letter M from the row upon successful modification.

D Delete The Bulkload utility deletes the object, but does NOT remove the letter D. You must verify that the object was deleted using the log file.

For example, if the Bulkload utility sees an M at the beginning of a row, the software modifies that entry in the Catalog database with the changes in that row.

The Bulkload utility removes the A and M designations from the workbooks during the loading process. However, the rows marked with D are still marked with D. You can open the workbooks with rows marked D and comment out those rows manually after the bulkload. Type the ! symbol at the beginning of each row that you want to comment out. If you do not remove or comment out the deleted rows, you will receive errors the next time that you bulk load because the Bulkload utility will attempt to delete objects that no longer exist in the catalog.

You should be aware of the rules that affect deleting part classes and parts. You can delete a part class by typing a D at the beginning of the Definition row on the part class sheet. When you delete a part class, you cannot reuse the part class name in the same database set. However, if you delete parts (line items within a class, not the class itself), you CAN reuse the names of the parts.

To modify a part name, you can use a combination of deleting and adding operations. Copy a part row, insert the row in the Head/Start/End section, and change the name. Then mark the original row with D and the inserted row with A. The row marked with D must come before the row marked with A going from top to bottom on the sheet. The reason is that the bulkload operations occur sequentially from top to bottom on a sheet.

To modify a UserClassName or OccClassName, place an M at the beginning of the row and enter the new names in the UserClassName and OccClassName cells.



Delete and Replace

The Delete and Replace mode is useful when you would like to replace all the data in the Catalog database with the data currently in Excel workbooks. New part classes are appended to the Catalog.

This option has some limitations. You can change the definition of a part class, but you cannot change the part class type. Also, this option is not supported for sheets common to all the workbooks, including the ClassNodeType and R- Hierarchy sheets. If you bulk load these unsupported sheets, the utility writes a warning to the log file and does not process the sheets.

When this mode is used to replace entire piping material classes (for example, 1C0031), only those piping material classes appearing in the bulkloaded workbook are deleted and replaced. All other piping material classes in the database are unaffected.

If you are re-creating part classes or parts, you must include the R- ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the workbooks in order to establish relationships among the hierarchical nodes in the reference data.

The table below lists the data types and whether or not they are compatible with the Delete and Replace mode.

Data Type Supported?

Cabletray yes

Cableway yes

Cable yes

Code lists yes

Conduit yes

Drawings no

Equipment yes

Name Rules yes

Grids yes

Hangers and Supports yes

HVAC no

IFC yes

Iso (Iso keys) no

Modules N/A

Nozzles yes

Piping yes

Reports no

Shapes N/A

Structure no

Space Management yes



Create Flavors

The Create flavors option computes and stores in the catalog the specific geometry for each different size of a part class. Flavors apply to Solid Edge parts only. You can use the Create flavors option with any of the bulkloading modes.

For example, the reference data might include two parts with different symbol input parameters. Both parts refer to the same Solid Edge assembly set. At the time of bulkloading, if you select the Create flavors option, then the Bulkload utility creates a one-to-one relationship symbol using the symbol parameters for each part and stores this symbol in the Catalog database. If you do not select the Create flavors option, then at placement time in the model, the workstation placing the symbol performs the parameterized changes to the symbol, based on the reference data, before the placement.

You can add flavors for Solid Edge parts that are already in the catalog. Mark the rows for the parts with M and bulk load in the Add/Modify/Delete mode with the Create flavors option selected.

To bulk load flavors for Solid Edge parts, Solid Edge must be installed on the computer performing the bulkload process. To place Solid Edge equipment without flavors in the catalog, the workstation performing the placement must have Solid Edge installed.

See Also Bulk Load Database with Data (on page 82)

Bulk Load Database with Data

You should back up all Excel workbooks before modifying them and bulk loading. All of the workbooks are delivered with read-only properties.

When you use the Bulkload utility to create a new Catalog, the Excel workbooks for the Hangers and Supports task must appear last in the list. If they are not placed at the end of the input files list, errors will be generated in the log file.

Do this procedure on a workstation computer with the Bulkload component and SmartPlant 3D Server Connectivity component installed. Log on with a user name that has database ownership privileges. For more information about necessary components, see the SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

You should close all Excel workbooks before starting the bulkload. Do not open Excel during the bulkload.

1. Click Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant 3D > Database Tools > Bulkload Reference Data.

2. In the Excel files box, specify the Excel workbooks to load by clicking Add.

The default location for reference data workbooks is [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles.

You can select more than one workbook to bulk load. Hold CTRL and click each workbook in the Open dialog box.

Select the workbooks that contain the parts and cross sections in the Excel files box. You specify the codelist workbooks in the Excel codelist files box.



3. In the Excel codelist files box, click the browse button to specify the codelist workbooks.

You must specify a workbook in this box if you are creating a new catalog, adding a new codelist, or modifying an existing codelist. In all other cases, you are not required to populate this box.

4. Under Bulkload mode, select a mode for the bulkloading process.

Mode Description

Bulk load to a new catalog Creates a new Catalog database.

Append to existing catalog Adds new classes only to an existing database.

Add, modify, or delete records in existing catalog

Reads flags in Excel workbook to add, modify, or delete data.

Delete and replace Deletes all records in the Catalog database and replaces with data in Excel workbooks. New part classes are appended to the Catalog.

If you are re-creating part classes or parts, you must include the R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the workbooks in order to establish relationships among the hierarchical nodes in the reference data.

5. If you want to store geometry for each unique part defined by the Solid Edge model, select Create flavors.

Do not select Create flavors when you are creating symbols.

The Create flavors option can increase the time needed for the bulkload process. If you are loading Solid Edge flavors, you must have Solid Edge installed on the bulkload computer.

6. If you are working in a test catalog or a training environment, you can clear the Update Object Type Hierarchy and Catalog Views check box to reduce bulkloading time. However, if you are in a production environment, leave this option selected.

7. Under Catalog information, select either MSSQL or ORACLE in the Database Type box. This box is enabled only if you are creating a new database set.

If you selected MSSQL, select the name of a server in the Database server name box. This location is where the Catalog database and schema are stored (or will be stored, if you are creating a new database set).

If you selected ORACLE, select the name of the Oracle net service for the Catalog database connection in the Oracle Service box. The service must exist before you choose it in this box.

8. In the Database name box, select the name of the Catalog database that you want to update with new reference data.

To create a new database, select <New Database>, and you can type a name for the new database.

If you select a site or model database in the Database name box, the utility displays a notification message.



9. If you are modifying an existing catalog, select the Catalog Schema database name in the Schema database name box.

The Schema server name box is read-only. The software completes this box with the name of the database server that you selected in the Database server name box.

10. If you are creating a new catalog, click the browse button beside the Template file to be used to create schema box to specify the template file for the Catalog Schema.

For MSSQL, use the AppRepos.dat file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.

For ORACLE, use the AppRepos.dmp file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.

11. In the Log file box, click the browse button to specify the name and location of the log file.

The default location for the log file is [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles, but you can change this location.

You must have write privileges to the folder in which you are saving the log file.

The log file name must not contain any special characters. However, you can use the back slash when specifying a UNC path to a log file.

You must use the file extension .log for the log file.

12. If you are bulk loading to a new catalog, click the browse button under Symbol and custom program file location and select a SharedContent folder on the server.

This box is populated automatically if you are using the Append, Add/Modify/Delete, or Delete and Replace modes. You should not modify the location unless you are sure that you want to change the symbol path for the catalog.

To allow all workstations to access the symbols, specify a UNC path to a shared folder on a remote computer, such as the server. The server setup installs the contents of the SharedContent folder under [Product Directory]\CatalogData, so if the computer name is smith, you can type \\smith\SharedContent. At a minimum, users need read access to this share. They need change access in order to modify the symbols.

13. Click Load. You can see messages in the status bar of the Bulkload utility while it is running.

If you interrupt the bulkloading process, you may see a Switch To/Retry message. Click Switch To to return to the bulkloading process.



14. Open the log file to check for any errors or warnings in the bulkloading process. You can quickly scan the Error Analysis section at the end of the log file to check for errors.

15. Click Close.

You can modify the Excel workbooks and bulk load again to correct errors.

Create a new log file for each bulkload operation, instead of overwriting the existing one. Check the log file for errors after each bulkload operation.

It is recommended that a Project Management backup be done after each bulkload step. If an error occurs, it is easy to restore and correct the problem.



Bulkload Dialog Box This utility sets options for adding reference data from Excel workbooks to the Catalog database.

Excel files - Displays one or more Excel workbooks for loading into the Catalog database. These workbooks contain the reference data.

The software bulk loads the files in the order they are listed in the Excel files box.

Add - Lists additional Excel workbooks in the Excel files box.

Delete - Removes currently selected Excel workbooks from the Excel files box.

Excel codelist files - Lists the codelist Excel workbooks. Click the browse button to access the Open dialog box, which allows you to select one or more Excel codelist workbooks for loading into the Catalog Schema database. To remove a codelist workbook, you must click Reset to clear all boxes on the Bulkload dialog box.

You must select a codelist workbook when one of the following criteria is met:

You have updated the codelist information and want to bulk load the modified data into the live database.

You are creating a new catalog with the Bulkload to a new catalog option.

For all other instances, the Excel codelist files box can remain empty.

Bulkload mode - Allows you to select the type of bulkload.

Bulkload to a new catalog - Select this mode when you want to create a new Catalog database set. You can use this mode to create a new catalog containing your company data and not any delivered reference data. In this mode, you must specify a template file for the schema.

Append to the existing catalog - Select this mode when you want to only add new classes to the Catalog database. In this mode, the software does not read any Add/Modify/Delete flags in the column beginning each row. Use this mode for large updates to the catalog.

Add, modify, or delete records in existing catalog - Select this mode when you want to modify the Catalog database on a smaller scale than in the Append mode. Use the Add/Modify/Delete mode for small updates to the catalog.

In the Add/Modify/Delete mode, the Bulkload utility scans the workbook(s) for certain flags (A, M, D) at the beginning of rows. Here are the flags and the actions associated with them:

Letter Designation Operation

A Add

M Modify

D Delete

For example, if the Bulkload utility sees an M at the beginning of a row in the workbook, the software modifies that entry in the Catalog database.



Delete and replace records in existing catalog - Replaces existing data in the Catalog database with the data in Excel workbooks. New part classes are appended to the Catalog.

This option has some limitations. You can change the definition of a part class, but you cannot change the part class type. Also, this option is not supported for sheets common to all the workbooks, such as the ClassNodeType and R- Hierarchy sheets. If you bulk load these unsupported sheets, the utility writes a warning to the log file and does not process the sheets.

If you are re-creating part classes or parts, you must include the R- ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the workbooks in order to establish relationships among the hierarchical nodes in the reference data.

Create flavors - Select this option when you want to compute and store in the Catalog the specific geometry for each different size of a part class. This mode allows users to place an occurrence of a particular part in the model without having a license for Solid Edge on their computers. However, you must have Solid Edge installed on the administrator computer that does the bulkload process for the specific parts and flavors.

Update Object Type Hierarchy and Catalog Views - Select this option to update the Object Type Hierarchy (BOC) and the catalog view after bulkloading the data. Clearing this option will significantly reduce the time it takes to bulkload the workbooks. However, you should leave this option selected unless you are bulkloading to a test catalog. Do not bulkload to a production catalog without making sure this option is selected.

Database Type - Select the type of database, either ORACLE or MSSQL. This box is enabled only if you are creating a new database set.

The following box is labeled Database server name if you chose MSSQL. It is labeled Oracle Service if you chose ORACLE.

Database server name - Select the server that stores the Catalog database.

Oracle Service - Select the name of the Oracle net service for the Catalog database connection.

Database name - Select the name of the Catalog database into which you want to load reference data. If you are using the Bulkload to a new catalog mode, select <New Database> and type a name in the Database name box. If you select a site or model database in this box, the utility displays a notification message.

The following two boxes appear only for the Append and Add/Modify/Delete modes.

Catalog schema server - Displays the name of the server that stores the Catalog Schema database. This server is the same as the name in the Database server name box.

Catalog schema database - For preexisting catalog sets, select the name of the Catalog Schema database.

If the necessary schema database does not appear in the Schema database name list, click <Refresh>. This situation occurs if you created a schema database after opening the Bulkload dialog box.

If you are using the Bulkload to a new catalog mode, the Catalog schema server and Catalog schema database boxes do not appear. Instead, complete the box labeled Template file to be used to create schema.

Template file to be used to create schema - Specifies the template file for the Catalog Schema.

For MSSQL, use the AppRepos.dat file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.

For ORACLE, use the AppRepos.dmp file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the server computer.



Log file - Click the browse button to specify a location and name for the log file, which records the bulkloading status, including any error messages. The log file name must follow operating system constraints and cannot contain any special characters. However, you can use the backslash when specifying a UNC path to a log file.

You must use the file extension .log for the log file.

You must have write privileges to the folder to which you are saving the log file.

Symbol and custom program file location - Displays the location for symbols in Solid Edge or Visual Basic format. In the Append and Add/Modify/Delete modes, the Bulkload utility automatically populates this box with the current symbol location. For these modes, you should not modify the location unless you are sure that you want to change the symbol path for the

catalog. In the New mode, you can click the browse button to specify the location. You can also change the location in the Project Management task on the Properties dialog box.

This location is stored in the Catalog database and is accessed by the other tasks at run-time in order to read and compute the symbol files. To allow all workstations to access the symbols, specify a UNC path (for example, \\MyServer\SharedContent) to a shared folder on a remote computer, such as the server. At a minimum, users need read access to this share. They need change access in order to modify the symbols.

You can also specify a path (such as D:\SharedContent) on the local computer, but this action does not allow other workstations to access the symbols.

Load - Starts the bulkload.

See Also Bulk Load Database with Data (on page 82) Using the Bulkload Modes (on page 79)

Bulkload from the Command Line You can run the Bulkload utility from the command line using option switches.

Here is an example of the syntax for updating the Catalog using the Add/Modify/Delete mode:

"C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\3D\CatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\Bulkload.exe"

-i AllCommon.xls -l Ismaning.log -ds SP3D -dn Ismaning_catalog -ss SP3D -sn

Ismaning_catalog_SCHEMA -sp \\SP3d\Symbols -a 0 -u 1 -r 0 -f 0

Here is an example for a fresh bulkload (New mode):

"C:\Program Files\SmartPlant\3D\CatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\Bulkload.exe"

-i Bulkload_List.lst -l Ismaning.log -ds SP3D -dn Ismaning_catalog -ss SP3D

-sn \\sp3d13\6122DatabaseTemplates\AppRepos.dat -sp \\SP3d\Symbols -a 0 -u

0 -r 0 -f 0

The command prompt must point directly to the folder under which the executable is located, or the complete path to the executable must be specified at the command prompt as required to execute any Windows application.



The input file names and paths to the files must not contain any blanks. If you have an input file with one or more blank spaces in its name or path, such as C:\Program Files\My Data\AllCommon.xls, you must use a temporary list file (.lst) to list the file. The command will not work otherwise, even if you enclose the file name and path with quotation marks.

Option Description

-i Input Excel file (.xls) or .lst file with .xls entries.

-ci Input codelist file (.xls) or .lst file with .xls entries.

-l Log file (.log).

-ds Database Server name or Oracle Service name.

-dn Catalog Database name.

-ss Schema Server name or Oracle Service name.

-sn Catalog Schema Database name. For a fresh bulkload (if the -a 0 -u 0 -r 0 options are used), you must provide the full path to the template schema file here.

-a Append mode. Set to 1 for append.

-u Update mode (add/modify/delete). Set to 1 for add/modify/delete.

-r Replace mode. Set to 1 for replace.

-f Create flavors mode. Set to 1 to create flavors.

-sp Symbol path.

-pt Provider type for the Catalog Database. Specify Oracle if the database type is Oracle. The default is MSSQL.

-st Provider type for the Catalog Schema Database. Specify Oracle if the database type is Oracle. The default is MSSQL.

-un User name.

-pd Password.

-bv Updates the Object Type Hierarchy and Catalog views. Set to 1 to update. Set to 0 to not update. The default is 1 if this option is not specified. Set to 0 only if you are bulk loading to a test catalog.

See Also Bulk Load Database with Data (on page 82) Using the Bulkload Modes (on page 79)



Uniqueness of Objects When you want to modify or delete existing objects in the catalog using the Add/Modify/Delete mode, you must first identify the properties that define the uniqueness of the object.

The reason is that when you modify or delete an object in the catalog, the Bulkload utility needs to identify a row on the Excel sheet with an existing object in the database. For this purpose, Bulkload uses certain properties of the object that play a role in naming the object.

For example, in the piping material class table, the piping specification object in the database is identified by its specification name (SpecName). You can change all the properties on a piping specification except its SpecName. If you change the SpecName, then the identity of that object is lost, and hence Bulkload reports an error that it cannot find the object.

The following table lists all objects in alphabetical order and the corresponding unique properties.

Object Unique Properties

Allowable Piping Materials Class

SpecName, FluidCode

Auto WBS Creation Rule

RuleName

Bend Angles SpecName, Npd, NpdUnitType, BendAngle

Bend Radius Multiplier Rule

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, PipeBendRadiusMultiplier

Bolt Commodity Code Subst Rule

ContractorCommodityCode, BoltDiameter, BoltLength

Bolt Diameter Equivalence Rule

BoltDiameterInPrimaryUnits, PrimaryUnitsOfMeasure

Bolt Extension NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, PressureRating, EndPreparation, EndStandard

Bolt Part Data IndustryCommodityCode

Bolt Selection Filter SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, BoltOption, MaximumTemperature, EndPreparation, PressureRating, EndStandard, AlternateEndPreparation, AlternatePressureRating, AlternateEndStandard

Bolt Selection Filter For Nozzles

EquipmentTagNumber, NozzleTagnumber, ContractorCommodityCode, BoltingRequirements, QuantityOfCapScrews, CapScrewContractorCmdtyCode, CapScrewDiameter, TappedHoleDepth, BoltExtensionOption

Cable Nozzle PortType, SubType, Diameter, Area, Tightness

Cabletray Ports NominalWidth, NominalDepth, ActualWidth, ActualDepth

Cable Tray Spec SpecName

Cable Way Bend Radius

SpecName, BendRadius




CableWay Nominal Sizes

SpecName, SectionName

Cableway Spec SpecName

Calculation ProgIDs DesignStandard

Cap Screw LenCalTolerance

BoltType, BoltLengthFrom, BoltLengthTo, BoltDiameterFrom, BoltDiameterTo

Cap Screw LenCal Tolerance Per Spec

SpecName, BoltType, BoltLengthFrom, BoltLengthTo, BoltDiameterFrom, BoltDiameterTo

Clamp Selection Filter SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, ClampOption, EndPreparation, EndStandard, AlternateEndPreparation, AlternateEndStandard

Class Node Type ObjectName

Commodity Specific Service Limits

IndustryCommodityCode, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, FirstSizeSchedule, SecondSize, SecondSizeUnits, SecondSizeSchedule, MultisizeOption, IndustryCommodityCodeGasket, MaximumTemperature, MaximumPressure

Component Insulation Exclusion

PipingCommodityType, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, MultiSizeOption, HeatTracingMedium, InsulationTemperatureFrom, InsulationTemperatureTo

Conduit Commodity Matl Control Data

ContractorCommodityCode, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits

Conduit Default Cmdty Slcn Rule

FeatureType

Conduit Filter SpecName, ShortCode, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, CommodityOption, OptionCategory, ContractorCommodityCode, Comments, BendRadius, BendRadiusMultiplier, SelectionBasis

Conduit Nominal Diameters

SpecName, Npd, NpdUnitType

Conduit Ports Npd, NpdUnitType, EndPreparation, ScheduleThickness, EndStandard, PressureRating, FlowDirection

Conduit Spec SpecName

Corrosion Allowance SpecName, MaterialsCategory, CorrosionAllowance

Default Change of Direction

BendAngleFrom, BendAngleTo

Default Change of Direction Per Spec

SpecName, BendAngleFrom, BendAngleTo

Default Commodity Selection Rule

FeatureType




DIN Wall Thickness Data

FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize, SecondSizeUnits, MultiSizeOption, GeometricIndustryStandard, FirstSizeSchedule, SecondSizeSchedule

Field Fit Length WeldType, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, ConstructionRequirementEnd1, ConstructionRequirementEnd2, FieldFitLength

Field Fit Length Per Spec

SpecName, WeldType, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, ConstructionRequirementEnd1, ConstructionRequirementEnd2, FieldFitLength

Field Lining Thickness SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits

Flared Pipe NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, ScheduleThickness

Flared Pipe Per Spec SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, ScheduleThickness,

Fluid Density Rule FluidCode, TemperatureFrom, TemperatureTo, Density

Gasket Part Data IndustryCommodityCode, RingNumber, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, NominalDiameter, NpdUnitType, GasketIndustryStandard

Gasket Selection Filter SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, GasketOption, MaximumTemperature, EndPreparation, PressureRating, EndStandard, AlternateEndPreparation, AlternatePressureRating, AlternateEndStandard, FluidCode, ScheduleThickness, MinimumTemperature

Gasket Selection Filter For Nozzles

EquipmentTagNumber, NozzleTagNumber, ContractorCommodityCode, GasketRequirements, RingNumber

Hanger Class Node ObjectName

IFC Clearance Rule RuleName, ObjectType1, Aspect1, ObjectType2, Aspect2

IFC Post Processor Rule

RuleName

Inside Surface Treatment

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, FluidCode

Instrument Class Data TagNumber, GenericTagNumber, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, MultiSizeOption

Insulation Thickness Table

SpecName, Npd_Lo, Npd_Hi, Temperature_Lo, Temperature_Hi

Jacket Closure SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, JacketClosureMethod

Joint Quality Factor SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, NpdUnitType, CommodityOption




Lined Connector Selection Filter

SpecName, NominalDiameterFrom, NominalDiameterTo, NpdUnitType, MaximumTemperature, EndPreparation, PressureRating, EndStandard, AlternateEndPreparation, AlternatePressureRating, AlternateEndStandard

Liner Thickness Data NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, LiningMaterial, GeometricIndustryStandard

Mach Bolt Len Cal Tolerance


Mach Bolt Len Cal Tolerance Per Spec


Materials Data DesignStandard, MaterialsGrade, Temperature, WallThicknessFrom, WallThicknessTo, CoefficientY, AllowableStress, MillTolerance, MillTolerancePercentage

Mating Ports EndPrep1, EndPrep2

MechJointAllowPipeEndSeparation

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, GeometricIndustryStandard, GeometricIndustryPractice

Minimum Pipe Length Rule

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits

Minimum Pipe Length Rule Per Spec


Min Pipe Length Purchase

NominalPipingDiameter, PurchaseLength

Min Pipe Length Purchase Per Spec

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, PurchaseLength

Multiport Valve Operator Data

ContractorCommodityCode, PortNumber

NPD Equivalence NPDInPrimaryUnitsOfMeasure, PrimaryUnitsOfMeasure

Nut Part Data IndustryCommodityCode

Nut Selection Filter SpecName, NutOption, MaximumTemperature, BoltType, BoltDiameter, PressureRating

Outside Surface Treatment

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, EnvironmentalZone

Permissible Duct Thickness

MaterialType, MaterialGrade, PermissibleDuctThickness

Permissible Jacket And Jumper Sizes

SpecName, CoreNominalPipeDiameter, CoreNominalPipeDiameterUnits, JacketNominalPipeDiameter, JacketNominalPipeDiameterUnits, JumperNominalPipeDiameter, JumperNominalPipeDiameterUnits




Permissible Jacket Size Exceptions

SpecName, CoreNominalPipeDiameter, CoreNominalPipeDiameterUnits, JacketNominalPipeDiameter, JacketNominalPipeDiameterUnits, ShortCode

Permissible Pipe Bending Machine

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUOM

Permissible Taps SpecName, PermissibleTapNumber

Pipe Bending Configuration Data

IsBendPlanar, NominalBendAngleFrom1, NominalBendAngleTo1, NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom2, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo2, NominalBendAngleFrom2, NominalBendAngleTo2, NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom3, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo3, NominalBendAngleFrom3, NominalBendAngleTo3, NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom4, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo4, NominalBendAngleFrom4, NominalBendAngleTo4, NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom5, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo5, NominalBendAngleFrom5, NominalBendAngleTo5, NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom6, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo6, NominalBendAngleFrom6, NominalBendAngleTo6, NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom7, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo7, NominalBendAngleFrom7, NominalBendAngleTo7, NonPlanarRotationAngleFrom8, NonPlanarRotationAngleTo8, NominalBendAngleFrom8, NominalBendAngleTo8

Pipe Bending Die Data PipeBendingMachineName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUOM, PipeBendRadiusMultiplier

Pipe Bending Elongation

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, PipeBendRadius, BendAngle

Pipe Bending Elongation Per Spec

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, PipeBendRadius, BendAngle

Pipe Bending Machine Data

PipeBendingMachineName

Pipe Bending Min Tangent Len Data

PipeBendingMachineName, PipeBendType, MinBendToBendTanLenOption, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUOM, PipeBendRadiusMultiplier

Pipe Branch SpecName, HeaderSize, HdrSizeNpdUnitType, BranchSize, BrSizeNpdUnitType, AngleLow, AngleHigh

Pipe Branch For Jackets

SpecName, HeaderSize, HdrSizeNpdUnitType, BranchSize, BrSizeNpdUnitType, AngleLow, AngleHigh

Pipe Mfg Map Symbol PartClassName, SKEY, CodeList

Pipe Mfg Rules IsoNames

Pipe Mfg Spool Rule Name

Pipe Nominal Diameters





Pipe Part Spec SpecName, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, ShortCode, OptionCode, MultisizeOption

Pipe Schedule Thickness

Npd, NpdUnitType, Schedule, Thickness

Pipe Spec SpecName

Pipe Takedown Parts SpecName, Npd, NpdUnitType

Piping Commodity Filter

SpecName, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, ShortCode, OptionCode, MultisizeOption, MaximumTemperature, MinimumTemperature, SelectionBasis

Piping Commodity Matl Control Data

ContractorCommodityCode, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits

Piping Commodity Procurement Data

CommodityCode, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize, SecondSizeUnits, MultisizeOption, FirstSizeSchedule, SecondSizeSchedule

Piping Elbow Nozzles Npd, NpdUnitType, EndPreparation, ScheduleThickness, EndStandard, PressureRating, FlowDirection, BendRadius, BendLength

Piping Generic Data Bolted

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, EndPreparation, EndStandard, PressureRating

Piping Generic Data Female

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, EndPreparation, EndStandard, PressureRating, Schedule

Piping Generic Data Mechanical

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, EndPreparation, EndStandard, PressureRating

Piping Materials Class Data

SpecName

Piping Specialty Class Data

TagNumber, GenericTagNumber, FirstSizeFrom, FirstSizeTo, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSizeFrom, SecondSizeTo, SecondSizeUnits, MultiSizeOption

Piping Straight Nozzles

Npd, NpdUnitType, EndPreparation, ScheduleThickness, EndStandard, PressureRating, FlowDirection

Plain Piping Generic Data

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalDiameterUnits, EndStandard, Schedule, PressureRating

Plate Flange Setback Distance

NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits

Port Alignment NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, EndPreparation

Port Alignment Per Spec

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, EndPreparation




Preferred Cap Screw Length

BoltType, BoltDiameterFrom, BoltDiameterTo, BoltDiameterIncrement, MaterialsGrade, PreferredBoltLengthFrom, PreferredBoltLengthTo, PreferredBoltLengthIncrement

Preferred Cap Screw Length Per Spec

SpecName, BoltType, BoltDiameterFrom, BoltDiameterTo, BoltDiameterIncrement, MaterialsGrade, PreferredBoltLengthFrom, PreferredBoltLengthTo, PreferredBoltLengthIncrement

Preferred Mach Bolt Length


Preferred Mach Bolt Length Per Spec


Preferred Stud Bolt Length


Preferred Stud Bolt Length Per Spec


PreferredTapEndStudBoltLength


PrefTapEndStudBoltLengthPerSpec


Reference Standard Name

Reinforcing Pad Data SpecName, HeaderSize, HeaderSizeUnitsOfMeasure, BranchSize, BranchSizeUnitsOfMeasure, AcuteBranchAngleFrom, AcuteBranchAngleTo

Reinforcing Weld Data SpecName, HeaderSize, HeaderSizeUnitsOfMeasure, BranchSize, BranchSizeUnitsOfMeasure, AcuteBranchAngleFrom, AcuteBranchAngleTo

Report Name

Rootgap NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits

Rootgap Per Spec SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits

Service Limits SpecName, Temperature, Pressure, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits

Service Limits For Jackets

SpecName, Temperature, Pressure

Short Code Hierarchy Rule

ShortCodeHierarchyType, ShortCode




Size Reduction SizeReductionType, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize, SecondSizeUnits, SizeReductionPreference

Size Reduction Per Spec

SpecName, SizeReductionType, FirstSize, FirstSizeUnits, SecondSize, SecondSizeUnits, SizeReductionPreference

Slip On Flange Setback Distance

NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, CompanyPracticeGap, CompanyPracticeRoundOffFactor, EndStandard, MaximumWeldThickness

Space Group ObjectName

Standard Notes Data Name, Purpose

Stud Bolt Len Cal Tolerance


Stud Bolt Len Cal Tolerance Per Spec


Swaged Jacket Pipe Rule

NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, Schedule

Swaged Jacket Pipe Rule Per Spec

SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, Schedule

TapEndStudBoltLenCalTol


TapEndStudBoltLenCalTolPerSpec


Tap Properties TapNumber

Thickness Data Rule SpecName, NominalPipingDiameter, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, ScheduleThickness

Valve Operator Matl Control Data

OperatorPartNumber

Washer Part Data IndustryCommodityCode

Washer Selection Filter

SpecName, WasherOption, MaximumTemperature, BoltDiameter, PressureRating

Weld Clearance Rule SpecName, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, WeldClass

Weld Gap Rule SpecName, WeldType, NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits

Weld Model Representation Rule

NominalPipingDiameterFrom, NominalPipingDiameterTo, NominalPipingDiameterUnits, WeldClass

Weld Type Rule FabricationTypeOfEnd1, ConstructionRequirementOfEnd1, FabricationTypeOfEnd2, ConstructionRequirementOfEnd2



Moniker Information for Special Process Sheets The monikers are used for all those sheets and the corresponding objects that are processed explicitly by bulkload and whose "SpecialProcess" flag is set to True in \CatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\OccurrenceClasses.xml and \ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\Bin\GSCAD.xml.

OccurrenceClasses.xml

Sheet / Object Moniker

MatlThkRange MatlThkRange_ThkLow-ThkHigh

Example: If ThkLow is 25 and ThkHigh is 55, then:

MatlThkRange_0.025-0.055

PlateDimensions

PlateDimension_Thickness

Example: If Thickness is 0.0625, then:

PlateDimension_0.0625

ProfileGroups CrossSectionGroup_<GroupId>

Example: if GroupId is Group1, then:

CrossSectionGroup_ Group1

Cables For Receptacle: <Receptacle>

For Connector: <PartNumber> (ConnectorPartNumber)

For BackShell: <PartNumber> (BackShellPartNumber)

HoleMgmtRules <Name> (RuleName)

NamingRules For Class Node: NAMING_RULE <TypeName>

Example: If TypeName is CSPGElevationPlane, then:

NAMING_RULE CSPGElevationPlane

For Naming Rule: <Name><SolverProgID>

Example: If Name is DefaultNameRule and SolverProgID is NameRules.CommonNameRule, then:

DefaultNameRule NameRules.CommonNameRule

CrossSectionType <Name> (Name of CrossSectionType)

InsulationSpec <SpecName> (Name of the Insulation Specification, for

example "Calcium Silicate")

StructInsulationSpec_Fireproof StructInsulationSpec_<SpecName>

Example: If SpecName is Conc_1hr, then:

StructInsulationSpec_Conc_1hr

InsulationMaterial For Piping: PipingInsulationMaterial_<MaterialType>




HVACInsulationMaterial For Hvac: HvacInsulationMaterial_<MaterialType>

EquipmentInsulationMaterial For Equipment: EqptInsulationMaterial_<MaterialType>

PipeBendRadii < SpecName >, <Npd> <NpdUnitType>,

<BendRadiusMultiplier>

HvacSpec <SpecName>

HvacSpecDefaults Default=<SpecName>

PlateStock PlateStock__<PartNumber>

ProfileStock ProfileStock_<PartNumber>

ProfileClass <MaterialType>-<MaterialGrade>

GeometricConstructionTypes <Name>

GSCAD.xml


MoldedFormSpec <SpecName>

MoldedConventions MFSpecObj should be there

MoldedFormNaming <ObjectName>

WCEquipRel <ObjectName>

SmartQuery Sheets are removed and these objects are created only once along with the data.

RuleQuery

WorkcenterQuery

WorkcenterQuery No sheets are available with this name


S E C T I O N 5

Common reference data that applies to several disciplines is defined in the AllCommon.xls workbook. This data includes generic piping commodity data, outfitting cross sections, and units of measurement.

See Also AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines (on page 102) AllCommon Sheets (on page 101)

AllCommon.xls Workbook

AllCommon Sheets The AllCommon.xls workbook contains data that applies to several of the design disciplines in the software.

Some sheets in the AllCommon.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the Revision History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).

The sheets that are in AllCommon.xls are listed below. The piping generic data sheets also appear in Piping Catalog.xls.

Plain Piping Generic Data - Contains data for plain piping ends. For more information, see Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet (on page 102).

DIN Wall Thickness Data - Contains generic wall thickness data. For more information, see DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet (on page 103).

Piping Generic Data Bolted - Contains generic data for bolted ends. For more information, see Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet (on page 104).

Piping Generic Data Female - Contains generic data for female ends. For more information, see Piping Generic Data Female Sheet (on page 110).

Piping Generic Data Mechanical - Contains generic data for mechanical ends. For more information, see Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet (on page 111).

Material - Defines material grades and material grade properties. For more information, see Material Sheet (on page 111).

Outfitting Cross Sections - Defines cross sections for outfitting disciplines, such as Cableway and HVAC. For more information, see Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet (on page 112).

UOM - Defines units and unit types for customized user attributes on the Custom Interfaces sheet in the other workbooks. For more information, see UOM Sheet (on page 112).

AllCommon Reference Data



AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines The following table lists the sheets in the AllCommon.xls workbook and their associated disciplines.

Sheet Discipline

Plain Piping Generic Data Piping, Conduit

DIN Wall Thickness Data Piping

Piping Generic Data Bolted Piping

Piping Generic Data Female Piping, Conduit

Piping Generic Data Mechanical Piping

Material Structure

Outfitting Cross Sections Cableway, HVAC

UOM All

See Also AllCommon Reference Data (on page 101)

Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet The Plain Piping Generic Data sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic data for plain piping ends.

Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the plain pipe.

Nominal Diameter Units - Specify the units for the NPD column. For example, type mm or in.

End Standard - Type the end standard code. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Schedule - Type the schedule code.

Pressure Rating - Type the maximum pressure allowed for the pipe.

Piping Outside Diameter - Type the outside diameter value with units.

Wall Thickness - Type the pipe wall thickness with units.




DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet The DIN Wall Thickness Data sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines wall thicknesses for the DIN standard.

First Size - Enter a size or thickness.

First Size Units - Specifies the units for the First Size column. For example, type in for inches or mm for millimeters.

Second Size - Enter a second size or thickness.

Second Size Units - Specifies the units for the Second Size column. For example, type in for inches or mm for millimeters.

MultiSize Option - Type a string to represent an optional selection for multi-sized fittings when the first size and second size are inadequate. For example, if two additional sizes (2" and 1") are required in addition to a first size of 6" and a second size of 4", the string that would represent the sizes would be 6"x4"x2"x1". The software interprets the string to determine the second size, the number of sizes in addition to the first size and second size, and the units of measure for each size. If you do not include a unit of measure in the string, the unit of measure for the first size, defined under First Size Units, is used.

Geometric Industry Standard - Enter the code that represents the source used in the preparation of the catalog data. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Geometric Industry Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

First Size Schedule - Enter the code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for the first size end. Valid codes and short descriptions are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Schedule Thickness sheet in the Codelist Number and Schedule Thickness Short Description columns.

Second Size Schedule - Enter the code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for the first size end. Valid codes and short descriptions are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Schedule Thickness sheet in the Codelist Number and Schedule Thickness Short Description columns.

Wall Thickness for Port 1 - Specify the wall thickness, with units, for port 1.

Reinforced Wall Thickness for Port 1 - Specify the reinforced wall thickness, with units, for port 1.












Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet The Piping Generic Data Bolted sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic data for bolted piping ends.

Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the bolted end.


Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the bolted end. This property defines the envelope of pressure to which the bolted end may be subjected. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.

End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the bolted end. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.

End Standard - Type the end standard code for the bolted end. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Flange Outside Diameter - Type the flange outside diameter of the bolted end.

Flange Thickness - Type the distance from the outermost face of the flange to the back surface of the flange on which the nut rests. This distance includes any projections that the flange may have, such as raised-face, only if the manufacturer's data includes any projections. The flange thickness includes the thickness of the loose flange used, but does not include the wall thickness of the pipe or stub end for lap-flanged ends. In terms of ASME B16.5 (1996), this value is considered the minimum flange thickness.

Flange Thickness Tolerance - Type the plus tolerance for the flange thickness. For example, ANSI B16.5 (1996) specifies the flange thickness tolerance as 1/8" for NPD 18" and smaller, and a tolerance of 3/16" for NPD 20" and larger.

This value is required for computing bolt lengths, when you (the specification writer) prefer to express the flange thickness tolerance explicitly and independently of the stud or machine bolt extension.

Flange Face Projection - Type the value that represents any projections that the flange may have. An example is a raised-face flange.

Raised Face Diameter - Type the raised-face diameter of the bolted end, if applicable to raised-face flanged ends. This value is required to compute the outside diameter of the gasket and the inside diameter of the gasket.

Flange Groove Width - Type the groove width of the bolted end, if applicable to groove-flanged ends. This value is required to compute the outside diameter of the gasket.

Seating Depth - Type the distance from the outermost surface of the bolted end to the seating surface of the gasket. This column has a value only for small groove flanged, large groove flanged, small female flanged, large female flanged, small groove lap flanged, large groove lap flanged, small female lap flanged, large female lap flanged, ring type joint flanged, and mechanical joints. This value represents the groove depth for ring type joint flanged ends.

Bolt Circle Diameter - Type the diameter of the circle of bolt holes on the face of flange. This property applies only to circular drilling templates.

Quantity of Bolts Required - Type the number of bolts required for the bolted end.

Bolt Diameter - Type the diameter of the bolts for the bolted end.



Body Outside Diameter - Type the outside diameter of the body of the fitting at the bolted end.

You can still choose to define the body outside diameter with the piping commodity part data (or piping specialty part data or instrument part data) for certain fittings. This actual body outside diameter is required for rack piping to match the bottom pipe of the adjacent straight runs, not only for aesthetic purposes, but also to ensure that, if the body portion of the component rests on steel, the correct centerline is maintained. Using inaccurate data, in some cases, will cause false interferences to be reported, and, in other cases, leave diameter mismatches with adjacent piping.

Drilling Template Pattern - Type the drilling pattern code for the bolted end. This code represents the arrangement of bolt holes at the bolted end. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Drilling Template Pattern sheet in the Codelist Number column. For pictures of common drilling patterns, see Bolt Hole Patterns (on page 105).

Bolt Pattern Length - Type the bolt pattern length for the bolted end.

Bolt Pattern Width - Type the bolt pattern width for the bolted end.

Bolt Pattern Offset - Type the bolt pattern offset for the bolted end.


Bolt Hole Patterns

The following graphics show the common bolt hole patterns with labeled dimensions. The Drilling Template Pattern codelist in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook provides a list of codes for common bolt hole patterns.

Circular Bolt Hole Pattern (two holes up)



Circular Bolt Hole Pattern (one hole up)

Square Bolt Hole Pattern



Square Bolt Hole Pattern with Offset

Rectangular Bolt Hole Pattern



Rectangular Bolt Hole Pattern with Offset

Rectangular Bolt Hole Pattern with Split Flange Face



Triangular Bolt Hole Pattern

Oval Bolt Hole Pattern




Piping Generic Data Female Sheet The Piping Generic Data Female sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic data for female piping ends.

Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the female end.


Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the female end. Note that the pressure rating is used as the basis of the female end generic data, if the schedule is undefined. Typically, a female fitting will not be defined with both a pressure rating and a schedule value.

The Pressure Rating property defines the envelope of pressure to which the female end may be subjected. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.

End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the female end. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.

End Standard - Type the end standard code for the female end. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Schedule - Type the schedule (or thickness) for the female end. This value is required only for those female ends where the female end generic data is determined on the basis of the schedule, and not the pressure rating.

The schedule is used as the basis of the female end generic data, if the pressure rating is undefined. Typically, a female fitting is not defined with both a pressure rating and a schedule value.

Socket Diameter - Type the socket, or thread, diameter of the female end.

Socket Depth - Type the socket depth for the female end.

This property also represents the 'length through hub' dimension for the non-bolted end of slip-on flanges. Otherwise, the existence of a value for socket depth and socket offset will indicate a socket-welded end.

Socket Offset - Type the offset of the socket for the female end. The typical engineering practice is a 1/16" offset.

Thread Depth - Type the depth of the exposed threads for the female end. The existence of a value for thread depth indicates a threaded end.

Hub Outside Diameter - Type the hub outside diameter of the female end.

This data is optional because it is generally not represented as a standard. You can provide this data for those situations where a detailed representation of the female end is required.

Hub Thickness - Type the hub thickness of the female end.

This data is optional, since it is generally not represented as a standard. You can provide this data for those situations where a detailed representation of the female end is required.

Body Outside Diameter - Type the outside diameter of the body of the fitting at the female end. If you do not define a value here, the outside diameter must be available in the plain piping generic data for the same value of the end standard property.

You can still choose to define the body outside diameter with the piping commodity part data (or piping specialty part data or instrument part data) for certain fittings. This actual body outside diameter is required for rack piping to match the bottom pipe of the adjacent straight runs, not only for aesthetic purposes, but also to ensure that if the body portion of the component rests on steel, the correct centerline is maintained. Using inaccurate data, in some cases, will cause false interferences to be reported, and, in other cases, leave diameter mismatches with adjacent piping.



Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet The Piping Generic Data Mechanical sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines generic data for mechanical piping ends.

Nominal Piping Diameter - Type the nominal piping diameter for the mechanical end.


Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the mechanical end.

Note that, typically, a mechanical end does not have a value for pressure rating. If so, the mechanical end generic data can be defined without pressure rating. In other words, some mechanical ends may require pressure rating, while other mechanical ends will not.

The Pressure Rating property defines the envelope of pressure to which the mechanical end may be subjected. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.

End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the mechanical end. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.

End Standard - Type the end standard code for the mechanical end. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Groove Depth - Type the groove depth for the mechanical end.

Groove Width - Type the groove width for the mechanical end.

Groove Setback - Type the groove setback for the mechanical end.


Material Sheet The Material sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines materials and material grades for structural members. You must define materials and material grades before you can place members or define member types.

When you bulk load this sheet in Delete and Replace mode, you must also bulk load the Permissible Duct Thickness rule.

Material Type - Type the material type, for example, Steel- Carbon or Concrete. The combination of the Material Type and Material Grade columns must be unique.

Material Grade - Type the material grade, for example, A36 or Eh42. The combination of the Material Type and Material Grade columns must be unique.

Density - Type the mass or weight density of the material, for example, 7800 kg/m3. Any

positive real value is valid. Zero is also valid.

Max Tension - Type the maximum allowable tensile stress for the material. Any positive real value is valid.

Yield Stress - Type the yield stress for the material. Any positive real value is valid.

Elastic Modulus - Specify Young's modulus (the modulus of elasticity) for the material. Any real value greater than zero is valid.

Poisson Ratio - Specify Poisson's Ratio for the material. Any real value greater than or equal to zero and less than 0.5 is valid.

Shear Modulus - Type the shear modulus of elasticity for the material. Any real value greater than zero is valid.



Therm Exp Coeff - Type the coefficient of thermal expansion for the material. Any positive real value is valid. Zero is also valid.

Max Compression - Type the maximum allowable compressive stress for the material. Any positive real value is valid.

Max Shear - Type the maximum allowable shear stress for the material. Any positive real value is valid.

Ultimate Stress - Type the ultimate stress for the material. Any positive real value is valid.

Damping Coeff - Type the damping coefficient for the material. The damping coefficient is used in dynamic analysis. Any positive real value is valid.

Specific Heat - Type the specific heat for the material.

Thermal Cond - Type the thermal conductivity for the material.

Emissivity - Type the emissivity for the material.


Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet The Outfitting Cross Section sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook defines cross sections for HVAC and Cableway.

Cross Section Shape - Defines the shape of the cross section. Delivered shapes are Rectangular, Oval, Flat Oval, and Round.

Symbol Definition - Type the symbol definition for the cross section.

OCSD_Dimension Base Outer - Type the Boolean value (TRUE/FALSE) for the dimension base. OCSD stands for Outfitting Cross Section Definition. The definition applies to all the sizes of a given shape.

Section Name - Type the name of the section. Typically, these names start with OCS and contain the width and depth dimensions. An example name is OCS-10x4.

Width - Type the width, along with units, of the cross section.

Depth - Type the depth, along with units, of the cross section.

Corner Radius - Type the corner radius value, if applicable. Units are not necessary.

OCS_Dimension Base Outer - Type the Boolean value (TRUE/FALSE) for the dimension base. OCS stands for Outfitting Cross Section. You can override the definition (entered in the OCSD column) for each cross section size, if necessary.

Area - Type the area of the cross section.

Perimeter - Type the perimeter of the cross section.




UOM Sheet The UOM sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook lists the units and unit types for the custom user attributes that you can define for objects in the software. The Custom Interfaces sheet in the other reference data workbooks uses the unit and unit type definitions.

The units and unit types are actually defined in the Core component of the software, and the UOM sheet is just a preview list of the units and types. For more information about units and unit types, see Appendix: Units of Measure (on page 261).

Do not modify the UOM sheet in the AllCommon.xls workbook.

Unit Types - Specifies the unit types, such as distance, angle, and so on.

Units - Specifies the available units for each type, such as inches, millimeters, and so on.

See Also Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68) AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines (on page 102) AllCommon Sheets (on page 101)


S E C T I O N 6

The insulation reference data provides information for insulating piping, duct, and equipment. This information includes material specifications and thickness tables.

See Also Insulation Sheets (on page 115) Insulation Reference Data (on page 115)

InsulationData.xls Workbook

Insulation Sheets The InsulationData.xls workbook contains the reference data for insulation.

Some sheets in the InsulationData.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the Revision History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).

The sheets that are unique to InsulationData.xls are listed below.

Insulation Spec - Defines insulation specifications that you want to use. For more information, see Insulation Specification Sheet (on page 116).

Insulation Thickness Table - Defines the temperature and thickness ranges that are available for each insulation specification. For more information, see Insulation Thickness Table Sheet (on page 116).

Insulation Material - Defines insulation material density and allowable thickness. For more information, see Insulation Material Sheet (on page 117).

HVAC Insulation Material - Provides the material, density, and thickness of insulation for duct. For more information, see HVAC Insulation Material Sheet (on page 117).

Equipment Insulation Material - Provides the material, density, and thickness of insulation for equipment. For more information, see Equipment Insulation Material Sheet (on page 117).

Component Insulation Exclusion - Lists piping commodities that should not have insulation. For more information, see Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet (on page 118).


Insulation Reference Data



Insulation Specification Sheet The Insulation Specification sheet defines the insulation specifications for your catalog.

SpecName - Type a name for the insulation specification that you are defining.

Material - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Purpose - Specifies the purpose code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Purpose sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Thickness Rule - Specify the thickness rule to use.

Temperature Rule - Specify the temperature rule to use.


Insulation Thickness Table Sheet The Insulation Thickness Table sheet defines all possible sizes, temperature ranges, and insulation thicknesses available for the insulation specifications. Before defining ranges and insulation thicknesses on this sheet, you must list the insulation specifications on the Insulation Spec sheet.

Spec Name - Type the insulation specification for which you want to define thickness ranges.

NPD Low - Specify the smallest pipe diameter to be considered in this range.

NPD High - Specify the largest pipe diameter to be considered in this range.

NPD Unit Type - Specify the units of measure for the NPD Low and NPD High columns. Each delivered insulation specification is defined in both imperial and metric units.

Temperature Low - Specify the lowest temperature to be considered in this range. Include the temperature unit of measure (K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius) when specifying this value.

Temperature High - Specify the highest temperature to be considered in this range. Include the temperature unit of measure (K for Kelvin, F for Fahrenheit, or C for Celsius) when specifying this value.

The temperature from the 3D model must be greater than the lower bound and less than or equal to the upper bound. The exception is the lowest range in each section on this sheet, where the temperature can be greater than or equal to the lower bound and less than or equal to the upper bound.

For example, the lowest range for insulation made of calcium silicate is 100F – 400F. Therefore, you can enter 100F. Note the = sign between Temp_lo and t in the following expression.

Temp_lo <= t <= Temp_hi

For the other ranges, such as 401F – 500F in the calcium silicate section, you can only enter a number between and including 402F – 500 F. Note there is no = sign between Temp_lo and t in the following expression.

Temp_lo < t <= Temp_hi

Thickness - Specify the thickness of the insulation. Include the unit of measure when specifying this value.



Insulation Material Sheet The Insulation Material sheet defines the material information about insulation.

Material Type - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Density - Specifies the density of the material.

Allowable Thickness - Lists the valid thicknesses for a given material.


HVAC Insulation Material Sheet The HVAC Insulation Material sheet defines insulation for ductwork.

Material Type - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist Number column.




Equipment Insulation Material Sheet The Equipment Insulation Material sheet defines insulation for equipment. This information populates the insulation materials list on the Equipment Properties dialog boxes for equipment parts that are insulation-capable.

Material - Specifies the material code for the insulation specification. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Insulation Material sheet in the Codelist Number column.






Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet The Component Insulation Exclusion Rule nodesheet in the InsulationData.xls workbook helps to eliminate false clashes involving piping and instrument components. This rule identifies conditions under which a component, such as an instrument indicator, is not insulated although it exists on an insulated line. Another example is that valves, flanges, and unions that are typically not insulated for personnel protection. This rule does not have any effect on runs whose Insulation Purpose is set to Undefined.

The components that are not to be insulated are determined on the basis of the piping commodity type; the first size range; the second size range; the Multi-Size Option; the Heat Tracing Requirement (heat traced or not), the Insulation Requirement (hot or cold insulation), and the Insulation Temperature.

The software uses the following convention to determine the temperature to use as the basis of the rule:

If the piping designer has specified the pipeline insulation temperature, then that insulation temperature is used.

If the pipeline insulation temperature is undefined, then the heat tracing medium temperature for jacketed piping (the operating temperature of the jacket fluid) is used.

Otherwise, if the heat tracing medium temperature is undefined, or non-jacketed piping is being used, the temperature is determined on the basis of these case conditions:

If hot insulation applies, the maximum temperature of the applicable (maximum) case conditions is used.

If cold insulation applies, the minimum temperature of the applicable (minimum) case conditions is used.

First Size From - Enter the smallest size in the first size range for this rule.

First Size To - Enter the largest size in the first size range for this rule.

First Size Units - Enter the units of measurement for the first size values, for example, in or mm.

Heat Tracing Medium - Select the heat-tracing medium to which the rule applies. Valid codelist numbers are specified on the Heat Tracing Medium sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the Codelist Number column.

Heat Tracing Type - Select the heat-tracing type to which the rule applies.

Heat Tracing Requirement - Select the heat-tracing requirement to which the rule applies.

Insulation Purpose - Select the insulation purpose to which the rule applies. Valid codelist numbers are specified on the Insulation Purpose sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the Codelist Number column.

Insulation Type - Select the insulation type to which the rule applies.

Insulation Requirement - Select the insulation requirement to which the rule applies.

Insulation Temperature From - Specify the lowest temperature in the temperature range to which the rule applies.

Insulation Temperature To - Specify the highest temperature in the temperature range to which the rule applies.



Multi-Size Option - Type a string to represent an optional piping commodity selection for multi-sized fittings when the first size and second size are inadequate.

For example, if two additional sizes (2" and 1") are required in addition to a first size of 6" and a second size of 4", the string that would represent the sizes would be 6x4x2x1. The software interprets the string to determine the second size and the number of sizes in addition to the first size and second size. Do not include a unit of measure in the string. The unit of measure for the first size, defined in the First Size Units column is used.

Piping Commodity Type - Specify the commodity type codelist number for which you are defining a rule. Valid commodity types codelist numbers are specified on the Piping Commodity Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook in the Codelist Number column.

Piping Commodity Sub Class - Select the piping commodity sub class.

Piping Commodity Class - Select the piping commodity class.

Second Size From - Enter the smallest size in the second size range for this rule.

Second Size To - Enter the largest size in the second size range for this rule.

Second Size Units - Enter the units of measurement for the second size values, for example, in or mm.

See Also Define Component Insulation Exclusion (on page 119)

Define Component Insulation Exclusion

1. Open the InsulationData.xls workbook.

2. Select the Component Insulation Exclusion sheet.

3. Select a row after the Start keyword but before the End keyword, and click Insert > Row.

4. In the Piping Commodity Type column, enter the codelist number for the piping commodity for which you are defining the rule.

5. In the First Size From column, specify the beginning first size for the range.

6. In the First Size To column, specify the ending first size for the range.

7. In the First Size Units column, specify the units.

8. In the Heat Tracing Medium column, specify the heat tracing medium codelist number.

9. In the Insulation Purpose column, specify the insulation purpose codelist number.

10. Enter the insulation temperature range.

11. Save the InsulationData.xls workbook and bulkload it into the catalog.


S E C T I O N 7

Module types are used in the Copy to Catalog and Paste from Catalog commands available in the Common task. You can copy a set of objects to the catalog and then later paste the set of objects into another model that uses the same catalog.

See Also Module Type Sheets (on page 121)

ModuleTypes.xls Workbook

Module Type Sheets The ModuleTypes.xls workbook contains data that applies to several of the design disciplines in the software. Module types are used in the Copy to Catalog and Paste from Catalog commands in the Common task.

Some sheets in the ModuleTypes.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the Revision History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).

The sheets that are unique to ModuleTypes.xls are listed below. The delivered module types are either Equipment, Piping, or Supports types.

Equipment Module Types

Conveyor System

Heat Exchanger

Mixing Tank

Piping Module Types

Drain Arrangement

Pump Discharge Arrangement

Pump Suction Arrangement

Vent Arrangement

Module Types Reference Data

Module Types Reference Data


Support Types

Pipe Supports

HVAC Supports

Electrical Supports

Combined Supports

Designed Supports

Each of these sheets contains a class definition section and a parts definition section. The class definition is marked with the keyword Definition, and the parts definition is marked with the keywords Head/Start/End. For general information about these sections, see Part Class Sheet (on page 71).

The parts definition properties on the Module Types sheets (as delivered) are all the same. You can type a name and description for the module type.

See Also Module Types Reference Data (on page 121)


S E C T I O N 8

Each task in the software that creates new parts in the model automatically generates a name for the parts using defined rules.

The reference data for naming rules consists of a list of part classes and associated naming rules. A Visual Basic program does the naming. You can use the same naming rule for more than one part class. For more information about Visual Basic rules in the software, refer to the SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide. This guide is available when you install the programming resources. For more information about installation, see the "Install Additional Product Software" section in the SmartPlant 3D Installation Guide.

You can customize the delivered naming rules or create new naming rules. For more information, see Creating and Distributing Naming Rules (on page 123).

The software often includes new naming rules with each version. If you are migrating your reference data from a previous version and want to use the new naming rules, you must add the new naming rules to the GenericNamingRules.xls workbook and then bulk load.

You should not create weld naming rules or use labels that generate weld identifiers with spaces in them. The WeldNumberLabel allows you to customize weld identifiers on isometric drawings. This label should not, under any circumstances, result in the generation of an identifier with spaces in it. Weld identifiers with spaces are not supported.

See Also Naming Rules Sheets (on page 125) Naming Rules Sheet (on page 126)

Creating and Distributing Naming Rules The software makes it possible to create and customize the rules for naming. The process of customizing naming rules is similar to the process for customizing the symbols. For more information, see the "Visual Basic Symbols" section in the SmartPlant 3D Symbols Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

The main difference between distributing new symbols and distributing new naming rules is the point at which the check for new naming rules is made. Each time the Catalog database is modified through a bulkload operation, the software checks for new naming rules in the CAB files. Just integrating the naming rule dll into a CAB file is insufficient (as clients do not go look for it); a bulkload operation that modifies the Catalog is required.

You can specify cab file information in the SolverProgID field on the NamingRules sheet. The SolverProgID must be in the following format: <ProgID>|<CAB file location>. An example is Pipeline.UserPipeline|Pipeline.CAB, where the Pipeline.CAB file is delivered in the \\<ComputerName>\Symbols folder.

See Also Naming Rules Sheets (on page 125) Naming Rules Sheet (on page 126)

Naming Rules Reference Data



Move Custom DLLs to SharedContent Directory (Option 1)

Starting with version 2009 of SmartPlant 3D, rules DLLs are saved with other reference data in the SharedContent folder. Use the following workflow to copy your customized rules to this single location instead of to each client workstation.

1. Recompile each Visual Basic project in a Version 2011 (9.0) Service Pack 1 client installation.

2. Copy the new DLLs to the [Reference Data Directory]\SharedContent\Custom Symbols folder.

You can create folders as needed in the Custom Symbols folder, such as a folder for each task.

If a custom DLL has a localizer DLL, both should be in the same folder.

DLLs ending "–Ref.dll" or "_Ref.dll" are treated as reference DLLs and are ignored. These DLLs do not need to be copied from the client machine containing the rules Visual Basic source code.

3. In the Project Management task, select a catalog that uses the SharedContent folder.

4. Click Tools > Update Custom Symbol Configuration.

The command creates or updates the file called CustomSymbolConfig.xml in the [Reference

Data Directory]\SharedContent\Xml folder. CustomSymbolConfig.xml contains entries of

ProgID, CLSID, and DLL name for each class in the custom DLLs. After

CustomSymbolConfig.xml is created, the software uses the custom DLLs from the

[Reference Data Directory]\SharedContent\Custom Symbols folder.

The software parses [Reference Data Directory]\SharedContent\Xml\SystemSymbolConfig.xml first and then CustomSymbolConfig.xml. If there are duplicate entries in SystemSymbolConfig.xml and CustomSymbolConfig.xml for the same ProgID, the last entry is used. An error is logged to error log when a duplicate entry is found. Whenever a symbol or naming rule class needs to be created, the software follows the following priority:

a. It checks if an entry for the ProgID exists in the xml files. If an entry exists, then the corresponding DLL is loaded and an instance of the class is created.

b. If an entry does not exist, then the class is registered.

If an entry exists for a ProgID in the xml files, it is used even though another (or same) copy of the DLL is registered. The order of priority when creating an instance of an object is: CustomSymbolConfig.xml, SystemSymbolConfig.xml, and then the registry.

When a new custom DLL is added to the [Reference Data Directory]\SharedContent\Custom Symbols folder, or an existing custom DLL is modified, you must re-run the Tools > Update Custom Symbol Configuration command in Project Management.

If you choose to use option 1, then the custom DLLs should not be registered.

If any of these components use helper classes and the helper classes are instantiated by calling "CreateObject", the "CreateObject" needs to be replaced. If the helper class is in the same project, then "new" can be used instead of "CreateObject". If the helper class is in a different project, then "SP3DCreateObject" needs to be used instead of "CreateObject". SP3DCreateObject tries to instantiate the object using the information in xml files. If no entry



is found in xml files for the given ProgID, then it calls "CreateObject". SP3DCreateObject is implemented in [Product Directory]\Core\Runtime\SP3DCoCreateInstance.dll. When SP3DCreateObject needs to be used, [Product Directory]\Core\Runtime\SP3DCoCreateInstance.dll needs to be referenced in the Visual Basic project. Example usage of SP3DCreateObject is shown below:

Set oHelperObject = SP3DCreateObject(strHelperProgId)

If the symbol class has any public structures or types, they should be made private. For example:

Public Type InputType Name As String Description As String Properties As IMSDescriptionProperties uomValue As Double End Type

Should be changed to:

Private Type InputType Name As String Description As String Properties As IMSDescriptionProperties uomValue As Double End Type

Debugging and maintaining Visual Basic project references, reference DLLs, and binary compatibility are beyond the scope of this document. Contact your SmartPlant 3D Support representative if you have questions.

GenericNamingRules.xls Workbook

Naming Rules Sheets The GenericNamingRules.xls workbook contains a list of internal class names and associated naming rules.

Some sheets in the GenericNamingRules.xls workbook, such as the Legend sheet and the Revision History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).

The sheets that are unique to GenericNamingRules.xls are listed below.

Naming Rules - Specifies the naming rules for classes. For more information, see Naming Rules Sheet (on page 126).

See Also Naming Rules Reference Data (on page 123)



Naming Rules Sheet The Naming Rules sheet in defines rules for naming objects in the software.

Whenever you add new naming rules to the workbook, you must bulk load the workbook in order for the new naming rules to appear in the software.

Type Name - Specifies the internal class names of objects. This name appears in the Catalog hierarchy in the NamingRules folder.

Name - Specifies the rule name. You can use the same naming rule for more than one object type.

Solver Prog ID - Provides the identifier for the Visual Basic program that controls the rule. For more information about defining the VB programs for naming rules, see the SmartPlant 3D/SmartMarine 3D Programmer's Guide.

The following table shows an example of the NamingRules sheet.


S E C T I O N 9

Standard nozzle data provides representative data for piping nozzles and other ports, including electrical nozzles for conduit and cable tray.

When you work in the model, you can insert nozzles with the Place Nozzle command in the Equipment and Furnishings task. You can modify nozzles on the Properties dialog boxes for parts with nozzles.

See Also Nozzle Data Sheets (on page 127) Cable Nozzle Sheet (on page 129) Cable Tray Ports Sheet (on page 129) Conduit Ports Sheet (on page 129) Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet (on page 128) Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet (on page 128)

Standard Nozzle Data.xls Workbook

Nozzle Data Sheets The Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook contains data for nozzles in the piping and electrical disciplines.

Some sheets in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook, such as the Index sheet and the Revision History sheet, are common to all the workbooks. For more information on common sheets, see Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57).

The sheets that are unique to Standard Nozzle Data.xls are listed below.

Piping Straight Nozzles - Specifies data for piping straight nozzles. For more information, see Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet (on page 128).

Piping Elbow Nozzles - Specifies data for piping elbow nozzles. For more information, see Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet (on page 128).

Conduit Ports - Specifies data for conduit ports. For more information, see Conduit Ports Sheet (on page 129).

Cable Nozzle - Specifies data for cable nozzles. For more information, see Cable Nozzle Sheet (on page 129).

Cable Tray Ports - Specifies data for cable tray ports. For more information, see Cable Tray Ports Sheet (on page 129).

See Also Standard Nozzle Data (on page 127)

Standard Nozzle Data



Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet The Piping Straight Nozzles sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines reference data for piping straight nozzles.

Id - This column is not currently being used.

Npd - Type the nominal piping diameter for the piping nozzle.

Npd Unit Type - Specify the units for the NPD column. For example, type mm or in.

End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Schedule Thickness - Enter the value or code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for the piping nozzle.

End Standard - Type the end standard code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Flow Direction - Type the flow direction code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Flow Direction sheet in the Codelist Number column.

See Also Nozzle Data Sheets (on page 127)

Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet The Piping Elbow Nozzles sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines reference data for piping elbow nozzles.


Npd - Type the nominal piping diameter for the piping nozzle.


End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Schedule Thickness - Enter the value or code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for the piping nozzle.

End Standard - Type the end standard code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Pressure Rating - Type the pressure rating code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Pressure Rating sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Flow Direction - Type the flow direction code for the piping nozzle. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the Flow Direction sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Bend Radius - Type the bend radius value and units for the piping nozzle.

Bend Length - Type the bend length value and units for the piping nozzle.



The following picture shows the Bend Radius and Bend Length dimensions on a piping elbow nozzle.

See Also Nozzle Data Sheets (on page 127)

Conduit Ports Sheet The Conduit Ports sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines reference data for conduit ports.


Npd - Type the nominal piping diameter for the conduit port.


End Preparation - Type the end preparation code for the conduit port. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Preparation sheet in the Codelist Number column.

Schedule Thickness - Enter the value or code that represents the schedule (or thickness) for the conduit port.

End Standard - Type the end standard code for the conduit port. Valid codes are listed in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook on the End Standard sheet in the Codelist Number column.

See Also Naming Rules Sheets (on page 125)

Cable Nozzle Sheet The Cable Nozzle sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook is not currently being used.


Cable Tray Ports Sheet The Cable Tray Ports sheet in the Standard Nozzle Data.xls workbook defines reference data for cable tray ports.


Nominal Width - Enter the nominal width of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or mm for millimeters.

Nominal Depth - Enter the nominal depth of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or mm for millimeters.

Actual Width - Enter the actual width of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or mm for millimeters.



Actual Depth - Enter the actual depth of the port. Include the units, such as in for inches or mm for millimeters.

The actual width and depth dimensions can account for the thickness of the cable tray wall.



S E C T I O N 1 0

In This Section Using Catalog Data in an Integrated Environment ........................ 131

Using Catalog Data in an Integrated Environment For proper P&ID correlation when you use the software in an integrated environment, SmartPlant P&ID and SmartPlant 3D must use the same naming convention for piping components and equipment.

One example is piping reducers. You can open the Excel workbook for piping components in SmartPlant 3D, and change the name "Concentric Size Change" to "Concentric Reducer". Or, copy the existing rows and add new entries, as shown below. Save the workbook and bulk load it into the Catalog.

Working in an Integrated Environment

Working in an Integrated Environment



A P P E N D I X A

This appendix contains information about the select lists that you see under the main Select Lists node in the tree view. The select lists in this appendix are listed in alphabetical order.

Select lists are called codelists in the delivered bulkload workbooks. A select list number is the same thing as a codelist number.

A select list (codelist) is a set of predefined acceptable values for a particular attribute. For example, the Fluid Code list defines all the acceptable fluid names that you can use. You can only select fluids that are defined in the Fluid Code list. Generally, each entry in a list has a unique number to identify that value, a short description, and a long description. Depending on where the software is using the list, you can select the short description to select the list item. However, when defining parts and piping specification rules, you may be required to identify the list item that you want by using the list number.

The delivered select lists can be categorized into these types: simple, hierarchical, and system.

Simple - Map numbers with descriptions.

Hierarchical - Group the mappings in multiple levels. If you set a lower-level value in this type of select list, all values above this level are also set. For example, in the Equipment Types select list, if you set ProcessEqTypes5 to 370, the higher-level values are also set: ProcessEqTypes4 to 360, ProcessEqTypes3 to 325, and so forth.

System - Contain values that users must not change.

You can modify most select lists to reflect your own practices, terminology, and language. You can make revisions to a select list set by editing the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and then bulk loading. You can also add or edit select lists in the Catalog task.

When you add an entry to a select list, the number for the entry must be between 10,000 - 40,000. Numeric values less than 10,000 and greater than 40,000 are reserved for use by the software.

Here are some important points to remember about deleting and modifying select lists. You cannot delete a select list after it is loaded into the Catalog database. However, you can delete values in certain select lists. The Bulkload utility supports delete and replace for select lists.

You can rename select lists. The name for a select list corresponds to the column name on the sheet, not necessarily the sheet name in the workbook. The name for each select list must be unique in the database.

Appendix: Select Lists (Codelists)



You can edit the lowest level in a hierarchical select list, but you must not edit any higher levels in the select list. You can edit simple select lists (without a hierarchy) unless otherwise specified on the sheet.

For quick links to all the select lists, see the Index sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.

The namespace for user- defined select lists is UDP. This designation is placed in the CodeListTableNamespace column on the Custom Interfaces sheet. For more information about select lists and namespaces, see Select List (Codelist) Namespaces (on page 144).

The limit for select list names is 30 characters. You cannot use blanks or special characters in these names.

The limit for the long and short descriptions in a select list is 256 characters.

The property name, or column name, can be a maximum of 30 characters.

A sheet name and select list table name cannot exceed 30 characters.

All values in the short description column for a select list must be unique for that list.

Select List (Codelist) Column Descriptions The select lists have several fields, or columns, in common. Hierarchical select lists can have more than one pair of short and long description columns.

Short Description - Specifies the short description of the entry. The maximum length of this description is 256 characters.

All values in the short description column must be unique for that select list.

Long Description - Specifies the long description of the entry. The maximum length of this description is 256 characters.

Codelist Number - Specifies an identification number for each row in the sheet. When you want to use the data defined in a row, enter the number associated with that row. All numbers in this column must be unique on this sheet.

Sort Order - This field is not currently used in the software.

To modify the order of the entries, open the Catalog task, and expand the Select Lists node. Then, use the Move Up and Move Down keys on the toolbar to adjust the order of the items.

Select List (Codelist) Disciplines The following table lists the sheets in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and their associated disciplines.

Sheet Discipline

Align Component HVAC

Aspect Code All

Assembly Inclusion Piping

Automated Flange Selection Option Piping

Auxiliary Treatment Piping

Bend To Bend Tangent Basis Piping

Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option Piping



Sheet Discipline

Bolt Extension Option Piping

Bolt Length Calculation Option Piping

Bolt Length Round Off Option Piping

Bolt Lubrication Requirements Piping

Bolt Option Piping

Bolt Type Piping

Bolting Requirements Piping

Branch Reporting Ownership Piping

Cable Route Status Electrical (Cable)

Cable Tray Component Type Electrical (Cable Tray)

Cable Tray Materials Electrical (Cable Tray)

Cable Tray Part Data Basis Electrical (Cable Tray)

Cable Tray Type Electrical (Cable Tray)

Cable Type Electrical (Cable)

Cap Screw Length Round Off Option Piping

Catalog Units of Measure Basis Piping

Clamp Option Piping

Clamp Requirement Piping, Electrical

Clamp Selection Basis Piping

Cleaning Requirement Multiple: Piping, Equipment

Cleaning Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Structure

Coating Color Multiple: Piping, Equipment, Structure

Coating Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment, Structure

Commodity Code Builder Option Piping

Commodity Option Piping

Conduit Selection Basis Electrical (Conduit)

Connection Type Piping

Construction Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment, integration

Control Point Subtype Common

Control Point Type Common

Create Exclusive WBS Item All

Cross Section Cardinal Points Structure

Cross Section Edges Structure

Cross Section Shape Types HVAC



Sheet Discipline

Design Responsibility Multiple: Electrical, Equipment, Hanger and Supports, Structure

Design Standard Multiple: Piping, Equipment

Door Frame Position Structure

Door Type Structure

Doors Windows Kinematics Structure

Drilling Template Pattern Piping

Eccentric Offset Basis Piping

Elevation Plane Type Grids

EMI Electrical

EMI Radiator Electrical

EMI Suceptor Electrical

End Preparation Multiple: Piping, Equipment

End Standard Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit), Equipment

Environmental Zone Multiple: Piping, Equipment

Equipment Component Types Equipment

Equipment Types Equipment

Examination Piping

Exterior Surface Treatment Piping

External Welded Pipe Part Hangers and Supports

Fabrication Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Structure

Fabrication Type Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit), Equipment

Fabrication Type Basis Piping

Feature Type Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit)

Fireproofing Exposure Type Structure

Fireproofing Method Structure

Fireproofing Type Structure

Flange Face Surface Finish Piping

Flange Facing Piping

Flange Insulation Kit Type Piping

Flexible Hose Topology Type Piping

Flip Component HVAC

Flow Direction Piping

Fluid Code Piping



Sheet Discipline

Front End Type Equipment

Gasket Inside Diameter Basis Piping

Gasket Option Piping

Gasket Outside Diameter Basis Piping

Gasket Requirement Override Piping

Gasket Requirements Piping

Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code Piping

Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted Ends Option

Piping

Gasket Style Number Piping

Gasket Type Piping

Geometric Industry Standard Piping

Geometry Type Piping

Grid Plane Type Grids

Handrail Connection Type Structure

Handrail End Treatment Structure

Handrail Inline Connection Type Structure

Handrail Offset Structure

Handrail Orientation Structure

Handrail Side Connection Type Structure

Hand Wheel Orientation Piping

Hazardous Fluid Category Multiple: Piping, Equipment

Header Branch Size Basis Option Piping

Heat Tracing Medium Multiple: Piping, Equipment

HngSup Associated Part Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Association Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup BOM Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Bounding Box Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Class Node Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Command Hangers and Supports

HngSup Connection Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Connect Obj Hangers and Supports

HngSup Cut Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Discipline Hangers and Supports



Sheet Discipline

HngSup ET Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Face Selection Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Joint Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Manufacturer Hangers and Supports

HngSup Mating Joint Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Part Class Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Physical Connection Hangers and Supports

HngSup Port Category Hangers and Supports

HngSup Port Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Rule Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Strict Face Selection Hangers and Supports

HngSup Support Type Hangers and Supports

HngSup Type Selection Rule Hangers and Supports

HVAC Component Types HVAC

HVAC Lining Material HVAC

HVAC Part Data Basis HVAC

HVAC Part Generation Basis HVAC

HVAC Width and Depth Basis HVAC

Icarus Column Base Option Space Management

Icarus Concrete Type Space Management

Icarus Exclude End Bent Space Management

Icarus Grating Type Space Management

Icarus Pipe Rack Type Space Management

Icarus Struct Steel Analysis Space Management

Icarus Third Column Space Management

IFC Aspect Code Value Interference Checking

IFC Process Status Interference Checking

IFC Required Action Interference Checking

IFC Type Interference Checking

Ignore Boundaries All

Industry Commodity Code Option Piping

Inlet Port Geometry Type Piping

Installation Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers and Supports, Structure



Sheet Discipline

Instrument Functional Type Piping

Insulation Material Multiple: Piping, Equipment, HVAC

Insulation Purpose Multiple: Piping, Equipment

Insulation Temperature Basis Piping

Insulation Thickness Basis Multiple: Piping, Equipment

Interior Surface Treatment Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit)

Is Bend Planar Piping

Jacketed Closure Method Piping

Jacketed Piping Basis Piping

Lining Material Piping

Load Span Classification Electrical (Cable Tray)

Loose Material Requirements Piping

Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option Piping

Manufacturer Piping

Manufacturing Method Piping

Map Type Drawings and Reports

Materials Grade Piping

Materials Description Builder Option Piping

Materials of Construction Class Piping

Materials Type Piping

Member Orientation Structure

Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction Piping

Methods of Trimming Piping

Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option Piping

Mirror Behavior Option Multiple: Piping, Equipment

Misc Requisition Classification Piping

Multiport Valve Op Req Piping

Note Purpose All

Nozzle Entrance Type Multiple: Piping, integration

Nozzle Flange Type Multiple: Piping, integration

Nozzle Function Multiple: Piping, integration

Nut Creation Option Piping

Nut Option Piping

Nut Type Piping



Sheet Discipline

Open or Blind Spacer Install State Piping

Orifice Flange Tap Orientation Piping

Outlet Port Geometry Type Piping

Painting Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers and Supports, Structure

Part Class Types All

Part Data Basis Piping

Part Data Source Piping

Pipe Bend Radius By User Option Piping

Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option Piping

Pipe Bend Type Piping

Pipe Bending Machine Type Piping

Pipe Stock Usage Piping

Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number Basis Option

Piping

Piping Commodity Override Option Piping

Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option Piping

Piping Commodity Type Multiple: Piping, Catalog

Piping Point Usage Piping

Piping Spec Status Piping

Piping Spec Version Management Option Piping

Piping Specification Notes Option Piping

Plane of Flip HVAC

Plane of Turn HVAC

Pressure Rating Piping

Property Categories All

Purchase Length Basis Option Piping

Rear End Type Equipment and Furnishings

Reference Plane View Directions Structure

Reporting Requirement Basis Piping

Reporting Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment, Hangers and Supports, Structure

Requisition Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers and Supports, Structure

Requisition Type Multiple: Piping, Equipment



Sheet Discipline

Respect Assembly Boundaries Piping

Revision History Notes Option Piping

Ring Number Piping

Rotation Offset Type Grids

Route Direction Space Management

Route Layout Space Management

Route on Face Space Management

Schedule Thickness Piping

Selection Basis Piping

Short Code Hierarchy Piping

Signal Type Electrical

Size Reduction Preference Piping

Size Reduction Type Piping

Slab Boundary Reference Structure

Slab Composition Structure

Slab Continuity Structure

Slab Corner Type Structure

Slab Cross Section Symbol Structure

Slab Direction Reference Structure

Slab Face Position Structure

Slab Fastener Type Structure

Slab Layer Role Structure

Slab Manufacturing Process Structure

Slab Nosing Material Structure

Slab Nosing Type Structure

Slab Priority Structure

Slab Reference Direction Structure

Spectacle Position Piping

Spool Break by Control Point Piping

Spool Include Welded Parts Piping

Spool Sequence Type Piping

Spooling Basis Piping

Steamout Requirement Multiple: Piping, Electrical (Conduit)

Stress Relief Piping



Sheet Discipline

Stress Relief Requirement Piping

Struct 2L Back to Back Rule Structure

Struct AC Left Right Both Structure

Struct AC Pad Type Structure

Struct AC Sizing Rule Structure

Struct AC Splice Types Structure

Struct Alignment Structure

Struct Boundary Conditions Structural Analysis

Struct Can Diameter Rule Structure

Struct Can Length Compute Method Structure

Struct Can Type Structure

Struct Compute Rule Structure

Struct Cone Length Compute Method Structure

Struct Continuity Structure

Struct Coord Sys Reference Structure

Struct Custom Plate Part Type Structure

Struct End Releases Structure

Struct Feature Radius Type Structure

Struct FC Chevron WPO Structure

Struct FC End Controlling Structure

Struct FC Offset Along Structure

Struct FC Offset Direction Structure

Struct FC Supported Edge Structure

Struct FC Supporting CPs Structure

Struct FC Supporting Side Structure

Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule Structure

Struct Frm Conn Position Ref Structure

Struct Insulation Encasement Structure

Struct Insulation Purpose Structure

Struct Member End Selection Rule Structure

Struct Member Position Rule Structure

Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes Structure

Struct Insulation Setback Ref Structure

Struct Wall Boundary Size Structure



Sheet Discipline

Struct Wall Boundary Type Structure

Struct Wall Connection Type Structure

Struct Wall Reference Attribute Structure

Structural Load Case Source Structure

Structural Member Priority Structure

Structural Member Type Structure

Structural WPO Intersection Index Structure

Supplementary Nut Requirement Piping

Supplementary Washer Requirement Piping

Supply Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers and Supports, Structure

Surface Preparation Piping

Tap End Stud Bolt Length Roundoff Option Piping

Testing Responsibility Multiple: Piping, Electrical, Equipment, Hangers and Supports, Structure

Testing Type Piping

Tightness Piping

Tray Specification Type Electrical (Cableway)

Type Piping

Undefined Service Limits Rule Option Piping

Valve Flow Pattern Piping

Valve Model Number Piping

Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard Piping

Valve Operator Is Rotatable Piping

Valve Operator Part Data Basis Piping

Valve Operator Type Piping

Valve Port Option Piping

Valve Trim Piping

Vendor Piping

Vessel Head Type Equipment

Voltage Grade Electrical (Cable)

Washer Creation Option Piping

Washer Option Piping

Washer Type Piping



Sheet Discipline

WBS Assignment All

WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type All

WBS Item Purpose All

WBS Project Purpose All

WBS Pull In Associated Items All

Welding Procedure Specification Piping

Weld Type Piping

Welding Requirement Piping

Select List (Codelist) Namespaces Each select list belongs to a namespace. When you specify interfaces and attributes on the Custom Interfaces sheets in the reference data workbooks, you can specify a select list and namespace for the attribute.

The delivered select lists are in the following namespaces: CMNSCH (Common Schema), REFDAT (Reference Data), and UDP (User-Defined Package). When you define a select list, place it in the UDP namespace.

Align Component The Align Component select list (codelist) specifies that an object is flat and whether it is on the bottom left, the top right, or in the center.

This select list is used in the Catalog task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

You can edit the delivered text of the short or long descriptions as long as you do not change the meaning. Do not change the numeric values of the delivered select list items. You cannot add or delete select list items.



Anvil_Constant_Dir Anvil_Constant_Dir lists the options for travel direction (up or down). This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Constant_Dir.

Anvil_Constant_Sus Anvil_Constant_Sus lists the options for suspension. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Constant_Sus.

Anvil_Dyn_Config Anvil_Dyn_Config lists the options for configuration. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_Config.

Anvil_Dyn_Finish Anvil_Dyn_Finish lists the options for finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_Finish.

Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia is not used. This select list (codelist) belongs to the UDP namespace.

Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient lists the options for reservoir orientation. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient.



Anvil_Dyn_ResType Anvil_Dyn_ResType lists the options for reservoir type. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_ResType.

Anvil_Dyn_Stroke Anvil_Dyn_Stroke lists the options for stroke. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_Stroke.

Anvil_Dyn_ValveType Anvil_Dyn_ValveType lists the options for valve types. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Dyn_ValveType.

Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia is not used. This select list (codelist) belongs to the UDP namespace.

Anvil_FIG137_Nuts Anvil_FIG137_Nuts lists the options for the number of nuts. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG137 part class in the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG137_Nuts.

Anvil_FIG167_Insulat Anvil_FIG167_Insulat lists the options for insulation thickness. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG167 part class in the Hangers and Support task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG167_Insulat.



Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW lists the options for beam flange width. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG218 part class in the Hangers and Support task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW.

Anvil_FIG255_Insulat Anvil_FIG255_Insulat lists the options for insulation thickness. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG255 part class in the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG255_Insulat.

Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW lists the options for beam flange width. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG292 part class in the Hangers an Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW.

Anvil_FIG299_Config Anvil_FIG299_Config lists the options for configuration. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG299 part class in the Hangers and Supports class. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG299_Config.

Anvil_FIG86_Finish Anvil_FIG86_Finish lists the options for finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG86 part class in the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_FIG89_Finish.

Anvil_Finish Anvil_Finish lists the options for finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Finish.



Anvil_Rod_Finish Anvil_Rod_Finish lists the options for rod finish. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Rod_Finish.

Anvil_Shoe_Base Anvil_Shoe_Base lists the options for base connection types. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Shoe_Base.

Anvil_Shoe_Finish Anvil_Shoe_Finish lists the options for shoe finishes. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Shoe_Finish.

Anvil_Shoe_Type Anvil_Shoe_Type lists the options for base types. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Shoe_Type.

Anvil_Stanchion_Dia Anvil_Stanchion_Dia lists the options for stanchion pipe size. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Stanchion_Dia.

Anvil_Strut_Finish Anvil_Strut_Finish lists the options for strut finishes. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Strut_Finish.



Anvil_Variable_ColType Anvil_Variable_ColType lists the options for column type. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Variable_ColType.

Anvil_Variable_Dir Anvil_Variable_Dir lists the options for travel direction (up or down). This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Variable_Dir.

Anvil_Variable_RollMat Anvil_Variable_RollMat lists the options for pipe roll material. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_Variable_RollMat.

Anvil_Variable_Top Anvil_Variable_Top lists the options for the top piece. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Anvil_WithWithout Anvil_WithWithout lists the options for whether or not to have a certain part, such as a retaining clip. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_WithWithout.

Anvil_YesNo Anvil_YesNo lists the options for whether or not to designate the part for copper tubing. This select list (codelist) is used in the FIG167 part class in the Hangers and Support task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Anvil_YesNo.



ApprovalReason ApprovalReason lists the options for the Status box on the Configuration tab of the Properties dialog box. You can customize the codelist table to suit your needs by adding possible states under the parent category (Working, InReview, Rejected and Approved).

Codelist items highlighted in yellow in the following table are defaults for the corresponding parent item.

You can create and delete codelist items other than the defaults to meet your needs. You can only customize the long values of the default codelist values.

The ApprovalReason.xls spreadsheet is delivered by default to the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder.

The default values are system defined codelist values and are not modifiable except for the long values. You can customize the list by adding new values and then bulkloading the file.

Aspect Code Aspect Code defines the available aspect codes in the software. This select list is used in the reference data for multiple tasks. Aspects are associated parameters that represent additional information needed for placement of objects. Aspects can represent clearances for safety or maintenance, additional space required during operation, or simple and detailed representations of objects. You can define aspects for select list numbers 19 through 31.

Aspect select list numbers 1 through 3, and 8 through 18 are reserved for use by the software and should not be modified.

Select list number 17 is for Molded Forms. Do not change this aspect code.

Do not define an aspect code of 32 or greater.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select AspectCode.



Assembly Inclusion The Assembly Inclusion select list (codelist) specifies the options for designating how assemblies are handled during the creation of WBS items and assignment of parts. For example, if the query is locating pipe parts, the software checks to see if each part belongs to an assembly (spool), and if so, the assembly is added to the WBS item along with the part.

This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Assembly YesNoAuto The Assembly YesNoAuto determines if a turnbuckle needs to be added to the support. This select list (codelist) is used by the Load Based Rigid Rod assembly (Assy_RR_LR) in the HS_Assembly.xls workbook. The select list is used for the Hangers and Supports task with the following options:

Yes - add the turnbuckle

No - do not add the turnbuckle

Auto - add the turnbuckle if the length of the rod is greater than a pre-defined length.

This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Assembly_BBXAlignment The Assembly_BBXAlignment select list specifies the different bounding box alignments that are available. This select list is in the HS_Assembly_Codelists.xls workbook and belongs to the UDP namespace.


Assembly_RefPorts The Assembly_RefPorts select list specifies whether the assembly should use the default reference port or the alternate reference port. This select list is in the HS_Assembly_Codelists.xls workbook and belongs to the UDP namespace.




Assembly_Variable_Dir Assembly_Variable_Dir lists the options for travel direction (up or down). This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Assembly_Variable_Dir.

Assembly_WithWithout Assembly_WithWithout lists the options for whether or not the assembly has certain parts, such as plates or a turnbuckle. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Assembly_WithWithout.

Automated Flange Selection Option The Automated Flange Selection Option select list (codelist) specifies the automated flange selection logic. The specification writer can distinguish between flanges inserted on plain piping versus flanges inserted in fitting-to-fitting situations. The option is typically enabled for a piping materials class that includes slip-on flanges or lap-joint flanges.



Auxiliary Treatment The Auxiliary Treatment select list (codelist) specifies exterior coating and surface treatments. As an example, an underground specification must be coated to prevent galvanic corrosion.

Here are some examples of when this select list is used:

Managing process flow and communicating production information in a pipe shop during the manufacture of spools.

Treating pipe with heat treatments, such as post-weld heat treatment.

Manufacturing underground piping, which may need a coating for water protection and to prevent the creation of a galvanic cell.

Exposing pipe to the environment in oil and gas processing plants and on offshore platforms.

Coating FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) piping systems after installation, regardless of environment.


When you add an entry to a select list, the number for the entry must be greater than 10,000. Numeric values less than 10,000 are reserved for use by the software.



Axial Profile Category The Axial Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available axial profile categories in the software.

This select list is used in the Molded Forms task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Bend To Bend Tangent Basis The Bend To Bend Tangent Basis select list (codelist) specifies the basis for measuring the minimum tangent length between bend dimensions. This property determines how the minimum bend-to-bend tangent lengths from the pipe bending die data and the minimum bend-to-bend tangent length data are interpreted.

In some cases, the data for minimum bending lengths is specified as the interior tangent lengths, (in other words, the tangents between two turns, from tangent point to tangent point). In other cases, the data is specified as the length from turn point to turn point.



Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option The Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option select list (codelist) defines the options for using the Bolt Diameter Equivalence Rule for reporting the bolt diameter. This optional rule enables the specification writer to define a correlation between the values of bolt diameter in the primary system of units for bolt diameter and the values of bolt diameter in the secondary system of units.



Bolt Extension Option The Bolt Extension Option select list (codelist) defines the available bolt extension options. The bolt extension values determine the length of the exposed threads for the bolt length calculation for both studs and machine bolts from the bolted end generic data. The bolt extension also includes any additional length required for stud tensioners. The nut height and the washer thickness, if applicable, are addressed independently of the bolt extension.

The specification writer can define a standard bolt extension and as many as five alternate bolt extension values.





Bolt Length Calculation Option The Bolt Length Calculation Option select list (codelist) enables you to specify whether the software calculates bolt lengths. Refer to the Default Project Options topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Bolt Length Round Off Option The Bolt Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) defines the options for how you want the software to handle bolt lengths. Refer to the Default Project Options topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.

If you choose None (number 5), the software uses the computed bolt length.

If you choose Use Value (number 10), the software rounds the computed bolt length up to the next increment of that round off value.

If you choose Use list of preferred bolt lengths (number 15), the software rounds the computed bolt length up to the smallest preferred bolt length that exceeds the computed bolt length.



Bolt Lubrication Requirements The Bolt Lubrication Requirements select list (codelist) defines the different bolt lubrications that you want to make available in the model. Refer to the Bolt Part Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.


Bolt Option The Bolt Option select list (codelist) specifies the optional bolt selections enabled by the specification writer.

A default bolt option represents the bolt to be used when the piping designer has not explicitly selected one. The bolt option, if applicable, is selected by the piping designer at a bolted joint.


Bolt Type The Bolt Type select list (codelist) defines all available bolt types.

The quantity of nuts and washers is determined on the basis of the bolt type. For machine bolts, a nut and a washer is required for each bolt. Optionally, you can specify that one supplementary nut is required for a machine bolt.



For studs, a nut and a washer are required for each end of the stud. In other words, a stud requires two nuts and two washers. Optionally, one supplementary nut may be required for each end of a stud.

For cap screws, only a washer is required for each screw.



Bolting Requirements The Bolting Requirements select list (codelist) defines bolting requirements, such as bolt reporting and cap screw substitution.



Bolting Requirements (Optional) - Select the bolting requirement for the piping commodity. Valid codes are listed in parentheses. The following options are available:

Undefined (1) - The bolting requirement is undefined.

Bolting required (5) - The piping commodity requires a reportable set of bolts determined by the bolted joint, but based on a special bolt extension option. If you select this option, you must define the Bolt Extension Option.

Complete substitution with cap screws for threaded holes (10) - The piping commodity requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for full threaded holes determined by the fitting itself instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws are used for all bolt holes in this situation and represent a complete substitution of the bolts that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. Use this option when the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set of threaded holes to match the drilling template applicable to the mating flange.

Complete substitution with cap screws for tapped holes (15) - The piping commodity requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for tapped holes determined by the fitting itself instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws (or tap end stud bolts) are used for all bolt holes in this situation and represent a complete substitution of the bolts that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. Use this option when the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set of tapped holes to match the drilling template applicable to the mating flange.

Partial substitution with cap screws for threaded holes (20) - The piping commodity requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for threaded holes determined by the fitting itself instead of some of the bolts determined by the bolted joint. This option represents a partial substitution of the bolts that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. Use this option to address the situation where the through-bolted fitting includes a partial set of threaded holes with respect to the drilling template applicable to the mating flange, and also the situation where the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set of holes to match the drilling template applicable to the mating flange, but only some of the holes are threaded.



Partial substitution with cap screws for tapped holes (25) - The piping commodity requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for tapped holes determined by the fitting itself instead of some of the bolts determined by the bolted joint. This option represents a partial substitution of the bolts that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. Use this option to address the situation where the through-bolted fitting includes a partial set of tapped holes with respect to the drilling template applicable to the mating flange, and also the situation where the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set of holes to match the drilling template applicable to the mating flange, but only some of the holes are tapped.

Bolts supplied with nozzle and not to be reported (30) - The piping commodity is supplied with the necessary bolts included, such that the applicable bolts should not be reported.

Reportable bolts not required (35) - A set of bolts is not applicable to any end of this piping commodity because all ends are non-bolted. This option is the default for any piping commodity without any bolted ends.

Complete substitution with cap screws for full threaded holes at second size end, where the cap screws only apply at the second size end (40) - The second size end requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for full threaded holes determined by the fitting itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws are used for all bolt holes in this situation. This represents a complete bolt substitution that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This option addresses the situation where the smaller end of a reducing flange includes a complete set of threaded holes to match the drilling template applicable to the companion flange. This option is not available for nozzles.

Complete substitution with cap screws for tapped holes at second size end, where the cap screws only apply at the second size end (45) - The second size end requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for tapped holes determined by the fitting itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws are used for all bolt holes in this situation. This represents a complete bolt substitution that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This option addresses the situation where the smaller end of a reducing flange includes a complete set of tapped holes to match the drilling template applicable to the companion flange. This option is not available for nozzles.

Partial substitution with cap screws for full threaded holes at second size end, where the cap screws only apply at the second size end (50) - The second size end requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for full threaded holes determined by the fitting itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of some of the bolts determined by the bolted joint. This option represents a partial bolt substitution that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This option addresses the situation where the smaller end of a reducing flange includes a partial set of threaded holes with respect to the drilling template applicable to the companion flange, and also the situation where the smaller end of the reducing flange includes a complete set of holes to match the drilling template applicable to the companion flange, but only some of the holes are threaded. This option is not available for nozzles.

Partial substitution with cap screws for tapped holes at second size end, where the cap screws only apply at the second size end (55) - The second size end requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws (or substitution tap end stud bolts) for tapped holes determined by fitting itself, for example a reducing flange, instead of some of the bolts determined by the bolted joint. This represents a partial bolt substitution that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This will address the situation where the smaller end of a reducing flange includes a partial set of tapped holes with respect to the drilling template applicable to the companion flange, and also the situation where the smaller



end of a reducing flange includes a complete set of holes to match the drilling template applicable to the companion flange, but only some of the holes are tapped. This option is not available for nozzles.

Complete cap screw substitution for full threaded and tapped holes for each bolted end (60) - Each bolted end requires a reportable set of substitution cap screws for full threaded holes and also tapped holes determined by the fitting itself instead of the bolted joint. Cap screws are used for all bolt holes in this situation. In other words, this represents a complete bolt substitution that would have otherwise been determined by the bolted joint. This option addresses the situation where the through-bolted fitting includes a complete set of threaded holes and also tapped holes to match the drilling template applicable to the companion flange. This can be required, as an example, for a larger size asymmetrical lug body butterfly valve where tapped holes are required near the valve stem. This option is not available for nozzles.

Any through-bolted joint, where the Termination Subclass for one of the bolted ends indicates through-bolted end with bolt holes, but the Bolting Requirement property for the fitting at that same bolted end indicates a complete substitution of cap screws (or tap end stud bolts), the software considers it to be a bolted joint, not a through-bolted joint.

Although two or more through-bolted fittings may be involved in forming a through-bolted connection, the software assumes that only one through-bolted fitting exists for any situation where either complete substitution or partial substitution with cap screws (or tap end stud bolts) applies. Furthermore, whenever two or more through-bolted fittings form a through-bolted connection, the software assumes that the bolts extend through all of the through-bolted fittings.

Bracket Category The Bracket Category select list (codelist) defines the available bracket categories in the software.

This select list is used in the Structural Detailing task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Branch Reporting Ownership The Branch Reporting Ownership select list (codelist) defines the options for reporting on branch components.

If, during reporting, you want the software to report the branch component with the rest of the branch, you must select Branch owns branch component (number 5).

However, if, during reporting, you want the software to report the branch component with the header that it connects to, you must select Header owns branch component (number 10).





bsWeldType The bsWeldType select list (codelist) specifies whether the weld is a fillet weld or a bevel-fillet weld. This select list is in the HS_S3DParts_Codelists.xls workbook and belongs to the UDP namespace.


bsWeldSide The bsWeldSide select list (codelist) specifies whether the weld is placed on both sides or just the side indicated by the arrow. This select list is in the HS_S3DParts_Codelists.xls workbook and belongs to the UDP namespace.


Cable Route Status The Cable Route Status select list (codelist) defines the available options for cable routing status. The software uses the status for reporting on cable.

This select list is used in the Electrical task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Cable Tray Component Class The Cable Tray Component Class select list (codelist) defines all of the cable tray component classes that you want to select from in the model.


You can change the textual values in this select list, but you must not change the numeric values or the meaning of the values; and you must not add or delete values.

Cable Tray Component Type The Cable Tray Component Type select list (codelist) defines all the cable tray component types that you want to select from in the model.





Cable Tray Materials The Cable Tray Materials select list (codelist) defines all cable tray materials that you want to select from in the model.


Cable Tray Part Data Basis The Cable Tray Part Data Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis of the dimensional data for cable tray parts. The purpose of this property is to recognize those components that require special treatment when interpreting the dimensional data.



Cable Tray Type The Cable Tray Type select list (codelist) defines all the cable tray types available to route in the model.


Cable Type The Cable Type select list (codelist) defines the applicable values for the cable type property, which is used when assigning values to cable runs for tray fill calculations.



Cap Screw Length Round Off Option The Cap Screw Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) specifies the available methods for bolt length round off in the cap screw length calculations.

Once the bolt length has been computed, the length of the cap screw must be rounded to a practical value.

The specification writer can choose to specify a simple round off, or no round off; or can choose to define the algorithm to round off the cap screw length on the basis of a list of the available purchased, or preferred, cap screw lengths, as a function of the cap screw diameter, and optionally, the materials grade of the cap screw.





Catalog Units of Measure Basis The Catalog Units of Measure Basis select list (codelist) defines the method of querying the piping catalog for units of measure. Refer to the Piping Commodity Filter topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Check Piping Mfg Priority Check Piping Mfg Priority defines the available piping manufacturing priorities in the software. The priorities are used in the check manufacturability process.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CheckPipingMfgPriority.

Check Piping Priority The Check Piping Priority select list (codelist) defines the piping priorities.

This select list is not currently used in the software. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Check Planning Priority Check Planning Priority defines the available planning priorities in the software. The priorities are used in the check manufacturability process.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CheckPlanningPriority.

Clamp Option The Clamp Option select list (codelist) specifies the list of available clamp selections enabled by the specification writer.

A default clamp option represents the clamp that should be used when the piping designer has not explicitly selected one. The clamp option, if applicable, is selected by the piping designer at a bolted joint.


Clamp Requirement The Clamp Requirement select list (codelist) specifies whether a reportable clamp is required or not.





Clamp Selection Basis The Clamp Selection Basis select list (codelist) defines the choices for clamp service limits validation.



Cleaning Requirement The Cleaning Requirement select list (codelist) defines all the possible cleaning requirements that you can choose from in the model.

This select list is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

Cleaning Responsibility The Cleaning Responsibility select list (codelist) defines all the parties available for cleaning responsibility.

This select list is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.

Coating Color The Coating Color select list (codelist) defines the available colors for a coating.


Coating Type The Coating Type select list (codelist) defines all coating requirements and types available in the model.


Collar Category The Collar Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for collars in the software.


Commodity Code Builder Option The Commodity Code Builder Option select list (codelist) defines options to designate whether the software provides assistance in selecting commodity codes when the specification writer creates or revises commodity code properties in piping specifications or the piping catalog. If this option has been enabled, the software provides the specification writer with the Commodity Code Builder.

This list also includes the option for automated creation of the industry commodity code in the piping commodity class data on the basis of property values and customizable formats.





Commodity Option The Commodity Option select list (codelist) defines the list of commodity selections available to the piping specification writer for a default commodity option. A default commodity option represents the piping commodity that the software uses when the piping designer has not explicitly selected a piping commodity. The default commodity option is also used when selecting a branch fitting, as a consequence of using the Branch Intersection rule. The commodity option is ignored in the automated selection of flanges.


Do not edit the Default record in this sheet.

You can change some of the textual values in this select list, but you must not change the numeric values or the meaning of the values; and you must not add or delete values.

The following examples show how to use commodity options:

Selecting a specific type of piping commodity for a generic short code. For example, selecting a pipe bend, when the default change-of-direction fitting is an elbow, or selecting a gate valve, when the default vent/drain valve is a ball valve

Selecting an optional nipple length for a branch nipple

Selecting an optional angular offset for a tapered spacer

Selecting an optional rating, for example, a 300# valve in a 150# piping materials class

Selecting an optional fitting for a different version of an industry standard or manufacturer catalog

Selecting an optional valve type for a specific valve

Selecting an optional valve operator type for a specific valve

Selecting an optional bend radius for an elbow or a pipe bend

Selecting a different number of miter cuts for a mitered elbow

Selecting an optional fitting with different end conditions than the default

Selecting an optional fitting with a different schedule (or thickness) than the default

Selecting an optional fitting with a different design code than the default

Selecting an optional fitting with a different manufacturer than the default

Selecting an optional choice for plain piping or tubing

Compart Coating Color Compart Coating Color defines the available coating colors for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingColor.



Compart Coating Process Compart Coating Process specifies the different coating processes for compartments. This select lists (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingProcess.

Compart Coating Responsibility Compart Coating Responsibility defines the list of responsible parties available for applying the coating to compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingResponsibility.

Compart Coating Status Compart Coating Status lists the different statuses for compartment coatings. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingStatus.

Compart Coating Type Compart Coating Type lists the types of coatings that you want to use for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartCoatingType.

Compartment Authorization Class Compartment Authorization Class specifies the levels of authorization for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentAuthorizationClass.

Compartment Bulk Cargo Type Compartment Bulk Cargo Type specifies the different types of bulk cargo for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentBulkCargoType.



Compartment Bulkhead Tightness Compartment Bulkhead Tightness specifies the levels of bulkhead tightness for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentBulkheadTightness.

Compartment Capacity Context Compartment Capacity Context specifies the levels of capacity for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCapacityContext.

Compartment Cargo Context Compartment Cargo Context specifies the levels of cargo context for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCargoContext.

Compartment Coating Applicability Compartment Coating Applicability specifies the coating applicability options for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCoatingApplicability.

Compartment Coating Certification Compartment Coating Certification specifies the levels of coating certification for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCoatingCertification.

Compartment Coating Inspection Compartment Coating Inspection specifies the coating inspection options for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCoatingInspection.



Compartment Compartment Group Compartment Compartment Group specifies the groups for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCompartmentGroup.

Compartment Compartment Type Compartment Compartment Type specifies the different types for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentCompartmentType.

Compartment Contact Material Type Compartment Contact Material Type specifies the types of contact materials for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentContactMaterialType.

Compartment Damage Location Compartment Damage Location specifies the damage locations for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentDamageLocation.

Compartment Damage Type Compartment Damage Type specifies the types of damage for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentDamageType.

Compartment Design Requirement Compartment Design Requirement specifies the design requirement options for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentDesignRequirement.



Compartment Function Type Compartment Function Type specifies the types of functions for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentFunctionType.

Compartment Insulation Category Compartment Insulation Category specifies the categories of insulation for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentInsulationCategory.

Compartment Naval Nuclear Class Compartment Naval Nuclear Class specifies the naval nuclear classes for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNavalNuclearClass.

Compartment Naval Safety Category Compartment Naval Safety Category specifies the categories of naval safety for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNavalSafetyCategory.

Compartment Naval Security Class Compartment Naval Security Class specifies the classes of naval security for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNavalSecurityClass.

Compartment Noise Category Compartment Noise Category specifies the categories of noise levels for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentNoiseCategory.



Compartment Positional Rel Type Compartment Positional Rel Type specifies the types of positional relationships for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentPositionalRelType.

Compartment Property Context Compartment Property Context specifies the property context options for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentPropertyContext.

Compartment Relevant Cargos Compartment Relevant Cargos specifies the relevant types of cargo for compartments. This codelist is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentRelevantCargor.

Compartment Structure Type Compartment Structure Type specifies the types of structure for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentStructureType.

Compartment Surface Preparation Compartment Surface Preparation specifies the different types of surface preparation for compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select CompartmentSurfacePreparation.

Conduit Selection Basis The Conduit Selection Basis select list (codelist) defines the conduits available for use in the model.





Connection Type The Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the types of connections available in the software.

This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.


Construction Type The Construction Type select list (codelist) defines the list of construction types available for use in the model.

Construction type is the same as construction status in PDS. The construction type property is used in rules in the specification, but its value is specified in the model.

This select list is used in multiple tasks and is also used in an integrated environment. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.

Control Point Subtype The Control Point Subtype select list (codelist) defines subtypes, or disciplines, for the control points.

This select list is used in the Common task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.

Numbers 1 through 6, and 10 through 19 are reserved for use by the software and should not be modified.

You can define numbers 20 through 31.

Control Point Type The Control Point Type select list (codelist) defines the different control points that you can place or edit in the model.

This select list is used in the Common task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.


Create Exclusive WBS Item The Create Exclusive WBS Item select list (codelist) is a Boolean (Yes/No) list that specifies whether or not a WBS item is exclusive.





Cross Section Cardinal Points The Cross Section Cardinal Points select list (codelist) defines the cardinal points for members in the model.

This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.


Cross Section Edges The Cross Section Edges select list (codelist) defines the edges for cross sections of members in the model.

This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Cross Section Shape Types The Cross Section Shape Types select list (codelist) defines the available duct cross section shapes.

This select list is used in the HVAC task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Deck Category The Deck Category select list (codelist) defines the available deck categories in the software.


Design Responsibility The Design Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for the design responsibility of an object.


Design Standard The Design Standard select list (codelist) defines the available design standards.

This select list is used in multiple tasks. For example, in the Piping task, the list is used in calculating piping wall thickness and branch reinforcements. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.




Door Frame Position The Door Frame Position select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the door frame position within the specified support.

This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Door Type The Door Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of doors available in the model.


Doors Windows Kinematics The Doors Windows Kinematics select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the motion of doors and windows.


Drawing Style Codelist The Drawing Style select list (codelist) defines the list of drawing types available for use in drawings.

This select list is used in the Drawings and Reports task.

Drilling Template Pattern The Drilling Template Pattern select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the arrangement of bolt holes at a bolted end. For pictures of common drilling patterns, see Bolt Hole Patterns (on page 105).


You can edit the delivered text of the short or long descriptions as long as you do not change the meaning. Do not change the numeric values of the delivered select list items. You cannot add or delete select list items. \

Eccentric Offset Basis The Eccentric Offset Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis on which the eccentric offset is computed for an eccentric reducer. The eccentric reducer symbol uses this property to determine whether the eccentric offset is based on the inside diameter or the outside diameter.





Edge Reinforcement Category The Edge Reinforcement Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for edge reinforcements in the software.


Elevation Plane Type The Elevation Plane Type select list (codelist) defines the elevation planes that you want to place in the model.

This select list is used in the Grids task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


EMI The EMI select list (codelist) defines the available electromagnetic interference types.



EMI Radiator The EMI Radiator select list (codelist) defines the available electromagnetic radiator values.



EMI Suceptor The EMI Suceptor select list (codelist) defines the available electromagnetic suceptor values.

This codelist is used in the Electrical task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


End Preparation The End Preparation select list (codelist) defines all end preparations available for modeling.





End Standard The End Standard select list (codelist) defines the list of end standards available for modeling.



Property Page Behavior

When you view this select list on Properties dialog boxes, the software only displays the practices that have child values. For example, only the parent End Practices with child values (End Standards) display.

Upon migration, if a parent has been previously selected (and this parent has no children), the software shows the following behavior. The first time you display the Properties dialog box and click the parent field, that parent value is discarded. The software does not allow you to re-select this parent, unless child values are added in the catalog.

Environmental Zone The Environmental Zone select list (codelist) defines the list of environmental zones for which outside coating type, outside surface treatment, and auxiliary treatment of piping and fittings apply.


Equipment Component Types The Equipment Component Types select list (codelist) defines the available types of equipment for use when designing equipment.

This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.

Some of the values in this select list should not be changed.

Equipment Types The Equipment Types select list (codelist) defines the available types of equipment for use in the model.

This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.

Some of the values in this select list should not be changed.



Examination The Examination select list (codelist) specifies the values representing the industry practices for examination, inspection, and testing. Refer to the Piping Materials Class Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Exterior Surface Treatment The Exterior Surface Treatment select list (codelist) defines the list of available exterior surface treatments in the model.


External Welded Pipe Part The External Welded Pipe Part select list (codelist) defines the list of available external welded pipe parts in the model.

This select list is used in the Hangers and Supports task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Fabrication Responsibility The Fabrication Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the parties that are responsible for fabricating objects.


Fabrication Type The Fabrication Type select list (codelist) defines the different fabrication requirements for objects in the model. In many cases, fabrication requirements and type can vary from project to project.





Fabrication Type Basis The Fabrication Type Basis select list (codelist) defines the available fabrication types in the software.



Feature Type The Feature Type select list (codelist) specifies the feature types that determine boundaries during fitting placement.



Fireproofing Exposure Type The Fireproofing Exposure Type select list (codelist) defines the types of fireproofing exposure for members in the model.


Fireproofing Method The Fireproofing Method select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing methods for members in the model.


Fireproofing Type The Fireproofing Type select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing types for members in the model.


Flange Category The Flange Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for flanges in the software.




Flange Face Surface Finish The Flange Face Surface Finish select list (codelist) specifies the surface finishes for the flange faces of piping commodities. Surface finish is a measure of the smoothness of a flange face.


Flange Facing The Flange Facing select list (codelist) specifies the different flange facing values for gaskets.


Flange Insulation Kit Type The Flange Insulation Kit Type select list (codelist) specifies the values that represent the type of flange insulation kit. This value is only required when the gasket represents a flange insulation kit.

The Flange Insulation Kit Type value is used to determine the additional bolt length required due to the insulating washer(s) and the metallic electro-plated washer(s).



Flip Component The Flip Component select list (codelist) specifies whether an object is on the bottom left or on the top right.



Flow Direction The Flow Direction select list (codelist) defines the available flow directions for runs in the model. Flow direction is used in the model when users place flow-directional components, such as check valves.





Fluid Code The Fluid Code select list (codelist) defines the fluid systems and fluid codes available for use in the model.


Front End Type The Front End Type select list (codelist) specifies the front end types for heat exchanger equipment.

This select list is used in the Equipment task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Gasket Inside Diameter Basis The Gasket Inside Diameter Basis select list (codelist) represents the basis values for computing the inside diameter of gaskets. Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Gasket Option The Gasket Option select list (codelist) defines the gaskets available for use in the model.


Gasket Outside Diameter Basis The Gasket Outside Diameter Basis select list (codelist) represents the basis values for computing the outside diameter of gaskets. Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Gasket Requirement Override The Gasket Requirement Override select list (codelist) provides options that enable the specification writer to define whether gaskets are required for lined, flanged fittings. In effect, this property represents an override of the Gasket Requirement property in the Catalog.





Gasket Requirements The Gasket Requirements select list (codelist) defines the list of gasket requirements available for use in the model.



Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code The Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code select list (codelist) specifies the options for gasket selection based on fluid code.

This list is intended to address a situation where a piping spec is applicable to 15-20 different values of fluid code. Most of the fluid code values applicable to this piping spec use the default gasket. However, a few fluid code values require special gaskets. The intent of this select list is to avoid the situation where the spec writer must create gasket records for each fluid code.



Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted Ends Option The Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted Ends Option select list (codelist) specifies the options for gasket selection based on bolted ends.



Gasket Style Number The Gasket Style Number select list (codelist) specifies the gasket manufacturers and gasket style numbers.



Gasket Type The Gasket Type select list (codelist) defines the gasket categories and types available for use in the model. Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.




Geometric Industry Standard The Geometric Industry Standard select list (codelist) defines the source, normally either an industry standard or a manufacturer, used in the preparation of the catalog data applicable to the piping commodity.



Two cases for geometric industry standards exist:

The piping commodity is of a type, size, or function such that its dimensions are governed by an industry standard. Many fittings and certain sizes of some valves fall into this category. In this case, the geometric industry standard specifies the governing standard.

The piping commodity is of a type, size, or function such that its dimensions are manufacturer-specific, and, therefore, are not controlled by any industry standard. Many smaller-sized fittings and valves fall into this category. This situation has two additional possibilities.

Precise dimensions are not critical. A company-specific engineering standard may be created for the piping commodity type that enables a standard catalog definition in order to permit modeling in those situations where the precise dimensions of the piping commodity are not critical. This situation is practical when the piping system in question is field-routed and fabricated. It is not practical in situations where space tolerances are extremely critical, or when the piping is to be shop-fabricated. In these cases, the geometric industry standard must reflect the engineering standard.

Precise dimensions are critical. In this case, the geometric industry standard must eventually reflect the manufacturer of the piping commodity.

The geometric industry standard distinguishes between versions of an industry standard or manufacturer data. In other words, version 'a' of a specific industry standard is different from version 'b' of the same industry standard by two distinct values of the geometric industry standard. When a model is revamped, it is possible that the dimensional data for some fittings will have changed between the existing, or as-built, data and the most recent dimensional data. In some situations, it will be necessary for the piping designer to model an older version of a fitting in the same model, where the newer version of the fitting is modeled.



Geometry Type The Geometry Type select list (codelist) defines the geometric characteristics and the topology of the piping ports for piping parts. You must specify the correct geometry type so that the software knows how to handle the item when placing it in the model.

This select list is used in the reference data for the Piping task when defining piping instruments and specialty item parts. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace. You can use this list to map the Component Geometry to Route Feature Type.


Number Short Description

Long Description

Route Feature Type

Picture of a Typical Component

Description Placement Restrictions

5 Variable length pipe stock or tubing

Plain piping or tubing variable length

SF

This value applies to pipe stock or tubing, where the length is not constrained by a purchase length.

10 Fixed length pipe stock or tubing

Plain piping or tubing fixed length

SF

This value applies to pipe stock or tubing, where the length is constrained by a purchase length.




Long Description

Route Feature Type



11 Variable length integral core and jacket piping

Integral core and jacket piping Variable length

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to pipe stock, which represents a jacket integral with the core, where the length is not constrained by a purchase length.

Can be placed in a straight or on an end port.

15 Linear, full-size

Linear, full size

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any fitting or valve, where the ports are colinear and of equal size, for example, a gate valve or a flange.


16 Linear, with size change

Linear, with size change

ALF_RUNCHANGE

This value applies to any fitting or valve, where the ports are colinear, but the sizes differ, for example, a concentric reducer or concentric swage.


20 Elbow, fixed angle

Elbow, fixed angle (including angle valves)

DC_ELBOW

This value applies to any full-size change-of-direction fitting, where the bend angle is constant,

Can only be placed at an end port.




Long Description

Route Feature Type



that is, the elbow cannot be trimmed, for example a flanged elbow.

25 Elbow, fixed / trimmable angle

Elbow, trimmable

DC_ELBOW

This value applies to any full-size change-of-direction fitting, where the elbow can be trimmed.


30 Elbow, side outlet

Elbow, side outlet

DC_ELBOW

This value applies to any full-size change-of-direction fitting with a side outlet.


35 Elbow, radial outlet

Elbow, radial outlet

DC_ELBOW

This value applies to any full-size change-of-direction fitting with a radial outlet.


36 Elbow, reducing

Elbow, reducing

DC_REDUCINGELBOW

This value applies to any reducing change-of-direction fitting.


37 Elbow, gooseneck

Elbow, gooseneck

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any full-size gooseneck fitting, for example, a standpipe





Long Description

Route Feature Type



gooseneck.

40 Return Return ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any 180° return fitting.


45 Return, bottom outlet

Return, bottom outlet

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any 180° return fitting with a bottom outlet, for example, a biological-pharmaceutical use point with a bottom outlet.


50 Return, side outlet

Return, side outlet

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any 180° return fitting with a side outlet, for example, a biological-pharmaceutical use point with a side outlet.


55 Pipe bend Pipe bend DC_BEND





Long Description

Route Feature Type



60 Mitered elbow (pre-fabricated part to be purchased)

Miter DC_MITER

This value applies to any pre-fabricated, mitered, change-of-direction fitting.


65 Eccentric, with size change

Eccentric size change

ALF_RUNCHANGE

This value applies to any fitting or valve, where the inline ports are offset, but the sizes differ, for example, an eccentric reducer or eccentric swage.


66 Eccentric, full size

Eccentric, full size

ALF_RUNCHANGE

This value applies to any fitting or valve, where the inline ports are offset and of equal size, for example an expansion joint with an offset.


70

Concentric size change

ALF_RUNCHANGE

This value applies to any fitting or valve, where the ports are colinear, but the sizes differ, for example, a concentric reducer or concentric





Long Description

Route Feature Type



swage.

75 Tee, full size (including 3-way valves)

Tee, full size (including 3-way valves)

BP_HEADER

This value applies to any full-size tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve.


80 Tee, reducing branch

Tee, reducing branch

BP_HEADER

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with a reducing branch.


85 Tee, eccentric reducing branch

Tee, eccentric reducing branch

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with an eccentric reducing branch.


90 Tee, reducing run and branch

Tee, reducing run and branch

BP_HEADER

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with a reducing run and a reducing branch.





Long Description

Route Feature Type



95 Tee, reducing runs

Tee, reducing runs

BP_HEADER

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with two reducing run legs, for example, a bullhead tee.


100 Tee with offset, full size

Tee with offset, full size

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any full-size tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with an offset.


105 Tee with offset, reducing branch

Tee with offset, reducing branch

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with an offset and a reducing branch.


110 Tee with offset, reducing run and branch

Tee with offset, reducing run and branch

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with an offset, a reducing run, and a reducing branch.





Long Description

Route Feature Type



115 Tee with offset, reducing runs

Tee with offset, reducing runs

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with an offset and two reducing runs.


120 Tee with double offset, full size

Tee with double offset, full size

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any full-size tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with a double offset.


125 Tee with double offset, reducing branch

Tee with double offset, reducing branch

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with a double offset and a reducing branch.


130 Tee with double offset, reducing run and branch

Tee with double offset, reducing run and branch

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with a double offset, a reducing run, and a reducing branch.





Long Description

Route Feature Type



135 Tee with double offset, reducing runs

Tee with double offset, reducing runs

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with a double offset and two reducing runs.


140 Tee, non-symmetrical

Tee, non-symmetrical

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any tee-type branch fitting or 3-way valve with non-symmetrical runs.


145 Cross, full size (including 4-way valves)

Cross, full size (including 4-way valves)

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any full-size cross-type branch fitting or 4-way valve.


150 Cross, reducing branches

Cross, reducing branches

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any cross-type branch fitting or 4-way valve with two reducing branches.


155 Cross, reducing run and one branch

Cross, reducing run and one branch

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any cross-type branch fitting or 4-way valve





Long Description

Route Feature Type



with a reducing run and a reducing branch.

160 Cross, reducing run and two branches

Cross, reducing run and two branches

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any cross-type branch fitting or 4-way valve with a reducing run and two reducing branches.


165 Lateral, full-size

Lateral, full size

BP_HEADER

This value applies to any full-size lateral-type branch fitting or valve.


170 Lateral, reducing branch

Lateral, reducing branch

BP_HEADER

This value applies to any lateral-type branch fitting or valve with a reducing branch.


175 Lateral, reducing run and branch

Lateral, reducing run and branch

BP_HEADER

This value applies to any lateral-type branch fitting or valve with a reducing run and a reducing branch.


180 Lateral reducing

Lateral reducing

BP_HEADER

This value applies to

Can be placed in a




Long Description

Route Feature Type



runs runs any lateral-type branch fitting or valve with two reducing runs.

straight or on an end port.

185 Olet-type branch, fixed angle

Olet-type branch, fixed angle

BF_BRANCH

This value applies to any olet-type branch fitting, where the branch angle is constant, that is, the olet-type branch cannot be trimmed.

Can only be placed on a straight.

186 Olet-type branch, variable angle

Olet-type branch, variable angle

BF_BRANCH

This value applies to any olet-type branch fitting, where the olet-type branch can be trimmed.


187 Olet-type branch, double outlet

Olet-type branch, double outlet

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any olet-type branch fitting with two outlets.


190 Latrolet®-type branch

Latrolet®-type branch

BF_BRANCH

This value applies to any olet-type branch fitting, where the acute branch angle is less than 90°.





Long Description

Route Feature Type



195 Non-radial branch

Non-radial branch

BF_BRANCH

This value applies to any olet-type branch fitting, where the branch centerline is offset from the header centerline.


200 Endolet-type branch (Flatolet)

Endolet-type branch

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any olet-type branch fitting that, due to the branch size being so small and the run size so large, the branch fitting is basically flat on the bottom.


205 Elbolet Elbolet ALF_RUNCHANGE

This value applies to any elbolet-type branch fitting, where the elbolet fitting is used to branch from a change-of-direction fitting.





Long Description

Route Feature Type



210 True Y-type branch

True Y-type branch

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any wye-type branch fitting or valve.


215 Double Y-type branch

Double Y-type branch

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any double wye-type branch fitting or valve.


220 Closing fitting (including instrument indicators and instrument transmitters)

Closing (including instrument indicators)

EF_ENDFEATURE

This value applies to any closing fitting, for example, a cap, a plug, a blind flange, an instrument indicator, or an instrument transmitter. By definition, a closing fitting has one port.


225 Orifice flange

Orifice flange

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any flange with three or more ports.


230 Multi-port valve

Multi-port valve

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any multiport valve.


235 Surface-mo Surface-mo SMC_F

This value Can only be




Long Description

Route Feature Type



unted unted EATURE

applies to any surface-mounted fitting other than a wall penetration fitting, for example a centering flange or a surface-mounted instrument.

placed on a straight.

240 Tandem valve, horizontal main at drain angle with vertical tandem

Tandem valve, horizontal main at drain angle with vertical tandem

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any sanitary or aseptic tandem valve, where the drainage geometry is described in this manner.


245 Tandem valve, horizontal main with vertical tandem

Tandem valve, horizontal main with vertical tandem

ALF_COMPONENT



250 Tandem valve, vertical main with tandem at drain angle

Tandem valve, vertical main with tandem at drain angle

ALF_COMPONENT



255 Tandem valve, horizontal

Tandem valve, horizontal

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any sanitary

Can be placed in a straight or on




Long Description

Route Feature Type



main with tandem at drain angle

main with tandem at drain angle

or aseptic tandem valve, where the drainage geometry is described in this manner.

an end port.

256 Angle valve Angle valve ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any full-size, change-of-direction valve.


257 Angle valve, reducing

Angle valve, reducing

DC_REDUCINGELBOW

This value applies to any reducing, change-of-direction valve.


260 Valve fitting/assembly, horizontal valve with vertical fitting access

Valve/fitting assembly, horizontal main at drain angle with vertical access on primary side of center

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any sanitary or aseptic access valve with an access fitting assembly, where the drainage geometry is described in this manner.





Long Description

Route Feature Type



265 Valve fitting/assembly, horizontal valve at drain angle with vertical fitting access

Valve/fitting assembly, horizontal main at drain angle with vertical access on secondary side of center

ALF_ENDLEG



270 Valve fitting/assembly, horizontal valve at drain angle with horizontal fitting access

Valve/fitting assembly, horizontal main at drain angle with horizontal access at drain angle

ALF_ENDLEG



275 Valve fitting/assembly, vertical valve with horizontal fitting access

Valve/fitting assembly, vertical main with horizontal access at drain angle below main center

ALF_ENDLEG






Long Description

Route Feature Type



280 Valve/fitting assembly, vertical main with horizontal access at drain angle below main center and 45° from assembly center

Valve/fitting assembly, vertical main with horizontal access at drain angle below main center and 45° from assembly center

ALF_ENDLEG



285 Valve/fitting assembly, vertical main with horizontal access at drain angle above main center

Valve/fitting assembly, vertical main with horizontal access at drain angle above main center

ALF_ENDLEG



290 Valve/fitting assembly, vertical main with horizontal access at drain angle above main center and 45° from assembly center

Valve/fitting assembly, vertical main with horizontal access at drain angle above main center and 45° from assembly center

ALF_ENDLEG






Long Description

Route Feature Type



295 Lift check valve, horizontal orientation only

Lift check valve, horizontal orientation only

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any flow-dependent valve, where the valve can only be installed in a horizontal pipe run.


300 Lift check valve, vertical orientation only

Lift check valve, vertical orientation only

ALF_COMPONENT

This value applies to any flow-dependent valve, where the valve can only be installed in a vertical pipe run.


305

Fitting with multiple branches, e.g. bleed ring or drip ring tree

ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any circular fitting with multiple branches, for example, bleed ring or drip ring tee.


310 Wall penetration fitting

Wall penetration fitting

SMC_FEATURE

This value applies to any surface-mounted fitting, for example, a penetration sleeve, where the fitting is to be aligned with a hole in a wall or other structure.





Long Description

Route Feature Type



315 Clamp-on fitting

Clamp-on fitting

SMC_FEATURE

This value applies to any clamp-on fitting, for example, a clamp-on saddle or a clamp-on flow sensor.


500 Generic Generic ALF_ENDLEG

This value applies to any other fitting.


Grid Plane Type The Grid Plane Type select list (codelist) defines the grid planes available for use in the model.

This select list is used in the Grids task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Hand Wheel Orientation The Hand Wheel Orientation select list (codelist) defines the rotation angles available for instrument hand wheels.


Handrail Connection Type The Handrail Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the connection types for handrails.



Handrail End Treatment The Handrail End Treatment select list (codelist) defines the end treatments for handrails.





Handrail Inline Connection Type The Handrail Inline Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the inline connection types available for handrails.


Handrail Offset The Handrail Offset select list (codelist) defines the offset for handrails in the model.



Handrail Orientation The Handrail Orientation select list (codelist) defines the orientation of handrails.



Handrail Side Connection Type The Handrail Side Connection Type select list (codelist) defines the side connections available for handrails.



Hazardous Fluid Category The Hazardous Fluid Category select list (codelist) defines the different hazardous fluid services available for use in the model.

This codelist is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Header Branch Size Basis Option The Header Branch Size Basis Option select list (codelist) enables the specification writer to designate whether the Header Size and Branch values for the Branch Intersection Rule are determined automatically based on the size ranges for the pipe stock and branch nipples in the piping commodity filter, or based on the sizes in the Permissible Nominal Piping Diameters Rule for the applicable piping materials class.





Heat Tracing Medium The Heat Tracing Medium select list (codelist) defines heat tracing requirements, types, and media available for use in the model.



HngSup Associated Part Type The HngSup Associated Part Type select list (codelist) specifies the available associated part types for hangers and supports.



HngSup Association Type The HngSup Association Type select list (codelist) specifies the available association types for hangers and supports.



HngSup BOM Type The HngSup BOM Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of bills of materials (BOM).



HngSup Bounding Box Type The HngSup Bounding Box Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of bounding boxes.

This select list is used in the Hangers and Supports task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.



HngSup Class Node Type The HngSup Class Node Type select list (codelist) specifies the available hangers and supports classification nodes.


HngSup Command The HngSup Command select list (codelist) specifies the available types of commands for the hangers and supports part classes.

This select list is used in the Hangers and Supports task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.


HngSup Connect Obj The HngSup Connect Obj select list (codelist) specifies the hangers and supports connectable object types.



HngSup Connection Type The HngSup Connection Type select list (codelist) specifies the available connection types for hangers and supports.



HngSup Cut Type The HngSup Cut Type select list (codelist) specifies the available cut types for hangers and supports.





HngSup Discipline The HngSup Discipline select list (codelist) specifies the available disciplines for the hangers and supports part classes.



HngSup ET Type The HngSup ET Type select list (codelist) specifies the available end treatments for hangers and supports.



HngSup Face Selection Type The HngSup Face Selection Type select list (codelist) defines the faces available for selection.


HngSup Joint Type The HngSup Joint Type select list (codelist) specifies the available joint types for hangers and supports joints.



HngSup Manufacturer The HngSup Manufacturer select list (codelist) specifies the available hangers and supports manufacturers.




HngSup Mating Joint Type The HngSup Mating Joint Type select list (codelist) defines the mating types available at joints, specifically symbol ports for support parts.


HngSup Part Class Type The HngSup Part Class Type select list (codelist) defines a list of part class types for hangers and supports. Part class types for other disciplines are listed in the Part Class Types select list.


HngSup Physical Connection The HngSup Physical Connection select list (codelist) defines the physical connection types for hangers and supports component ports.



HngSup Port Category The HngSup Port Category select list (codelist) defines symbol port categories.



HngSup Port Type The HngSup Port Type select list (codelist) defines symbol port types.





HngSup Rule Type The HngSup Rule Type select list (codelist) specifies types of rules.



HngSup Strict Face Selection The HngSup Strict Face Selection select list (codelist) specifies whether or not to force strict face selection during placement of hangers and supports.



HngSup Support Type The HngSup Support Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types and disciplines of supports.



HngSup Type Selection Rule The HngSup Type Selection Rule select list (codelist) specifies the values describing the locations of supports relative to routed objects.



HVAC Component Types The HVAC Component Types select list (codelist) specifies duct component types.





HVAC Lining Material The HVAC Lining Material select list (codelist) specifies the lining requirements and materials for duct.



HVAC Part Data Basis The HVAC Part Data Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis of the dimensional data for HVAC parts. The purpose of this property is to recognize those components that require special treatment when interpreting the dimensional data.



HVAC Part Generation Basis The HVAC Part Generation Basis select list (codelist) specifies whether to enable breaks on feature boundaries for HVAC systems.



HVAC Width and Depth Basis The HVAC Width and Depth Basis select list (codelist) provides options for the width and depth dimensions of HVAC.



Icarus Column Base Option The Icarus Column Base Option select list (codelist) specifies the types of connections at column bases.

This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Icarus is a cost-estimation software package.



Icarus Concrete Type The Icarus Concrete Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of concrete.



Icarus Exclude End Bent The Icarus Exclude End Bent select list (codelist) specifies options for exclusion of end bents.



Icarus Grating Type The Icarus Grating Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of gratings.



Icarus Pipe Rack Type The Icarus Pipe Rack Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of pipe racks.



Icarus Struct Steel Analysis The Icarus Struct Steel Analysis select list (codelist) specifies the types of stress analysis.



Icarus Third Column The Icarus Third Column select list (codelist) specifies third column options.



IFCAspectCodeValue The IFC Aspect Code Value select list (codelist) defines the interference checking priority for aspects.

This select list is used in the interference checking process. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.




IFC Process Status The IFC Process Status select list (codelist) defines the status of the interference process on the server.



IFC Required Action The IFC Required Action select list (codelist) defines the actions that users can take regarding interferences. For example, one action is to ignore the interference.



IFC Type The IFC Type select list (codelist) defines the different types of interferences that appear.



Ignore Boundaries The Ignore Boundaries select list (codelist) is a Boolean (Yes/No) list that specifies whether or not the software searches beyond boundaries to find intrinsic breaks during WBS item creation.



Industry Commodity Code Option The Industry Commodity Code Option select list (codelist) defines options for commodity codes. Refer to the Default Project Options Sheet topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.





Inlet Port Geometry Type The Inlet Port Geometry Type select list (codelist) defines options for the inlet port geometry on diverter valves.


Installation Responsibility The Installation Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for installation responsibility.


Instrument Functional Type The Instrument Functional Type select list (codelist) defines the different types of instruments available in the model.



Insulation Material The Insulation Material select list (codelist) defines all the insulation materials available for use in the model.


Insulation Purpose The Insulation Purpose select list (codelist) defines all the insulation purposes available for use in the model.

This select list is used in multiple tasks. This list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.


Insulation Temperature Basis The Insulation Temperature Basis select list (codelist) defines options for temperature basis. This information is used during insulation design. For example, the basis can be the normal operating temperature.





Insulation Thickness Basis The Insulation Thickness Basis select list (codelist) defines all the insulation thicknesses available for use in the model.

This select list is used in multiple tasks. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs The IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs select list (codelist) defines database integrity messages.


IntelliShip Msgs The IntelliShip Msgs select list (codelist) defines the messages for the To Do List in the software.


Interior Surface Treatment The Interior Surface Treatment select list (codelist) defines the interior surface treatments available for use in the model.


Is Bend Planar The Is Bend Planar select list (codelist) specifies the options for whether or not the centerline of a pipe bend configuration lies within a single plane.

The following picture shows a non-planar pipe bend configuration.





Jacketed Closure Method The Jacketed Closure Method select list (codelist) defines the methods by which the end of jacketed pipe is closed.



Jacketed Piping Basis The Jacketed Piping Basis select list (codelist) specifies whether a piping commodity applies to the core piping or the jacketed piping.



Lining Material The Lining Material select list (codelist) defines the lining materials available for a piping commodity. Some examples of lining materials are concrete, epoxy, rubber, and plastic. Refer to the Piping Materials Class Data Sheet topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.

The lining material select list has a dependent property called lining requirements that identifies whether a specific value of the lining material is interpreted as lined or not lined.



Load Case Liquid Pressure Load Case Liquid Pressure specifies liquid pressure ratings for load cases on compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select LoadCasLiquidPressure.

Load Case Sea Pressure Load Case Sea Pressure specifies sea pressure ratings for load cases on compartments. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select LoadCaseSeaPressure.



Load Span Classification The Load Span Classification select list (codelist) defines the load span classification standards for raceway.



Longitudinal Beam Category The Longitudinal Beam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for longitudinal beams in the software.


Longitudinal Bulkhead Category The Longitudinal Bulkhead Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for longitudinal bulkheads in the software.


Longitudinal Profile Category The Longitudinal Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for longitudinal profiles in the software.


Longitudinal Seam Category The Longitudinal Seam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for longitudinal seams in the software.


Longitudinal Tube Category The Longitudinal Tube Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for longitudinal tubes in the software.


Loose Material Requirements The Loose Material Requirements select list (codelist) defines the options for any loose material created with a piping commodity, even though the loose material is supplied by the vendor. In some situations, it is necessary to track such loose material for construction purposes, although the loose material is not managed by the material control system.




Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option The Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) specifies the available methods for machine bolt length round-off in machine bolt length calculations.

Once the bolt length has been computed, the length of the machine bolt must be rounded to a practical value.

The specification writer can choose to specify a simple round off to be applied, or no round off; or can choose to define the algorithm to round off the machine bolt length on the basis of a list of the available purchased, or preferred, machine bolt lengths, as a function of the machine bolt diameter, and optionally the materials grade of the machine bolt.



Manufacturer The Manufacturer select list (codelist) defines the list of manufacturers of piping commodities. The manufacturers are grouped into categories of industry practices.

Specifically, this select list is intended to be used when the geometric industry standard identifies the industry standard, but the specification writer is required to track the manufacturer for reporting purposes. Typically, this value is imported from a material control system, if required.



Manufacturing Method The Manufacturing Method select list (codelist) specifies the method of manufacturing for plain piping and nipples.


Map Type The Map Type select list (codelist) defines the type of symbol mapping for isometric drawings.

This select list is used in the Drawings and Reports task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.



Material Description Builder Option The Material Description Builder Option select list (codelist) specifies the options that specify whether material descriptions are created automatically for piping commodities, stock piping specialties, and stock instruments on the basis of embedded labels.

This option is only applicable when the Commodity Code Builder option has been enabled.



Materials Grade The Materials Grade select list (codelist) defines the many different grades of materials that you plan to use in your model.



Materials of Construction Class The Materials of Construction Class select list (codelist) defines the different classes of piping materials.

The materials of construction class property is not the same as the materials grade property. The materials grade is specific to each fitting within a piping materials class. As an example, forged fittings have a different materials grade than welded fittings.

The materials of construction class select list is intended for grouping similar piping materials classes for the benefit of the specification writer in managing piping specifications. As an example, consider three piping specifications, which all use carbon steel ASTM-A106B and ASTM-A53-B pipe; all are the same pressure class, CL150; and all use trim 8 valves. However, the fluid service designation and the service limits vary among these piping materials classes.


Materials Type The Materials Type select list (codelist) defines the many different groups and types of materials that you plan to use in your model.





Member Fireproofing Application Method The Member Fireproofing Application Method select list (codelist) defines the methods that are available to apply fireproofing to an object.

This select list is used by the Structure task and belongs to the UDP name space.

Member Fireproofing Application Type The Member Fireproofing Application Type select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing type to apply to the object (contour fully encased, contour flange exposed, and so forth).


Member Fireproofing Exposure Type The Member Fireproofing Exposure Type select list (codelist) defines the fireproofing exposure type (exterior or interior).


Member Orientation The Member Orientation select list (codelist) specifies the default direction in the global coordinate system for the local z-axis of the structural section.

The only entry in this select list that is used is the ZX-axis rule. This rule is described as follows: The local z-axis of the member is parallel to the global Z-axis by default. However, if you rotate the member such that the local x-axis of the member (along the member line) becomes parallel to the global Z-axis, then the software switches the local z-axis of the member to be parallel to the positive global X-axis.



Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction The Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction select list (codelist) specifies rules for providing jackets for pipe couplings and other connections. Refer to the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on the default piping commodity selection rule.





Methods of Trimming The Methods of Trimming select list (codelist) specifies rules for trimming piping branches and other connections. For example, it might be necessary to trim the welded end of a flange at a nozzle in order to align with a sloped run of plain piping. Refer to the Port Alignment topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option The Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option sheet defines values that provide the specification writer with the ability to specify both standard and non-standard minimum bend-to-bend tangent lengths for each type of pipe bend configuration.

The specification writer can provide standard minimum tangent lengths and any number of alternate minimum tangent lengths, similar to the Commodity Option in the piping commodity filter. In other words, alternate minimum tangent lengths are possible on the same bending machine.


Mirror Behavior Option The Mirror Behavior Option select list (codelist) defines available mirroring options for objects in the model.

The mirror behavior options include the following values.

The component can be mirrored.

The component cannot be mirrored or rotated but can be copied and translated.

The component is asymmetrical, and mirroring results in an orientation of the component that is not representative of that component type. However, a 180 degree rotation results in the component's connection points remaining aligned with the adjacent routing. In this situation, the software rotates the component by 180 degrees.

The component is asymmetrical, and mirroring results in an orientation of the component that is not representative of that component type. However, in this situation, the component is replaced by one with the appropriate orientation.





Misc Requisition Classification The Misc Requisition Classification select list (codelist) organizes piping commodities in a meaningful way for the purposes of requisitioning.



Multiport Valve Op Req The Multiport Valve Op Req select list (codelist) specifies the options for whether or not multiport valve operators are required for a valve body.



Note Purpose The Note Purpose select list (codelist) defines the different types of notes for objects in the model.


Nozzle Entrance Type The Nozzle Entrance Type select list (codelist) defines the choices for types of nozzle entrances. For example, the type can be radial or axial.

This select list is used in the Piping task and is also used in an integrated environment. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Nozzle Flange Type The Nozzle Flange Type select list (codelist) defines the types for nozzle flanges.


Nozzle Function The Nozzle Function select list (codelist) defines the different functions possible for nozzles.




Nut Creation Option The Nut Creation Option select list (codelist) defines the options for nut creation.

By default, the software creates nuts at a bolted joint. The specification writer can disable nut creation when nuts are not tracked for material management purposes.

Even if this option is disabled, the specification writer can still use the nut height for the bolt length calculation if the nut selection filter and accompanying nut part data are defined in the catalog.

In other words, the nut selection filter, and the accompanying nut part data, may be used for bolt length calculations, even when this option has been disabled. In this situation, the nut height, as well as the bolt extension, will be included in the bolt length calculation, although the bolt extension will be expected to not consider the nut height.



Nut Option The Nut Option select list (codelist) specifies the optional nut selections that can be enabled by the specification writer.

A default nut option represents the nut that should be used when the piping designer has not explicitly selected one. The nut option, if applicable, is selected by the piping designer at a bolted joint.


Nut Type The Nut Type select list (codelist) defines the list of nuts available for use in the model.


Open or Blind Spacer Install State The Open or Blind Spacer Install State select list (codelist) shows whether the open spacer or the blind spacer has been installed.

This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the REFDATA namespace.


Opening Category The Opening Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for openings in the software.




Orifice Flange Tap Orientation The Orifice Flange Tap Orientation select list (codelist) defines the locations available for the placement of taps.

The piping specification writer must specify whether the two taps are oriented 180 degrees apart on the outside diameter of the flange or 90 degrees apart. This select list defines those options.


Outlet Port Geometry Type The Outlet Port Geometry Type select list (codelist) defines options for the outlet port geometry on diverter valves.


Painting Responsibility The Painting Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for doing painting work.


Part Class Types The Part Class Types select list (codelist) defines the available part classes in the software.

When you define a part class in a reference data workbook, you type the name of a part class type in the Definition section on each part class sheet.


Do not edit the text under Specific Part Class. However, you may edit the text under Generic Part Class.

Part Data Basis The Part Data Basis select list (codelist) specifies the values for the basis of the dimensional data defined in piping commodity part data. The purpose of this property is to recognize those components that require special treatment when interpreting the dimensional data.

For example, the symbols for linear fittings and valves are designed on the basis of a face-to-face dimension. However, if the manufacturer provides the face-to-center dimension, the symbol can be designed to react accordingly on the basis of this property.





Part Data Source The Part Data Source select list (codelist) specifies the source of the part data in the piping catalog. If a value has not been specified, the source of the data is assumed to be the piping commodity class data. For example, you can specify that certain data, such as gasket type and gasket material, reside in the gasket part data.

This property provides the means to recognize that a reportable piping commodity is not a generic piping commodity, but might be a gasket, a bolt, or a cap screw. For example, a clamp typically implies that a gasket is included as a reportable piping commodity.



Pipe Bend Radius By User Option The Pipe Bend Radius By User Option select list (codelist) is used to specify whether piping designers can override the pipe bend radius in the piping specification. Refer to the Default Project Options topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option The Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier select list (codelist) defines the options for determining the absolute bend radius value. The absolute bend radius can be the product of the nominal piping diameter and the pipe bend radius multiplier, or as the product of the outside diameter and the pipe bend radius multiplier, or as a rule based on the nominal piping diameter and the pipe bend radius multiplier.



Pipe Bend Type The Pipe Bend Type select list (codelist) defines the different types of pipe bend configurations.


Pipe Bending Machine Type The Pipe Bending Machine Type select list (codelist) specifies the different types of bending machines.




Pipe Stock Usage The Pipe Stock Usage select list (codelist) specifies the uses for pipe stock.



Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number Basis Option The Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number Basis Option select list (codelist) defines the options for defining a piping commodity catalog part number.



Piping Commodity Override Option The Piping Commodity Override Option select list (codelist) defines the options for piping commodity overrides in a piping material class.



Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option The Piping Commodity Procurement Data Option select list (codelist) defines options for the piping commodity procurement data. The data can be based on the contractor commodity code or the industry commodity code.





Piping Commodity Type The Piping Commodity Type select list (codelist) is used to create the hierarchy in the Catalog task.

This select list is used in the Piping task and in the Catalog task for the piping parts hierarchy. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

You can change some of the textual values in this select list, but you must not change the numeric values or the meaning of the values; and you must not add or delete values.

The following list documents the required usage of selected values of the Piping Component Subclass property.

Piping Component Subclass Value and Purpose

Stub Ends Bolt Length Calculations - Used to determine whether lap thickness is to be considered.

Lap Joint Flanges Bolt Length Calculations - Used to determine whether lap thickness is to be considered.

Flared Pipe Rule - Used to determine whether the pipe stock is to be flared.

Unions – Used to determine the extents of spool breaks.

Slip-on Flanges - Used to determine the applicability of the Slip-on Flange Setback Distance Rule.

Reducing Slip-on Flanges - Used to determine the applicability of the Slip-on Flange Setback Distance Rule.

Plate Flanges Plate Flange Setback Distance Rule - Used to determine the applicability of this rule.

Reducing Plate Flanges Plate Flange Setback Distance Rule - Used to determine the applicability of this rule.

Orifice Flanges - Automated flange selection.

Blind Flanges - Automated flange selection.

Reinforcing Pads - Verification of Branch Intersection rule.

Hose Accessories Verification of the piping commodity part data – Used to determine whether a value is required for Water Weight.

The value of 'Accessories' for the Piping Component Class property is also used in the verification of the piping commodity part data to determine whether a value is required for Water Weight.



Catalog Parts Hierarchy

This sheet defines the Piping > Parts hierarchy in the Catalog task. The Piping Commodity Class Short Descriptions (column B) defines the first level of nodes under the Parts node. The Piping Commodity Sub Class Short Description (column D) defines the next level in the hierarchy. The Piping Commodity Type Short Description (column F) defines the final level before the parts are listed.

Piping Point Usage The Piping Point Usage select list (codelist) defines the piping point basis for objects in the model.



Piping Spec Status The Piping Spec Status select list (codelist) lists the different statuses for a piping materials class. Refer to the Piping Materials Class Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.


Piping Spec Version Management Option The Piping Spec Version Management Option select list (codelist) defines the options for the versioning of piping specifications.




Piping Specification Notes Option The Piping Specification Notes Option select list (codelist) defines the options that designate whether piping specification notes display as the numeric value or as the textual value.



Plane Of Flip The Plane Of Flip select list (codelist) specifies that the rotation axis is parallel to depth.



Plane of Turn The Plane of Turn select list (codelist) defines the options for rotating HVAC turn components.

This select list is used in the HVAC task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Plate Part Category The Plate Part Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for plate parts in the software.


This list populates the Naming Category box when you select Standalone in the Type box on the Properties dialog box for plate parts.

Pressure Rating The Pressure Rating select list (codelist) defines the available pressure rating for bolted joints. The software ignores any alphabetic characters in the pressure rating when using the rating for comparison. For example, CL300, 300#, and 300 are equivalent.


When the Bulkload utility finds pressure rating and schedule/thickness values in the Piping reference data workbooks, the utility attempts to find the values in the Short Description column first and in the Codelist Number column second.





When you view this select list on Properties dialog boxes, the software only displays the practices that have child values. For example, only the parent Rating Practices with child values (Pressure Ratings) display.


Profile Part Category The Profile Part Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for profile parts in the software.


This list populates the Naming Category box when you select Standalone in the Type box on the Properties dialog box for stiffener profile parts.

ProfileEncasementType The Struct Insulation Encasement select list (codelist) defines the insulation encasement types.

This select list is used by the Structure task and belongs to the User Defined Package name space.

You can edit the delivered text of the short or long descriptions as long as you do not change the meaning. Do not change the numeric values of the delivered select list items. Custom (user added) select list numbers must be between 10,001 and 40,000.

Property Categories Property Categories defines the categories for custom interfaces. This select list is used in the reference data for multiple tasks. You can define custom interfaces and user attributes on the Custom Interfaces sheets in the reference data workbooks.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select PropertyCategories.

Property Categories The Property Categories select list (codelist) defines the categories for custom interfaces.

This select list is used in multiple tasks: Compartmentation, Planning, and Structural Manufacturing. The list belongs to the CORE namespace.

Intergraph product codes are in the range 1000-9999: 1000-7999 for SmartPlant software and 8000-9999 for SmartMarine software.

User reference data codes start at 10,000.



Purchase Length Basis Option The Purchase Length Basis Option select list (codelist) specifies the basis on which the purchase length in piping specifications is determined. The purchase length option applies to all piping materials classes within a piping specification.


The following options are available in this select list:

By user

The purchase length is based on the commodity option specified by the piping designer. In other words, all pipe stock lengths for the applicable pipe run are based on the same purchase length.

By system

All purchase length options provided by the specification writer are to be used. In other words, multiple pipe stock lengths for the applicable pipe run are based on the purchase lengths of all commodity options specified for the pipe stock in the piping commodity filter.


Rear End Type The Rear End Type select list (codelist) specifies the rear end types available for heat exchangers with variable head options.

This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

Reference Plane View Directions The Reference Plane View Directions select list (codelist) specifies reference plane view directions.





Reporting Requirement Basis The Reporting Requirement Basis select list (codelist) defines the basis for reporting requirements: piping specification, rule, or piping designer.



Reporting Type The Reporting Type select list (codelist) defines the available reporting types and requirements.



Requisition Responsibility The Requisition Responsibility select list (codelist) defines the list of parties available for doing requisition work.


Requisition Type The Requisition Type select list (codelist) defines the list of requisition types.

In piping projects, the requisition type value represents the basis for requisitioning the piping specialty as either custom- engineered or stock. Stock piping specialties represent those piping specialties, including steam traps, strainers, and some types of filters, that are purchased from a manufacturer's catalog, where no real engineering is required other than selecting the correct size, material, and so forth.





Respect Assembly Boundaries The Respect Assembly Boundaries select list (codelist) is a Boolean (Yes/No) list that specifies whether or not the boundaries of assembly parents must be honored during WBS item creation. For example, if a pipe part belongs to a spool, all of the parts of the spool must be included in the same WBS item if this Boolean is True.



Revision History Notes Option The Revision History Notes Option select list (codelist) defines the options for whether revision history notes are created, when revising data in piping specifications, piping catalog, or insulation specifications.



Ring Number The Ring Number select list (codelist) defines the list of ring numbers for ring joint gaskets. Refer to the Gasket Part Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Ring Profile Category The Ring Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for ring profiles in the software.




Rotation Offset Type The RotationOffsetType select list (codelist) defines the offset used when rotating a grid plane from an elevation plane (Z).

This select list is used in the Grids task. The list belongs to the GRDSYS namespace.

Route Direction The Route Direction select list (codelist) defines the available directions for routing in a zone.

The auto-routing functionality routes pipe through zones based on the property value that is defined for that zone.

This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Route Layout The Route Layout select list (codelist) defines options for the routing applications.

This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.


Route on Face The Route on Face select list (codelist) defines options for routing from the faces of objects in the model.

This select list is used in the Space Management task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.




Rule Class Type Rule Class Type defines the types of rule classes available in the software. This select list is used in the reference data for multiple tasks.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select RuleClassType.

Rule Type Rule Type defines the available types of rules in the software. This select list is used in the reference data for multiple tasks.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Rule Type.

Schedule Thickness The Schedule Thickness select list (codelist) defines the thickness schedules available for use in the model.


When the Bulkload utility finds pressure rating and schedule/thickness values in the Piping reference data workbooks, the utility attempts to find the values in the Short Description column first and in the Codelist Number column second.



When you view this select list on Properties dialog boxes, the software only displays the practices that have child values. For example, only the parent Schedule Thickness Practices with child values (Schedule Thicknesses) display.




Selection Basis The Selection Basis select list (codelist) defines the values that indicate whether the piping commodity is available for manual selection by the piping designer or for selection only as a result of a rule.


The following examples show how this select list is used:

For flanges, this select list provides an indication of whether the automated flange selection logic is applied. The value should be enabled for the default flange connected to fitting short code and the default flange connected to plain piping short code. Otherwise, the value should be disabled such that the flange selected by the piping designer overrides the default flange, as selected by the software. In other words, this select list provides the means for the piping designer to optionally (at the discretion of the specification writer) be able to select a flange that is not subject to the automated selection logic for flanges.

For reinforcing pads, this select list provides an indication of whether the reinforcing pad thickness and the reinforcing pad width are to be specified by the software (system) or by the user.

For reinforcing welds, this select list provides an indication of whether the reinforcing weld size is to be specified by the software (system) or by the user.

For pipe bends, this select list provides an indication that the bend radius is determined from the piping commodity filter, and that the corresponding specification and catalog data are not required. The commodity code for the pipe bend is expected to be the commodity code of the plain piping from which the pipe bend is fabricated.

For mitered elbows, this select list provides an indication that the number of miter cuts is determined from the piping commodity filter, and that the corresponding specification and catalog data are not required. The commodity code for the pipe bend is expected to be the commodity code of the plain piping from which the mitered elbow is fabricated.

Reinforcing Pads

Reinforcing pads are treated as piping commodities, where the commodity code is included in the piping specification. Reinforcing pads appear in the bill of material on the isometric drawing. Some users include the reinforcing pad thickness and width on the isometric drawing, while other users do not show this data in the material description on the isometric drawing. In the latter case, the reinforcing pad thickness and width are based on a standard that is included with the paper piping specification and, while the data from the standard is accurate, the reinforcing pad thickness and width are determined from the chart for fabrication, and not from the material description on the isometric drawing.

If the reinforcing pad is placed by the system, its reinforcing pad width and reinforcing pad thickness are computed. Any reinforcing pad that is placed as a result of the Branch Intersection rule should be considered as placed by the system. However, if the reinforcing pad is placed by the user, the piping designer must specify the pad width and thickness. If branch reinforcement calculations have been enabled for the piping specification, the reinforcing pad width and the reinforcing pad thickness, after subtracting the applicable mill tolerance as specified by the piping designer at placement time, must be verified to represent adequate reinforcement by means of the branch reinforcement calculations. This verification must consider the minimum fillet weld size between the header and the pad, and the minimum fillet weld size between the branch and the pad.

The acceptability of the reinforcing pad should be re-verified in any situation where the reinforcing pad is re-computed on the basis of any reference data changes or changes to



engineering data in the model that affect the selection of the reference data for that reinforcing pad.

Reinforcing Welds

A reinforcing weld, which can be either a stub-on type or a stub-in type welded to the header pipe, is not a piping commodity that can be purchased. Typically, a reinforcing weld does not include a commodity code in the piping specification. Likewise, a reinforcing weld is typically not included in the bill-of-materials with the isometric drawing. A reinforcing weld should automatically be placed as a non- material take-off item, if enabled by a project-wide option.

If the reinforcing weld is placed by the system, its reinforcing weld size is computed. Any reinforcing weld that is placed as a result of the Branch Intersection rule should be considered as placed by the system. However, if the reinforcing weld is placed by the user, the piping designer must specify the weld size. If branch reinforcement calculations have been enabled for the piping specification, the reinforcing weld size, as specified by the piping designer at placement time, must be verified to represent adequate reinforcement by means of the branch reinforcement calculations.


Shell Category The Shell Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for shells in the software.


Ship Design Loading Condition Type Ship Design Loading Condition Type specifies the loading condition types for compartments. This codelist is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select ShipDesignLoadingConditionType.



Short Code Hierarchy The Short Code Hierarchy select list (codelist) defines the applicable short codes for each class. The specification writer can designate which short codes are exposed to the piping designer under which configurations. Refer to the Short Code Hierarchy Rule topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.

This select list is used in the Piping task by the routing solver. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Number Description Route Feature When to use

5 Valves Along Leg Feature For valves

10 Flanges Along Leg Feature For flanges

15 Concentric Size Change Fittings

Intermediate End Feature Pair

For reducers, reducing flanges, and so forth.

20 Eccentric Size Change Fittings

Intermediate End Feature Pair

For eccentric reducers

25 Closing Fittings End Feature Components with only one port that are meant to close the run.

30 Elbolets Intermediate End Feature

For elbolets. Currently, Elbolets are modeled as single size along leg features. In the future, this could change to a branch-feature to represent the true two-size nature.

35 Other Inline Fittings Along Leg Feature All other inline fittings including those that have offset. Examples include 2-port steam traps with offset, bosses, orifice plates, and so forth. This can also include 3-port components that are not rule driven branches such as 3-way valves.

40 Elbows Turn Feature Elbows, angle-valves, and so forth.

45 Pipe Bends Turn Feature Pipe bends

50 Miters Turn Feature Miters

55 Tee Type Branches Along Leg Feature-Branch Parent

Branch components that are inserted on the header run and that are rule-driven (short-code appears in branch rule).



Number Description Route Feature When to use

60 Olet Type Branches Branch Feature Olet type branches that penetrate the header without splitting it. Examples include olets, bosses, r-pads.

65 Lateral Type Branches

Along Leg Feature-Branch Parent

Branch components that are inserted on the header run and that are rule-driven (short-code appears in branch rule)

70 Lateralolet Type Branches

Branch Feature Same as olet type branches except the angle need not be 90˚.

75 Cross Branches Along Leg Feature Cross branches

80 Other Branches Along Leg Feature

85 Miscellaneous Along Leg Feature-End Leg

Components with more than three ports where it is required that routing be possible from the ports. Also, components with three-ports where primary ports are not inline and/or the third port is not in the same plane as the primary ports. Essentially, this option is a catch-all for components that do not fall into other categories.

90 Returns AlongLeg Feature-End Leg

For 180° returns

95 Pipes Straight Feature and/or Turn Feature based on topology

For pipes

100 Tubes Straight Feature and/or Turn Feature based on topology

For tubes

105 Hoses Straight Feature and/or Turn Feature based on topology

For hoses



If you are not sure which select list number to use for your non-standard component, refer to the following table:

For a component having… The Short Code Hierarchy type in the specification rule should be...

Resulting Route Feature Type

One port Inline Fittings/Closing Fittings End feature

Two ports with a change in direction

Change Of Direction Fittings Turn feature

Two inline ports having different NPD (with and without offset)

Inline Fittings/Concentric Size Change Fittings

Inline Fittings/Eccentric Size Change Fittings

Intermediate end feature.

Two inline ports with same NPD (with and without offset)

Inline Fittings/Valves

Inline Fittings/Flanges

Inline Fittings/Other Inline Fittings

Along-leg feature.

Component having three ports with two inline ports and one offline port and all ports intersect at symbol origin.

Branches/Tee Type Branches Along-leg branch parent feature.

Component having three or more ports with at least two inline ports. If a three-port component, then all ports do not intersect at symbol origin.

Inline Fittings/Other Inline Fittings

Branches/Other Branches

Along-leg feature.

Component having more than two ports with only one inline port

Miscellaneous Fittings/Miscellaneous End feature.

Components having four ports where two are inline and all ports intersect at symbol origin

Branches/Cross Branches Along-leg feature.

Signal Type The Signal Type select list (codelist) specifies the applicable values for the cable usage property, which is used for tray fill calculations.





Size Reduction Preference The Size Reduction Preference select list (codelist) defines the size reductions in the model. For example, a reduction from 24 in. to 6 in. would require two reducers: a 24 in. x 12 in. reducer and a 12 in. x 6 in. reducer.



Size Reduction Type The Size Reduction Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of size reductions (either concentric or eccentric) available for use in the model.



Slab Boundary Reference The Slab Boundary Reference select list (codelist) specifies slab boundary references for members in the model. Refer to the Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Slab Composition The Slab Composition select list (codelist) specifies the options for composition of slabs.


Slab Continuity The Slab Continuity select list (codelist) specifies the continuity types for slabs in the model. Refer to the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used when defining layers and slabs.





Slab Corner Type The Slab Corner Type select list (codelist) defines the corner types for slabs in the model.

This select list is used in the reference data for the Structure task, when extending the possible value and behavior of the slab assembly connections. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

You should not change the pre-existing numeric values in this select list. You can add new values, but you must customize a delivered Visual Basic program in the software.

Slab Cross Section Symbol The Slab Cross Section Symbol select list (codelist) defines the cross section symbols for slabs in the model.


Slab Direction Reference The Slab Direction Reference select list (codelist) defines the directions for slabs in the model. Refer to the Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Slab Face Position The Slab Face Position select list (codelist) defines the face positions on slabs in the model. Refer to the Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used. The face position of a slab affects the location of the supports placed in the Hangers and Supports task.





Slab Fastener Type The Slab Fastener Type select list (codelist) specifies the fastener types for slabs in the model. Refer to the Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.


Slab Layer Role The Slab Layer Role select list (codelist) specifies the layer roles for slabs in the model.



Slab Manufacturing Process The Slab Manufacturing Process select list (codelist) specifies the manufacturing processes for slabs in the model.



Slab Nosing Material The Slab Nosing Material select list (codelist) specifies the nosing materials for slabs in the model.


Slab Nosing Type The Slab Nosing Type select list (codelist) specifies the nosing types for slabs in the model.



Slab Priority The Slab Priority select list (codelist) specifies the priorities for slabs in the model. Refer to the Slab General Type topic in the Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.





Slab Reference Direction The Slab Reference Direction select list (codelist) specifies the reference directions for slabs in the model.

This select list is used in the Structure task when extending the possible value and behavior of slab assembly connections. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs defines the database integrity messages for Ship Structure and Structural Detailing in the software.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SmartMarine 3DDataIntegrityMsgs.

SmartMarine 3D Msgs SmartMarine 3D Msgs defines the messages for the To Do List in the software.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SmartMarine 3DMsgs.

Space Access Type Space Access Type specifies the types of access for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceAccessType.

Space Adjacency Contact Type Space Adjacency Contact Type specifies the adjacency contact types for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceAdjacencyContactType.

Space Adjacency Geometry Type Space Adjacency Geometry Type the adjacency geometry types for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceAdjacencyGeometryType.



Space Arrangement Orientation Space Arrangement Orientation specifies arrangement options for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceArrangementOrientation.

Space Arrangement Type Space Arrangement Type specifies the types of arrangements for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceArrangementType.

Space Item Purpose Space Item Purpose specifies lists the item purposes for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceItemPurpose.

Space Physical Orientation Type Space Physical Orientation Type specifies the types of physical orientation for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpacePhysicalOrientationType.



Space Positional Relationship Type Space Positional Relationship Type specifies the types of positional relationships for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpacePositionalRelationshipType.

Space Product Structure Type Space Product Structure Type specifies the type of structure for space objects. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Compartmentation task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select SpaceProductStructureType.

Spectacle Position The Spectacle Position select list (codelist) specifies the available positions for spectacle blinds in the model.

This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Spool Break by Control Point The Spool Break by Control Point select list (codelist) specifies the different methods of spooling at control points.



Spool Include Welded Parts The Spool Include Welded Parts select list (codelist) defines the available options for spooling. In the past, the spooling command only added the portion of a pipe support that was actually connected to the pipe via a weld. The Route Spooling Command adds a third option that allows not only the welded parts, but the entire support to be included as a child of the spool object. This behavior is optional and can be set by modifying the Include Items Welded to Pipe in Spools attribute on the Options tab in the Spool Generation dialog box.

When using the All Shop Parts option, only support components that have a Fabrication Requirement of "By fabricator", a Fabrication Type of "Shop fabricated" and a Fabrication Responsibility of "By Piping" will be included in the spool.





Spool Sequence Type The Spool Sequence Type select list (codelist) specifies the different ways of sequencing spools.



Spooling Basis The Spooling Basis select list (codelist) specifies the types of spooling, either by pipeline or block. Plant design users typically spool by pipeline, and ship design users typically spool by block. You can also spool by WBS (Work Breakdown Structure) Item. This functionality allows WBS Items to be used to group pipe parts. The collections of pipe parts are used during the creation of isometric drawings.


Steamout Requirement The Steamout Requirement select list (codelist) specifies the steamout requirements for use in the model.


Stress Relief The Stress Relief select list (codelist) specifies the values representing the industry practices for stress relief. Refer to the Piping Materials Class Data topic in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Stress Relief Requirement The Stress Relief Requirement select list (codelist) lists options for whether stress relief is required.





Struct 2L Back to Back Rule The Struct 2L Back to Back Rule select list (codelist) specifies the back-to-back rules for 2L members in the model.


Struct AC Left Right Both The Struct AC Left Right Both select list (codelist) specifies the available axis connections in the model.


Struct AC Pad Type The Struct AC Pad Type select list (codelist) specifies the pad types for assembly connections in the model.


Struct AC Sizing Rule The Struct AC Sizing Rule select list (codelist) specifies the sizing rules for axis connections in the model.


Struct AC Splice Types The Struct AC Splice Types select list (codelist) specifies the available splice types for assembly connections in the model.


Struct AC To Do Messages The Struct AC To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for assembly connections in the model.


Struct Alignment The Struct Alignment select list (codelist) specifies the alignment options for members in the model.





Struct Boundary Conditions The Struct Boundary Conditions select list (codelist) specifies the boundary conditions for structural analysis.

This select list is used in the Structural Analysis task. The list belongs to the CMNSCH namespace.

Valid member end releases numbers are between 0 and 64. In the workbook, you can comment out those you do not want to appear in the software. You can name and uncomment those you want to appear in the software.


Struct Can Diameter Rule The StructCanDiameterRule select list (codelist) defines the diameter of the cans used in trusses and onshore facilities.


Struct Can Length Compute Method The StructCanLengthComputeMethod select list (codelist) determines the hull factor and length, and the centerline factor and length.


Struct Can Type The StructCanType select list (codelist) defines the can type: inline, stub end, or end.


Struct Cone Length Compute Method The StructConeLengthComputeMethod select list (codelist) defines the slope, angle, and length of the can.


Struct Compute Rule The Struct Compute Rule select list (codelist) determines whether the designed member section properties is computed by system or by user.





Struct Continuity The Struct Continuity select list (codelist) specifies the continuity options for members in the model.



Struct Coord Sys Reference The Struct Coord Sys Reference select list (codelist) specifies the coordinate systems used for structural operations in the model.


Struct Custom Plate Part Type The Struct Custom Plate Part Type select list (codelist) specifies the plate types available in the model.



Struct End Releases The Struct End Releases select list (codelist) specifies the end release options for members in the model.


Valid member end releases numbers are between 1 and 63. In the workbook, you can comment out those you do not want to appear in the software. You can name and uncomment those you want to appear in the software.


Struct Eqp To Do Messages The Struct Eqp To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for equipment foundations in the model.


Struct FC Chevron WPO The Struct FC Chevron WPO select list (codelist) specifies the work point offsets for frame connection chevrons in the model.




Struct FC End Controlling The Struct FC End Controlling select list (codelist) specifies the end controlling values for frame connections.



Struct FC Offset Along The Struct FC Offset Along select list (codelist) lists the offset along references for frame connections in the model.


Struct FC Offset Direction The Struct FC Offset Direction select list (codelist) specifies the offset directions for frame connections in the model.


Struct FC Supported Edge The Struct FC Supported Edge select list (codelist) specifies the supported edges for frame connections in the model.


Struct FC Supporting CPs The Struct FC Supporting CPs select list (codelist) specifies the supporting cardinal points for frame connections in the model.



Struct FC Supporting Side The Struct FC Supporting Side select list (codelist) specifies the supporting sides for frame connections in the model.




Struct FC To Do Messages The Struct FC To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for frame connections in the model.


Struct Feature Radius Type The Struct Feature Radius Type select list (codelist) specifies the radius types for structure features.



Struct Feature To Do Messages The Struct Feature To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for structural features in the model.


Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule The Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule select list (codelist) specifies the composite sizing rules for footings in the model.


Struct Footing To Do Messages The Struct Footing To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for structural footings in the model.


Struct Frm Conn Position Ref The Struct Frm Conn Position Ref select list (codelist) specifies the frame connection positions for members in the model.





Struct Insulation Purpose The Struct Insulation Purpose select list (codelist) defines the different purposes for the insulation.

This select list is used by the Structure task and belongs to the REFDAT name space.


Struct Member End Selection Rule The Struct Member End Selection Rule select list (codelist) specifies the end selection rules for members in the model. The rules determine from which end of the supporting member the software makes its measurements.



Struct Member Position Rule The Struct Member Position Rule select list (codelist) specifies the position rules for members in the model. The rules determine the position of the end of the supported member along the supporting member.



Struct Plate Part To Do Messages The Struct Plate Part To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for plate parts in the model.


Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes The Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes select list (codelist) specifies the shapes for prismatic footings in the model.


Struct SC To Do Messages The Struct SC To Do Messages select list (codelist) specifies the To Do List messages for split connections in the model.




Struct Wall Boundary Size The Struct Wall Boundary Size select list (codelist) specifies Finite or Infinite boundary size for wall structure features. This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.




Struct Wall Boundary Type The Struct Wall Boundary Type select list (codelist) specifies Above, Below, Start/End and Contact boundaries for wall structure features. This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.


Struct Wall Connection Type The Struct Wall Connection Type select list (codelist) specifies available connections (Undefined, Aligned, Along and Corner) for wall structure features. This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.


Struct Wall Reference Attribute The Struct Wall Reference Attribute select list (codelist) specifies Center, Far or Near reference points or attributes for wall structure features. This select list is used in the Structure task. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.


StructInsulationSetbackReference The Struct Insulation Setback Reference select list (codelist) defines the different starting points from which fireproofing setbacks are measured. Insulation is frequently placed so that the member is exposed at the ends to permit connections to be placed. This requires the insulation to be trimmed from the end, or setback. The codelist values allow you to choose which geometry of the memberPart to use as the datum for the setback distance. All four choices are available for both ends. An example would be for a column where both references can be set to the bottom of the column axis. For a beam, the start reference is set to the beam part start and the end reference will use the part end.


You can edit the delivered text of the short or long descriptions as long as you do not change the meaning. Do not change the numeric values of the delivered select list items. Custom (user added) select list numbers must be between 10,001 and 40,000.



Structural Load Case Source The Structural Load Case Source select list (codelist) specifies the different sources of load in the model.



Structural Member Priority The Structural Member Priority select list (codelist) specifies the priorities for members in the model.



Structural Member Type The Structural Member Type select list (codelist) specifies the types for members in the model.


Structural WPO Intersection Index The Structural WPO Intersection Index select list (codelist) specifies the available work point offset (WPO) intersections.



Supplementary Nut Requirement The Supplementary Nut Requirement select list (codelist) defines the options that indicate whether a second, supplementary nut is required for each machine bolt or each end of each stud bolt.





Supplementary Washer Requirement The Supplementary Washer Requirement select list (codelist) defines the options that indicate whether a second, supplementary washer is required for each machine bolt or each end of each stud bolt.



Supply Responsibility The Supply Responsibility select list (codelist) specifies the parties available for supplying materials.


Surface Preparation The Surface Preparation select list (codelist) specifies the different surface preparations for piping commodities.


Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option The Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option select list (codelist) provides either a user-defined list or a list of preferred tap end stud bolt lengths. This select list is used in the Piping task. The list belongs to the REFDATA namespace.


Testing Responsibility The Testing Responsibility select list (codelist) specifies the parties that are responsible for testing.


Testing Type The Testing Type select list (codelist) specifies the available testing requirements and types.





Tightness The Tightness select list (codelist) specifies the types of tightness for objects in the model.


Transverse Beam Category The Transverse Beam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for transverse beams in the software.


Transverse Bulkhead Category The Transverse Bulkhead Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for bulkheads in the software.


Transverse Profile Category The Transverse Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for transverse profiles in the software.


Transverse Seam Category The Transverse Seam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for transverse seams in the software.


Transverse Tube Category The Transverse Tube Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for transverse tubes in the software.


Tray Specification Type The Tray Specification Type select list (codelist) specifies that the numeric value for any new code list entry added by the user should be greater than 10,000.





Type The Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of foundation ports in the model.



Undefined Service Limits Rule Option The Undefined Service Limits Rule Option select list (codelist) specifies the options for temperature/pressure service limits.



Utility BOM Units The Utility BOM Units select list (codelist) is used by the Utility_Generic_C part to set the units (Imperial or Metric) used in the Bill of Materials report for a part. The list belongs to the UDP namespace.



Utility Brace Orient The Utility Brace Orient select list (codelist) determines which axis a brace port should be rotated about. This codelist works with the Angle property of the Utility_GenericBrace Part. For example, in the figure below, the Angle attribute is set to 30 degrees, and the Brace Orientation attribute is set to Rotate about Y, the y-port axis is the blue axis.

The list belongs to the UDP namespace.

Utility_Holes Utility_Holes lists the options for the number of holes. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_Holes.

Utility_Nuts Utility_Nuts lists the options for the number of nuts. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_Nuts.



Utility_PlateThickness Utility_PlateThickness lists the options for the thickness of plates. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_PlateThickness.

Utility_Tabs Utility_Tabs lists the options for the number of tabs. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_Tabs.

Utility_YesNo Utility_YesNo lists the options for whether or not to designate the part for the bill of materials. This select list (codelist) is used in the reference data for the Hangers and Supports task. This select list belongs to the UDP namespace.

To view the select list values delivered with the software, open the Select List node in the Catalog hierarchy and select Utility_YesNo.

Valve Flow Pattern The Valve Flow Pattern select list (codelist) provides the options of the flow pattern for a valve, which can include T, Y, 2-way, 3-way and 5-way patterns, to name a few. The select list is used in the reference data for the piping task.

This select list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Valve Model Number The Valve Model Number select list (codelist) specifies the manufacturers and model numbers for valves.





Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard The Valve Operator Geometric Industry Standard select list (codelist) specifies the industry standards for valve operators.



Valve Operator Is Rotatable The Valve Operator Is Rotatable select list (codelist) specifies the rotating options available for valve operators.



Valve Operator Part Data Basis The Valve Operator Part Data Basis select list (codelist). The select list is used in the reference data for the piping task.

This select list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.


Valve Operator Type The Valve Operator Type select list (codelist) specifies the valve operators available for use in the model.



Valve Port Option The Valve Port Option select list (codelist) specifies the valve port types, such as a conventional port, a regular port or a reduced port, available for use in the model.





Valve Trim The Valve Trim select list (codelist) specifies the standards for valve trim, which includes valve working parts and materials.



Vendor The Vendor select list (codelist) specifies the vendors that supply piping commodities. Typically, values for the vendor property are imported from a material control system, if required.


The meaning of vendor differs from the meaning of manufacturer in this usage. A vendor supplies the commodities, while a manufacturer produces the commodities.

Vertical Beam Category The Vertical Beam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical beams in the software.


Vertical Profile Category The Vertical Profile Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical profiles in the software.


Vertical Seam Category The Vertical Seam Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical seams in the software.


Vertical Tube Category The Vertical Tube Category select list (codelist) defines the available categories for vertical tubes in the software.




Vessel Head Type The Vessel Head Type select list (codelist) specifies the various head types for horizontal and vertical tanks.

This select list is used in the Equipment and Furnishings task. The list belongs to the REFDAT namespace.

Voltage Grade The Voltage Grade select list (codelist) specifies the grades for cable voltages. Voltage grade can be seen as an electrical service level. The different grades can be assigned to cable runs and cableway and cable tray runs and can be used for fill calculations, naming rules, or labeling.



Washer Creation Option The Washer Creation Option select list (codelist) defines the option of whether washers are created at a bolted joint. The specification writer can disable this option when washers are not tracked for material management purposes.

Even if this option is disabled, the specification writer can still use the washer thickness for the bolt length calculation if the washer selection filter and accompanying washer part data are defined in the catalog.

In other words, the washer selection filter, and the accompanying washer part data, may be used for bolt length calculations, even when this option has been disabled. In this situation, the washer thickness, as well as the bolt extension, will be included in the bolt length calculation, although the bolt extension will be expected to not consider the washer thickness.



Washer Option The Washer Option select list (codelist) specifies the types of washers available in the model.

A default washer option represents the washer that should be used when the piping designer has not explicitly selected one. The washer option, if applicable, is selected by the piping designer at a bolted joint.


Washer Type The Washer Type select list (codelist) specifies the types of washers that are available.




WBS Assignment The WBS Assignment select list (codelist) defines the different ways to assign items during automated WBS creation - by system or by assembly.



WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type The WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type select list (codelist) defines the different ways to group items during automated WBS creation.



WBS Item Purpose The WBS Item Purpose select list (codelist) specifies the different purposes for items in the work breakdown structure (WBS).



User reference data codes start at 10,000.

WBS Project Purpose The WBS Project Purpose select list (codelist) specifies the project purposes for the work breakdown structure (WBS).



Intergraph system codes are in the range 1-999.




WBS Pull In Associated Items The WBS Pull In Associated Items select list (codelist) specifies whether or not the software includes associated items during WBS item creation.



Weld Type The Weld Type select list (codelist) specifies the available weld types for welded joints in the model. Refer to the Weld Model Representation Rule, Weld Type Rule, and the Weld Clearance Rule topics in the Piping Reference Data Guide for more information on how this select list is used.



Welding Procedure Specification The Welding Procedure Specification select list (codelist) defines the standards for weld sizes in different countries.





Welding Requirement The Welding Requirement select list (codelist) defines the welding requirements for welds on piping commodities, if welded ends apply.



The following options are available:

Each welded end requires a reportable weld. This value is the default for any piping commodity with one or more welded ends.

The face of the flange requires an additional weld. This situation can occur for a slip-on flange.

The face of the flange can have an optional, additional weld. This situation can occur for a plate flange, where the additional weld is based on the plate flange thickness.

Each welded end requires a reportable weld. However, the weld at the second piping point is determined on the basis of the Weld Type Exception option rather than the Weld Type Rule. This situation occurs for fittings (for example, sleeves), where the weld type always differs between the two ends of the fitting.

None of the ends requires welding. This value is the default for any piping commodity without any welded ends.


A P P E N D I X B

The software provides a standard set of unit types and units for reference data. The unit information is stored in the Core component.

You can specify unit types and units for each user-defined attribute on the Custom Interfaces sheet in the reference data workbooks. Unit types are categories of measurement, and units are the specific quantities of measurement. For example, distance is a unit type, and meters (m) is a unit for the distance unit type.

Unit information can be grouped into the following categories:

Unit Type Definitions to Names

Unit Type Names to Definitions

Unit Abbreviations to Names

Unit Names to Abbreviations

Unit Type Definitions to Names

Unit Type Definition Unit Type Name

distance UNIT_DISTANCE

angle UNIT_ANGLE

mass UNIT_MASS

time UNIT_TIME

temperature UNIT_TEMPERATURE

electric current UNIT_ELECTRIC_CURRENT

luminous intensity UNIT_LUMINOUS_INTENSITY

amount of substance UNIT_AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE

solid angle UNIT_SOLID_ANGLE

angular acceleration UNIT_ANGULAR_ACCELERATION

angular momentum UNIT_ANGULAR_MOMENTUM

angular velocity UNIT_ANGULAR_VELOCITY

area UNIT_AREA

body force UNIT_BODY_FORCE

coefficient of thermal expansion UNIT_COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION

density UNIT_DENSITY

electrical capacitance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE

electrical conductance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE

electrical field strength UNIT_ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH

Appendix: Units of Measure




electrical inductance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE

electrical potential difference UNIT_ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL

electrical resistance UNIT_ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE

energy UNIT_ENERGY

entropy UNIT_ENTHROPY

film coefficient UNIT_FILM_COEFFICIENT

force UNIT_FORCE

force per area UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA

force per distance UNIT_FORCE_PER_DISTANCE

frequency UNIT_FREQUENCY

heat capacity UNIT_HEAT_CAPACITY

heat flux per area UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA

heat flux per distance UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE

heat source UNIT_HEAT_SOURCE

illuminance UNIT_ILLUMINANCE

linear acceleration UNIT_LINEAR_ACCELERATION

linear per angular UNIT_LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR

linear velocity UNIT_LINEAR_VELOCITY

luminous flux UNIT_LUMINOUS_FLUX

magnetic field strength UNIT_MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH

magnetic flux UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX

magnetic flux density UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY

mass flow rate UNIT_MASS_FLOW_RATE

mass moment of inertia UNIT_MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA

mass per area UNIT_MASS_PER_AREA

mass per length UNIT_MASS_PER_LENGTH

momentum UNIT_MOMENTUM

per distance UNIT_PER_DISTANCE

power UNIT_POWER

electric charge UNIT_ELECTRIC_CHARGE

radiant intensity UNIT_RADIANT_INTENSITY

rotational stiffness UNIT_ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS

second moment of area UNIT_SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA

thermal conductivity UNIT_THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY




dynamic viscosity UNIT_DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY

kinematic viscosity UNIT_KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY

volume UNIT_VOLUME

volume flow rate UNIT_VOLUME_FLOW_RATE

scalar UNIT_SCALAR

force per area per length UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA_PER_LENGTH

moment UNIT_MOMENT

first moment of area UNIT_FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA

torsional warping constant UNIT_TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT

slope UNIT_SLOPE

enumerator UNIT_ENUM

NPD UNIT_NPD

moment per distance UNIT_MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE

wire gauge UNIT_WIRE_GAUGE

Unit Type Names to Definitions

Unit Type Name Unit Type Definition

UNIT_DISTANCE distance

UNIT_ANGLE angle

UNIT_MASS mass

UNIT_TIME time

UNIT_TEMPERATURE temperature

UNIT_ELECTRIC_CURRENT electric current

UNIT_LUMINOUS_INTENSITY luminous intensity

UNIT_AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE amount of substance

UNIT_SOLID_ANGLE solid angle

UNIT_ANGULAR_ACCELERATION angular acceleration

UNIT_ANGULAR_MOMENTUM angular momentum

UNIT_ANGULAR_VELOCITY angular velocity

UNIT_AREA area

UNIT_BODY_FORCE body force

UNIT_COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION

coefficient of thermal expansion

UNIT_DENSITY density




UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE electrical capacitance

UNIT_ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE electrical conductance

UNIT_ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH electrical field strength

UNIT_ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE electrical inductance

UNIT_ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL electrical potential difference

UNIT_ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE electrical resistance

UNIT_ENERGY energy

UNIT_ENTHROPY entropy

UNIT_FILM_COEFFICIENT film coefficient

UNIT_FORCE force

UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA force per area

UNIT_FORCE_PER_DISTANCE force per distance

UNIT_FREQUENCY frequency

UNIT_HEAT_CAPACITY heat capacity

UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA heat flux per area

UNIT_HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE heat flux per distance

UNIT_HEAT_SOURCE heat source

UNIT_ILLUMINANCE illuminance

UNIT_LINEAR_ACCELERATION linear acceleration

UNIT_LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR linear per angular

UNIT_LINEAR_VELOCITY linear velocity

UNIT_LUMINOUS_FLUX luminous flux

UNIT_MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH magnetic field strength

UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX magnetic flux

UNIT_MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY magnetic flux density

UNIT_MASS_FLOW_RATE mass flow rate

UNIT_MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA mass moment of inertia

UNIT_MASS_PER_AREA mass per area

UNIT_MASS_PER_LENGTH mass per length

UNIT_MOMENTUM momentum

UNIT_PER_DISTANCE per distance

UNIT_POWER power

UNIT_ELECTRIC_CHARGE electric charge

UNIT_RADIANT_INTENSITY radiant intensity




UNIT_ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS rotational stiffness

UNIT_SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA second moment of area

UNIT_THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY thermal conductivity

UNIT_DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY dynamic viscosity

UNIT_KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY kinematic viscosity

UNIT_VOLUME volume

UNIT_VOLUME_FLOW_RATE volume flow rate

UNIT_SCALAR scalar

UNIT_FORCE_PER_AREA_PER_LENGTH force per area per length

UNIT_MOMENT moment

UNIT_FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA first moment of area

UNIT_TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT torsional warping constant

UNIT_SLOPE slope

UNIT_ENUM enumerator

UNIT_NPD NPD

UNIT_MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE moment per distance

UNIT_WIRE_GAUGE wire gauge

Unit Abbreviations to Names

Unit Abbreviation Name

m DISTANCE_METER

nm DISTANCE_NANOMETER

mm DISTANCE_MILLIMETER

cm DISTANCE_CENTIMETER

km DISTANCE_KILOMETER

in DISTANCE_INCH

ft DISTANCE_FOOT

yd DISTANCE_YARD

mi DISTANCE_MILE

tenth DISTANCE_TENTH

hundredth DISTANCE_HUNDREDTH

thousandth DISTANCE_THOUSANDTH

rod DISTANCE_ROD

pole DISTANCE_POLE




link DISTANCE_LINK

chain DISTANCE_CHAIN

pt DISTANCE_POINT

furlong DISTANCE_FURLONG

rad ANGLE_RADIAN

deg ANGLE_DEGREE

min ANGLE_MINUTE

sec ANGLE_SECOND

gr ANGLE_GRADIAN

rev ANGLE_REVOLUTION

kg MASS_KILOGRAM

g MASS_GRAM

mg MASS_MILLIGRAM

Mg MASS_MEGAGRAM

grain MASS_GRAIN

slug MASS_SLUG

lbm MASS_POUND_MASS

slinch MASS_SLINCH

oz MASS_OUNCE

tonne MASS_METRIC_TON

ton MASS_LONG_TON

net-ton MASS_SHORT_TON

sec TIME_SECOND

min TIME_MINUTE

hr TIME_HOUR

day TIME_DAY

wk TIME_WEEK

yr TIME_YEAR

ms TIME_MILLISECOND

ns TIME_NANOSECOND

K TEMPERATURE_KELVIN

F TEMPERATURE_FAHRENHEIT

C TEMPERATURE_CELCIUS

R TEMPERATURE_RANKINE




A ELECTRIC_CURRENT_AMPERE

cd LUMINOUS_INTENSITY_CANDELA

mol AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE_MOLE

sr SOLID_ANGLE_STERADIAN

rad/s2 ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_RADIAN_PER_SQ_SECOND

deg/s2 ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_DEGREE_PER_SQ_SECOND

Hz/s ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_CYCLE_PER_SQ_SECOND

kg-m2/s ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER_PER_SE

COND

rad/s ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_SECOND

rad/min ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_MINUTE

rad/hr ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_HOUR

Hz ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_SECOND

rpm ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_MINUTE

rph ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_HOUR

deg/s ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_SECOND

deg/m ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_MINUTE

deg/hr ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_HOUR

m2 AREA_SQUARE_METER

mm2 AREA_SQUARE_MILLIMETER

cm2 AREA_SQUARE_CENTIMETER

km2 AREA_SQUARE_KILOMETER

in2 AREA_SQUARE_INCH

ft2 AREA_SQUARE_FOOT

yd2 AREA_SQUARE_YARD

mi2 AREA_SQUARE_MILE

ac AREA_SQUARE_ACRE

ac AREA_ACRE

N/m3 BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_METER

N/cm3 BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_CENTIMETER

N/mm3 BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER

kN/m3 BODY_FORCE_KILONEWTON_PER_CU_METER

lbf/in3 BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_INCH

lbf/ft3 BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_FOOT




/K COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_KELVIN

/C COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_CELCIUS

/F COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_FAHRENHEIT

/R COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_RANKINE

kg/m3 DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_METER

kg/mm3 DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_MILLIMETER

kg/cm3 DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_CENTIMETER

lbm/ft3 DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_FOOT

lbm/in3 DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_INCH

slug/ft3 DENSITY_SLUG_PER_CU_FOOT

slinch/in3 DENSITY_SLINCH_PER_CU_INCH

F ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE_FARAD

S ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE_SIEMENS

V/m ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_METER

V ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL_VOLT

ohm ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE_OHM

J ENERGY_JOULE

mJ ENERGY_MICRO_JOULE

kJ ENERGY_KILOJOULE

W-s ENERGY_WATT_SECOND

W-hr ENERGY_WATT_HOUR

kW-hr ENERGY_KILOWATT_HOUR

in-lbf ENERGY_INCH_POUND_FORCE

ft-lbf ENERGY_FOOT_POUND_FORCE

BTU ENERGY_BTU

erg ENERGY_ERG

eV ENERGY_ELECTRON_VOLT

J/K ENTHROPY_JOULE_PER_KELVIN

W/m2-K FILM_COEFFICIENT_WATT_PER_SQ_METER_KELVIN

BTU/hr- ft2F FILM_COEFFICIENT_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT_FAHREN

HEIT

ft- lbf/ft2F FILM_COEFFICIENT_FOOT_POUND_PER_SQ_FOOT_FAH

RENHEIT

in- lbf/in2F FILM_COEFFICIENT_INCH_POUND_PER_SQ_INCH_FAHR




ENHEIT

N FORCE_NEWTON

nN FORCE_NANONEWTON

mN FORCE_MILLINEWTON

kN FORCE_KILONEWTON

lbf FORCE_POUND_FORCE

dyne FORCE_DYNE

kip FORCE_KIP

Pa FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL

mPa FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL

kPa FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL

MPa FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL

psi FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH

ksi FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH

psf FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT

ksf FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT

bar FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR

mbar FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR

atm FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE

N/m FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_METER

N/mm FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_MILLIMETER

N/cm FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_CENTIMETER

kN/m FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_PER_METER

lbf/in FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_INCH

lbf/ft FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_FOOT

kpi FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_INCH

kpf FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_FOOT

dyne/m FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_METER

dyne/mm FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_MILLIMETER

/sec FREQUENCY_PER_SECOND

/min FREQUENCY_PER_MINUTE

/hr FREQUENCY_PER_HOUR

J/kg-K HEAT_CAPACITY_JOULE_PER_KILOGRAM_KELVIN

BTU/lbm-F HEAT_CAPACITY_BTU_PER_POUND_MASS_FAHRENHEIT




W/m2 HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_WATT_PER_SQ_METER

kW/m2 HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_KILOWATT_PER_SQ_METER

in-lbf/s- in2 HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SEC

OND_SQ_INCH

ft-lbf/s- ft2 HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SE

COND_SQ_FOOT

BTU/hr- ft2 HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT

hp/ft2 HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_HORSEPOWER_P_PER_SQ_FOO

T

W/m HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_WATT_PER_METER

kW/m HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_KILOWATT_PER_METER

mW/m HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_METER

mW/mm HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_MILLIMETER

in-lbf/s- in HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_INCH

BTU/hr- ft HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_FOOT

hp/ft HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_FOOT

W/m3 HEAT_SOURCE_WATT_PER_CU_METER

kW/m3 HEAT_SOURCE_KILOWATT_PER_CU_METER

in-lbf/s- in3 HEAT_SOURCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_CU

_INCH

ft-lbf/s- ft3 HEAT_SOURCE_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_C

U_FOOT

BTU/hr- ft3 HEAT_SOURCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_CU_FOOT

hp/ft3 HEAT_SOURCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_CU_FOOT

lx ILLUMINANCE_LUX

m/s2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_METER_PER_SQ_SECOND

km/s2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND

mm/s2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILLIMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND

cm/s2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_CENTIMETER_PER_SQ_SECON

D

in/s2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_INCH_PER_SQ_SECOND

ft/s2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_FOOT_PER_SQ_SECOND

mi/s2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_SECOND

mi/hr2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_HOUR




km/hr2 LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_HOUR

m/rad LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_RADIAN

m/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_REVOLUTION

mm/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_REVOLUTION

in/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_REVOLUTION

ft/rev LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_FOOT_PER_REVOLUTION

m/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_METER_PER_SECOND

mm/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND

cm/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND

km/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_SECOND

km/hr LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_HOUR

in/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_INCH_PER_SECOND

ft/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_SECOND

mi/s LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_SECOND

mi/hr LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_HOUR

lm LUMINOUS_FLUX_LUMEN

A/m MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_METER

Wb MAGNETIC_FLUX_WEBER

T MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY_TESLA

kg/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_KILOGRAM_PER_SECOND

g/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_GRAM_PER_SECOND

Mg/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_MEGAGRAM_PER_SECOND

lbm/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_POUND_MASS_PER_SECOND

slug/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLUG_PER_SECOND

slinch/s MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLINCH_PER_SECOND

kg-m2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER

kg-mm2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_MILLIMETE

R

g-mm2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_MILLIMETER

g-cm2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_CENTIMETER

slug-ft2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_FOOT

slug-in2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_INCH

slinch- in2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLINCH_SQ_INCH

lbm-in2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_INCH




lbm-ft2 MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT

kg/m2 MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_METER

kg/mm2 MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER

g/mm2 MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER

g/cm2 MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_CENTIMETER

slug/in2 MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_INCH

slug/ft2 MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_FOOT

slinch/in2 MASS_PER_AREA_SLINCH_PER_SQ_INCH

lbm/in2 MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_INCH

lbm/ft2 MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_FOOT

kg/m MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_METER

kg/mm MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_MILLIMETER

g/mm MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_MILLIMETER

g/cm MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_CENTIMETER

slug/in MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_INCH

slug/ft MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_FOOT

slinch/in MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLINCH_PER_INCH

lbm/in MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_INCH

lbm/ft MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_FOOT

kg-m/s MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_METER_PER_SECOND

/m PER_DISTANCE_PER_METER

/nm PER_DISTANCE_PER_NANOMETER

/mm PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILLIMETER

/cm PER_DISTANCE_PER_CENTIMETER

/km PER_DISTANCE_PER_KILOMETER

/in PER_DISTANCE_PER_INCH

/ft PER_DISTANCE_PER_FOOT

/yd PER_DISTANCE_PER_YARD

/mi PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILE

/tenth PER_DISTANCE_PER_TENTH

/hundredth PER_DISTANCE_PER_HUNDREDTH

/mil PER_DISTANCE_PER_MIL

W POWER_WATT

kW POWER_KILOWATT




mW POWER_MICROWATT

in-lbf/s POWER_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND

ft-lbf/s POWER_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND

BTU/hr POWER_BTU_PER_HOUR

hp POWER_HORSEPOWER

C ELECTRIC_CHARGE_COULOMB

W/sr RADIANT_INTENSITY_WATT_PER_STERADIAN

N- m/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_RADIAN

N- m/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_DEGREE

N- mm/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_RADIAN

N- mm/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_DEGREE

kN- m/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_RADIAN

kN- m/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_DEGREE

lbf- in/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_RADIAN

lbf- in/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_DEGREE

lbf- ft/rad ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_RADIAN

lbf- ft/deg ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_DEGREE

m4 SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_FOURTH

mm4 SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_FOURTH

cm4 SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_FOURT

H

in4 SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_FOURTH

ft4 SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_FOURTH

W/m-C THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_WATT_PER_METER_CELCIUS

kW/m- C THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_KILOWATT_PER_METER_CELCIUS

BTU/hr- ft-F THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_BTU_PER_HOUR_FAHRENHEIT




in-lbf/s- in-F THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_INCH_FAHRENHEIT

Pa-s DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_PASCAL_SECOND

kPa-s DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_KILOPASCAL_SECOND

MPa-s DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_MEGAPASCAL_SECOND

lbf-s/in2 DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POUND_FORCE_SECOND_PER_SQ

_INCH

m2/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_METER_PER_SECOND

mm2/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND

cm2/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND

in2/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_INCH_PER_SECOND

ft2/s KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_FOOT_PER_SECOND

m3 VOLUME_CU_METER

mm3 VOLUME_CU_MILLIMETER

L VOLUME_LITER

mL VOLUME_MILLILITER

in3 VOLUME_CU_INCH

ft3 VOLUME_CU_FOOT

yd3 VOLUME_CU_YARD

gallon VOLUME_GALLON

quart VOLUME_QUART

pint VOLUME_PINT

ounce VOLUME_FLUID_OUNCE

UNIT_NOT_SET

SCALAR_NULL

m3/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_SECOND

mm3/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND

L/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_SECOND

mL/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_MILLILITER_PER_SECOND

in3/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_INCH_PER_SECOND

ft3/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_SECOND

yd3/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_YARD_PER_SECOND

gallon/s VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_SECOND

gallon/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_MINUTE




H ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE_HENRY

° ANGLE_DEGREE_SYMBOL

' ANGLE_MINUTE_SYMBOL

" ANGLE_SECOND_SYMBOL

' DISTANCE_FOOT_SYMBOL

" DISTANCE_INCH_SYMBOL

hectare AREA_HECTARE

N/mm2 FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER

P DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POISE

cP DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_CENTIPOISE

cm3 VOLUME_CU_CENTIMETER

lbm- ft2/s ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT_PER_S

ECOND

V/ft ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_FOOT

lbm-ft/s MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_FOOT_PER_SECOND

A/ft MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_FOOT

m3/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_MINUTE

m3/hr VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_HOUR

Pa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_PER_METER

mPa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_PER_METER

kPa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_PER_METER

MPa/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_PER_METER

psi/in FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_PER_INCH

ksi/in FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_PER_INCH

psf/ft FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER_FOOT

ksf/ft FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER_FOOT

bar/m FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_PER_METER

mbar/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_PER_METER

atm/m FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE_PER_METER

N/mm3 FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER

mmw/m FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_PER_METER

inw/ft FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_PER_FOOT




mmw FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER

inw FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER

N-m MOMENT_NEWTON_METER

DN-m MOMENT_DECA_NEWTON_METER

HN-m MOMENT_HECTO_NEWTON_METER

kN-m MOMENT_KILO_NEWTON_METER

MN-m MOMENT_MEGA_NEWTON_METER

TN-m MOMENT_TERA_NEWTON_METER

kgf-m MOMENT_KILOGRAM_FORCE_METER

tonnef- m MOMENT_TONNE_FORCE_METER

lb-ft MOMENT_POUND_FOOT

lb-in MOMENT_POUND_INCH

tonuk-ft MOMENT_TON_UK_FOOT

tonus-ft MOMENT_TON_US_FOOT

m3 FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_THIRD

mm3 FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_THIRD

cm3 FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_THIRD

in3 FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_THIRD

ft3 FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_THIRD

m6 TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_METER_TO_SIXTH

mm6 TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_MILLIMETER_TO_SIX

TH

cm6 TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_CENTIMETER_TO_SI

XTH

in6 TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_INCH_TO_SIXTH

ft6 TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_FOOT_TO_SIXTH

L/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_MINUTE

ft3/min VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_MINUTE

ft/min LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_MINUTE

ftnt TIME_FORTNIGHT

rad SLOPE_ANGLE_RADIAN

deg SLOPE_ANGLE_DEGREE

min SLOPE_ANGLE_MINUTE

sec SLOPE_ANGLE_SECOND




% SLOPE_PERCENT

‰ SLOPE_PER_THOUSAND

/ SLOPE_RATIO_SEPARATOR

m / m SLOPE_RATIO_METER_IN_METER

cm / m SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_METER

cm / cm SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER

mm / m SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_METER

mm / cm SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER

mm / mm SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_MILLIMETER

yd / yd SLOPE_RATIO_YARD_IN_YARD

ft / yd SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_YARD

ft / ft SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_FOOT

in / yd SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_YARD

in / ft SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_FOOT

in / in SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_INCH

ea ENUM_EACH

/tn ENUM_PER_TEN

% ENUM_PER_HUNDRED

% ENUM_PERCENT

‰ ENUM_PER_THOUSAND

tn ENUM_TEN

cn ENUM_HUNDRED

th ENUM_THOUSAND

dz ENUM_DOZEN

/dz ENUM_PER_DOZEN

mm/rad LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_RADIAN

m/deg LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_DEGREE

mm/deg LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_DEGREE

in/deg LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_DEGREE

Pag FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_GAUGE

mPag FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_GAUGE

kPag FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_GAUGE

MPag FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_GAUGE




psig FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_GAUGE

ksig FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_GAUGE

psfg FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_GAUGE

ksfg FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_GAUGE

barg FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_GAUGE

mbarg FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_GAUGE

N/mm2g FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER_GA

UGE

mmwg FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_GAUGE

inwg FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_GAUGE

in NPD_INCH

mm NPD_MILLIMETER

N-m/m MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_METER

N- m/mm MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_MILLIMETER

N- mm/m MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_METER

kN- m/mm MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_MILLIMETER

kN- mm/m MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_METER

lbf-ft/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_INCH

lbf-in/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_INCH

lbf-ft/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_FOOT

lbf-in/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_FOOT

kip-ft/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_FOOT

kip-ft/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_INCH

kip-in/ft MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_FOOT

kip-in/in MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_INCH

AWG WIRE_GAUGE_AWG

mm WIRE_GAUGE_MILLIMETER




in WIRE_GAUGE_INCH

mil WIRE_GAUGE_MIL

cmil WIRE_GAUGE_CIRCULAR_MIL

kcmil WIRE_GAUGE_KILO_CIRCULAR_MIL

mm2 WIRE_GAUGE_SQUARE_MILLIMETER

native NPD_NATIVE_INCH

native NPD_NATIVE

Unit Names to Abbreviations

Unit Name Abbreviation

DISTANCE_METER m

DISTANCE_NANOMETER nm

DISTANCE_MILLIMETER mm

DISTANCE_CENTIMETER cm

DISTANCE_KILOMETER km

DISTANCE_INCH in

DISTANCE_FOOT ft

DISTANCE_YARD yd

DISTANCE_MILE mi

DISTANCE_TENTH tenth

DISTANCE_HUNDREDTH hundredth

DISTANCE_THOUSANDTH thousandth

DISTANCE_ROD rod

DISTANCE_POLE pole

DISTANCE_LINK link

DISTANCE_CHAIN chain

DISTANCE_POINT pt

DISTANCE_FURLONG furlong

ANGLE_RADIAN rad

ANGLE_DEGREE deg

ANGLE_MINUTE min

ANGLE_SECOND sec

ANGLE_GRADIAN gr

ANGLE_REVOLUTION rev




MASS_KILOGRAM kg

MASS_GRAM g

MASS_MILLIGRAM mg

MASS_MEGAGRAM Mg

MASS_GRAIN grain

MASS_SLUG slug

MASS_POUND_MASS lbm

MASS_SLINCH slinch

MASS_OUNCE oz

MASS_METRIC_TON tonne

MASS_LONG_TON ton

MASS_SHORT_TON net-ton

TIME_SECOND sec

TIME_MINUTE min

TIME_HOUR hr

TIME_DAY day

TIME_WEEK wk

TIME_YEAR yr

TIME_MILLISECOND ms

TIME_NANOSECOND ns

TEMPERATURE_KELVIN K

TEMPERATURE_FAHRENHEIT F

TEMPERATURE_CELCIUS C

TEMPERATURE_RANKINE R

ELECTRIC_CURRENT_AMPERE A

LUMINOUS_INTENSITY_CANDELA cd

AMOUNT_OF_SUBSTANCE_MOLE mol

SOLID_ANGLE_STERADIAN sr

ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_RADIAN_PER_SQ_SECOND rad/s2

ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_DEGREE_PER_SQ_SECOND deg/s2

ANGULAR_ACCELERATION_CYCLE_PER_SQ_SECOND Hz/s

ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER_PER_SECOND kg-m2/s

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_SECOND rad/s

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_MINUTE rad/min




ANGULAR_VELOCITY_RADIAN_PER_HOUR rad/hr

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_SECOND Hz

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_MINUTE rpm

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_CYCLE_PER_HOUR rph

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_SECOND deg/s

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_MINUTE deg/m

ANGULAR_VELOCITY_DEGREE_PER_HOUR deg/hr

AREA_SQUARE_METER m2

AREA_SQUARE_MILLIMETER mm2

AREA_SQUARE_CENTIMETER cm2

AREA_SQUARE_KILOMETER km2

AREA_SQUARE_INCH in2

AREA_SQUARE_FOOT ft2

AREA_SQUARE_YARD yd2

AREA_SQUARE_MILE mi2

AREA_SQUARE_ACRE ac

AREA_ACRE ac

BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_METER N/m3

BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_CENTIMETER N/cm3

BODY_FORCE_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER N/mm3

BODY_FORCE_KILONEWTON_PER_CU_METER kN/m3

BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_INCH lbf/in3

BODY_FORCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_CU_FOOT lbf/ft3

COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_KELVIN /K

COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_CELCIUS /C

COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_FAHRENHEIT /F

COEFFICIENT_OF_THERMAL_EXPANSION_PER_RANKINE /R

DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_METER kg/m3

DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_MILLIMETER kg/mm3

DENSITY_KILOGRAM_PER_CU_CENTIMETER kg/cm3

DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_FOOT lbm/ft3

DENSITY_POUND_MASS_PER_CU_INCH lbm/in3

DENSITY_SLUG_PER_CU_FOOT slug/ft3

DENSITY_SLINCH_PER_CU_INCH slinch/in3




ELECTRICAL_CAPACITANCE_FARAD F

ELECTRICAL_CONDUCTANCE_SIEMENS S

ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_METER V/m

ELECTRICAL_POTENTIAL_VOLT V

ELECTRICAL_RESISTANCE_OHM ohm

ENERGY_JOULE J

ENERGY_MICRO_JOULE mJ

ENERGY_KILOJOULE kJ

ENERGY_WATT_SECOND W-s

ENERGY_WATT_HOUR W-hr

ENERGY_KILOWATT_HOUR kW-hr

ENERGY_INCH_POUND_FORCE in-lbf

ENERGY_FOOT_POUND_FORCE ft-lbf

ENERGY_BTU BTU

ENERGY_ERG erg

ENERGY_ELECTRON_VOLT eV

ENTHROPY_JOULE_PER_KELVIN J/K

FILM_COEFFICIENT_WATT_PER_SQ_METER_KELVIN W/m2-K

FILM_COEFFICIENT_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT_FAHRENHEIT BTU/hr- ft2F

FILM_COEFFICIENT_FOOT_POUND_PER_SQ_FOOT_FAHRENHEIT ft- lbf/ft2F

FILM_COEFFICIENT_INCH_POUND_PER_SQ_INCH_FAHRENHEIT in- lbf/in2F

FORCE_NEWTON N

FORCE_NANONEWTON nN

FORCE_MILLINEWTON mN

FORCE_KILONEWTON kN

FORCE_POUND_FORCE lbf

FORCE_DYNE dyne

FORCE_KIP kip

FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL Pa

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL mPa

FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL kPa

FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL MPa

FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH psi

FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH ksi




FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT psf

FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT ksf

FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR bar

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR mbar

FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE atm

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_METER N/m

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_MILLIMETER N/mm

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_PER_CENTIMETER N/cm

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_PER_METER kN/m

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_INCH lbf/in

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_PER_FOOT lbf/ft

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_INCH kpi

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_PER_FOOT kpf

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_METER dyne/m

FORCE_PER_DISTANCE_DYNE_PER_MILLIMETER dyne/mm

FREQUENCY_PER_SECOND /sec

FREQUENCY_PER_MINUTE /min

FREQUENCY_PER_HOUR /hr

HEAT_CAPACITY_JOULE_PER_KILOGRAM_KELVIN J/kg-K

HEAT_CAPACITY_BTU_PER_POUND_MASS_FAHRENHEIT BTU/lbm-F

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_WATT_PER_SQ_METER W/m2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_KILOWATT_PER_SQ_METER kW/m2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_SQ_INCH

in-lbf/s- in2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_SQ_FOOT

ft-lbf/s- ft2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_BTU_PER_HOUR_SQ_FOOT BTU/hr- ft2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_AREA_HORSEPOWER_P_PER_SQ_FOOT hp/ft2

HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_WATT_PER_METER W/m

HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_KILOWATT_PER_METER kW/m

HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_METER mW/m

HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_MICROWATT_PER_MILLIMETER mW/mm

HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_INCH

in-lbf/s- in

HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_FOOT BTU/hr- ft




HEAT_FLUX_PER_DISTANCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_FOOT hp/ft

HEAT_SOURCE_WATT_PER_CU_METER W/m3

HEAT_SOURCE_KILOWATT_PER_CU_METER kW/m3

HEAT_SOURCE_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_CU_INCH in-lbf/s- in3

HEAT_SOURCE_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_CU_FOOT ft-lbf/s- ft3

HEAT_SOURCE_BTU_PER_HOUR_CU_FOOT BTU/hr- ft3

HEAT_SOURCE_HORSEPOWER_PER_CU_FOOT hp/ft3

ILLUMINANCE_LUX lx

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_METER_PER_SQ_SECOND m/s2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND km/s2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILLIMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND mm/s2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_CENTIMETER_PER_SQ_SECOND cm/s2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_INCH_PER_SQ_SECOND in/s2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_FOOT_PER_SQ_SECOND ft/s2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_SECOND mi/s2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_MILE_PER_SQ_HOUR mi/hr2

LINEAR_ACCELERATION_KILOMETER_PER_SQ_HOUR km/hr2

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_RADIAN m/rad

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_REVOLUTION m/rev

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_REVOLUTION mm/rev

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_REVOLUTION in/rev

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_FOOT_PER_REVOLUTION ft/rev

LINEAR_VELOCITY_METER_PER_SECOND m/s

LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND mm/s

LINEAR_VELOCITY_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND cm/s

LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_SECOND km/s

LINEAR_VELOCITY_KILOMETER_PER_HOUR km/hr

LINEAR_VELOCITY_INCH_PER_SECOND in/s

LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_SECOND ft/s

LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_SECOND mi/s

LINEAR_VELOCITY_MILE_PER_HOUR mi/hr

LUMINOUS_FLUX_LUMEN lm

MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_METER A/m

MAGNETIC_FLUX_WEBER Wb




MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY_TESLA T

MASS_FLOW_RATE_KILOGRAM_PER_SECOND kg/s

MASS_FLOW_RATE_GRAM_PER_SECOND g/s

MASS_FLOW_RATE_MEGAGRAM_PER_SECOND Mg/s

MASS_FLOW_RATE_POUND_MASS_PER_SECOND lbm/s

MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLUG_PER_SECOND slug/s

MASS_FLOW_RATE_SLINCH_PER_SECOND slinch/s

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_METER kg-m2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_KILOGRAM_SQ_MILLIMETER kg-mm2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_MILLIMETER g-mm2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_GRAM_SQ_CENTIMETER g-cm2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_FOOT slug-ft2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLUG_SQ_INCH slug-in2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_SLINCH_SQ_INCH slinch- in2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_INCH lbm-in2

MASS_MOMENT_OF_INERTIA_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT lbm-ft2

MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_METER kg/m2

MASS_PER_AREA_KILOGRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER kg/mm2

MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER g/mm2

MASS_PER_AREA_GRAM_PER_SQ_CENTIMETER g/cm2

MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_INCH slug/in2

MASS_PER_AREA_SLUG_PER_SQ_FOOT slug/ft2

MASS_PER_AREA_SLINCH_PER_SQ_INCH slinch/in2

MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_INCH lbm/in2

MASS_PER_AREA_POUND_MASS_PER_SQ_FOOT lbm/ft2

MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_METER kg/m

MASS_PER_LENGTH_KILOGRAM_PER_MILLIMETER kg/mm

MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_MILLIMETER g/mm

MASS_PER_LENGTH_GRAM_PER_CENTIMETER g/cm

MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_INCH slug/in

MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLUG_PER_FOOT slug/ft

MASS_PER_LENGTH_SLINCH_PER_INCH slinch/in

MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_INCH lbm/in

MASS_PER_LENGTH_POUND_MASS_PER_FOOT lbm/ft




MOMENTUM_KILOGRAM_METER_PER_SECOND kg-m/s

PER_DISTANCE_PER_METER /m

PER_DISTANCE_PER_NANOMETER /nm

PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILLIMETER /mm

PER_DISTANCE_PER_CENTIMETER /cm

PER_DISTANCE_PER_KILOMETER /km

PER_DISTANCE_PER_INCH /in

PER_DISTANCE_PER_FOOT /ft

PER_DISTANCE_PER_YARD /yd

PER_DISTANCE_PER_MILE /mi

PER_DISTANCE_PER_TENTH /tenth

PER_DISTANCE_PER_HUNDREDTH /hundredth

PER_DISTANCE_PER_MIL /mil

POWER_WATT W

POWER_KILOWATT kW

POWER_MICROWATT mW

POWER_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND in-lbf/s

POWER_FOOT_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND ft-lbf/s

POWER_BTU_PER_HOUR BTU/hr

POWER_HORSEPOWER hp

ELECTRIC_CHARGE_COULOMB C

RADIANT_INTENSITY_WATT_PER_STERADIAN W/sr

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_RADIAN N- m/rad

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_METER_PER_DEGREE N- m/deg

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_RADIAN N- mm/rad

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_DEGREE N- mm/deg

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_RADIAN kN- m/rad

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_DEGREE kN- m/deg

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_RADIAN lbf- in/rad

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_DEGREE lbf- in/deg

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_RADIAN lbf- ft/rad

ROTATIONAL_STIFFNESS_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_DEGREE lbf- ft/deg

SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_FOURTH m4

SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_FOURTH mm4




SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_FOURTH cm4

SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_FOURTH in4

SECOND_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_FOURTH ft4

THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_WATT_PER_METER_CELCIUS W/m-C

THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_KILOWATT_PER_METER_CELCIUS kW/m- C

THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_BTU_PER_HOUR_FAHRENHEIT BTU/hr- ft-F

THERMAL_CONDUCTIVITY_INCH_POUND_FORCE_PER_SECOND_INCH_FAHRENHEIT

in-lbf/s- in-F

DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_PASCAL_SECOND Pa-s

DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_KILOPASCAL_SECOND kPa-s

DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_MEGAPASCAL_SECOND MPa-s

DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POUND_FORCE_SECOND_PER_SQ_INCH lbf-s/in2

KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_METER_PER_SECOND m2/s

KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND mm2/s

KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_CENTIMETER_PER_SECOND cm2/s

KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_INCH_PER_SECOND in2/s

KINEMATIC_VISCOSITY_SQ_FOOT_PER_SECOND ft2/s

VOLUME_CU_METER m3

VOLUME_CU_MILLIMETER mm3

VOLUME_LITER L

VOLUME_MILLILITER mL

VOLUME_CU_INCH in3

VOLUME_CU_FOOT ft3

VOLUME_CU_YARD yd3

VOLUME_GALLON gallon

VOLUME_QUART quart

VOLUME_PINT pint

VOLUME_FLUID_OUNCE ounce

UNIT_NOT_SET

SCALAR_NULL

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_SECOND m3/s

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_MILLIMETER_PER_SECOND mm3/s

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_SECOND L/s

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_MILLILITER_PER_SECOND mL/s




VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_INCH_PER_SECOND in3/s

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_SECOND ft3/s

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_YARD_PER_SECOND yd3/s

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_SECOND gallon/s

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_GALLON_PER_MINUTE gallon/min

ELECTRICAL_INDUCTANCE_HENRY H

ANGLE_DEGREE_SYMBOL °

ANGLE_MINUTE_SYMBOL '

ANGLE_SECOND_SYMBOL "

DISTANCE_FOOT_SYMBOL '

DISTANCE_INCH_SYMBOL "

AREA_HECTARE hectare

FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER N/mm2

DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_POISE P

DYNAMIC_VISCOSITY_CENTIPOISE cP

VOLUME_CU_CENTIMETER cm3

ANGULAR_MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_SQ_FOOT_PER_SECOND lbm- ft2/s

ELECTRICAL_FIELD_STRENGTH_VOLT_PER_FOOT V/ft

MOMENTUM_POUND_MASS_FOOT_PER_SECOND lbm-ft/s

MAGNETIC_FIELD_STRENGTH_AMPERE_PER_FOOT A/ft

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_MINUTE m3/min

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_METER_PER_HOUR m3/hr

FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_PER_METER Pa/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_PER_METER mPa/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_PER_METER kPa/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_PER_METER MPa/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_PER_INCH psi/in

FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_PER_INCH ksi/in

FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER_FOOT psf/ft

FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_PER_FOOT ksf/ft

FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_PER_METER bar/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_PER_METER mbar/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_ATMOSPHERE_PER_METER atm/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_CU_MILLIMETER N/mm3




FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_PER_METER mmw/m

FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_PER_FOOT inw/ft

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER mmw

FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER inw

MOMENT_NEWTON_METER N-m

MOMENT_DECA_NEWTON_METER DN-m

MOMENT_HECTO_NEWTON_METER HN-m

MOMENT_KILO_NEWTON_METER kN-m

MOMENT_MEGA_NEWTON_METER MN-m

MOMENT_TERA_NEWTON_METER TN-m

MOMENT_KILOGRAM_FORCE_METER kgf-m

MOMENT_TONNE_FORCE_METER tonnef- m

MOMENT_POUND_FOOT lb-ft

MOMENT_POUND_INCH lb-in

MOMENT_TON_UK_FOOT tonuk-ft

MOMENT_TON_US_FOOT tonus-ft

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_METER_TO_THIRD m3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_MILLIMETER_TO_THIRD mm3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_CENTIMETER_TO_THIRD cm3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_INCH_TO_THIRD in3

FIRST_MOMENT_OF_AREA_FOOT_TO_THIRD ft3

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_METER_TO_SIXTH m6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_MILLIMETER_TO_SIXTH mm6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_CENTIMETER_TO_SIXTH cm6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_INCH_TO_SIXTH in6

TORSIONAL_WARPING_CONSTANT_FOOT_TO_SIXTH ft6

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_LITER_PER_MINUTE L/min

VOLUME_FLOW_RATE_CU_FOOT_PER_MINUTE ft3/min

LINEAR_VELOCITY_FOOT_PER_MINUTE ft/min

TIME_FORTNIGHT ftnt

SLOPE_ANGLE_RADIAN rad

SLOPE_ANGLE_DEGREE deg

SLOPE_ANGLE_MINUTE min

SLOPE_ANGLE_SECOND sec




SLOPE_PERCENT %

SLOPE_PER_THOUSAND ‰

SLOPE_RATIO_SEPARATOR /

SLOPE_RATIO_METER_IN_METER m / m

SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_METER cm / m

SLOPE_RATIO_CENTIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER cm / cm

SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_METER mm / m

SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_CENTIMETER mm / cm

SLOPE_RATIO_MILLIMETER_IN_MILLIMETER mm / mm

SLOPE_RATIO_YARD_IN_YARD yd / yd

SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_YARD ft / yd

SLOPE_RATIO_FOOT_IN_FOOT ft / ft

SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_YARD in / yd

SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_FOOT in / ft

SLOPE_RATIO_INCH_IN_INCH in / in

ENUM_EACH ea

ENUM_PER_TEN /tn

ENUM_PER_HUNDRED %

ENUM_PERCENT %

ENUM_PER_THOUSAND ‰

ENUM_TEN tn

ENUM_HUNDRED cn

ENUM_THOUSAND th

ENUM_DOZEN dz

ENUM_PER_DOZEN /dz

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_RADIAN mm/rad

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_METER_PER_DEGREE m/deg

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_MILLIMETER_PER_DEGREE mm/deg

LINEAR_PER_ANGULAR_INCH_PER_DEGREE in/deg

FORCE_PER_AREA_PASCAL_GAUGE Pag

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIPASCAL_GAUGE MPag

FORCE_PER_AREA_KILOPASCAL_GAUGE psig

FORCE_PER_AREA_MEGAPASCAL_GAUGE MPag

FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_INCH_GAUGE psig




FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_INCH_GAUGE ksig

FORCE_PER_AREA_POUND_FORCE_PER_SQ_FOOT_GAUGE psfg

FORCE_PER_AREA_KIP_PER_SQ_FOOT_GAUGE ksfg

FORCE_PER_AREA_BAR_GAUGE barg

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIBAR_GAUGE mbarg

FORCE_PER_AREA_NEWTON_PER_SQ_MILLIMETER_GAUGE N/mm2g

FORCE_PER_AREA_MILLIMETERS_OF_WATER_GAUGE mmwg

FORCE_PER_AREA_INCHES_OF_WATER_GAUGE inwg

NPD_INCH in

NPD_MILLIMETER mm

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_METER N-m/m

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_METER_PER_MILLIMETER N- m/mm

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_NEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_METER N- mm/m

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_METER_PER_MILLIMETER

kN- m/mm

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KILONEWTON_MILLIMETER_PER_METER

kN- mm/m

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_INCH lbf-ft/in

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_INCH lbf-in/in

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_FOOT_PER_FOOT lbf-ft/ft

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_POUND_FORCE_INCH_PER_FOOT lbf-in-ft

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_FOOT kip-ft/ft

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_FOOT_PER_INCH kip-ft/in

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_FOOT kip-in/ft

MOMENT_PER_DISTANCE_KIP_FORCE_INCH_PER_INCH kip-in/in

WIRE_GAUGE_AWG AWG

WIRE_GAUGE_MILLIMETER mm

WIRE_GAUGE_INCH in

WIRE_GAUGE_MIL mil

WIRE_GAUGE_CIRCULAR_MIL cmil

WIRE_GAUGE_KILO_CIRCULAR_MIL kcmil

WIRE_GAUGE_SQUARE_MILLIMETER mm2

NPD_NATIVE_INCH native

NPD_NATIVE native


A P P E N D I X C

You must consider naming limitations when creating and modifying data used by the software. Naming limitations include restrictions on the length and content of names, such as database table, view, and column names. These restrictions also affect reference data names.

Both SQL Server and Oracle use keywords and future keywords. Check the SQL Server or Oracle documentation before you choose names for your metadata objects so that the names you choose do not clash with SQL or Oracle keywords.

The following table shows the name length limitations in the reference data.

Name Maximum for SQL Server Maximum for Oracle

Codelist name 128 characters 30 characters

Codelist long or short description

255 characters 255 characters

Property name 23 characters 23 characters

Interface name 23 characters 23 characters

Part class name (sheet name)

121 characters 23 characters

Piping commodity name 128 characters 128 characters

Oracle allows only 30 characters for the database name of a table, view, or store procedure, while SQL Server allows 128 characters.

Do not use special characters in names. Special characters include: | . - ! ? + ' % , ; & ~ * < >

See Also

Appendix: Select Lists (Codelists) (on page 133) Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data (on page 49)

Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data

Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data



A P P E N D I X D

The end-user software delivery includes additional reference data and samples.

Additional Data

The additional workbooks are delivered in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\AdditionalDataFiles folder. These files are not bulk loaded. If you want to use this data, you will need to bulk load the workbooks into your Catalog database. The following table summarizes the additional data files.

File name Description

Delta folders Contains delta files for migrating reference data between versions of the software. The delta files follow a naming convention to assist you in migration. The name consists of: 1) a number to indicate order of bulkloading, 2) an abbreviation of the bulkload mode, 3) the version- to-version upgrade, and 4) the name of the original workbook. Hence, for the V2007 to V2009 delta upgrade, the file name is 1_AMD_Delta_2007_2009_Workbookname.xls.

Drawings- ExtendCustomAttributes.xls

Provides a way to add custom attributes in the Drawings and Reports task. For more information, see the Drawings and Reports Reference Data Guide.

Equipment_SE.xls, Equipment_SE_Sym.xls

Provides Solid Edge equipment parts and symbols.

GIF files Provides graphics for structural cross sections.

HS_Bline files Provides Cooper B-Line cable tray parts for hangers and supports.

HS_Correspondence Provides ship-style generic supports.

HS_GenericAssy files Provides ship-style generic supports.

HS_GenericParts files Provides ship-style generic supports.

HS_Halfen_Assy files Provides Halfen assemblies for hangers and supports.

HS_Halfen_PC files Provides Halfen Powerclick parts for hangers and supports.

HS_HgrAisc_Deprecated.xls Provides parts for hangers and supports based on the American Institute of Steel Construction standard.

HS_HgrAust-05_Deprecated.xls

Provides parts for hangers and supports based on the Australian Steel Table, 2005.

You must bulk load StructCrossSections- Euro.xls with this workbook.

HS_HgrEuro_OTUA_Deprecated.xls

Provides parts for hangers and supports based on the European OTUA standard.

Appendix: Other Reference Data




You must bulk load StructCrossSections- Japan.xls with this workbook.

HS_HVAC_Assy.xls HS_HVAC_Assy_Codelist.xls

HS_HVAC_Parts.xls HS_HVAC_Parts_Codelist.xls

HS_Lisega.xls, HS_Lisega_Codelist.xls

Provides parts for hangers and supports from the Lisega catalog.

HS_Marine.xls HS_Marine_Assy.xls HS_Marine_Assy_Codelist.xls

HS_Power1_Assy.xls HS_Power1_Assy_Codelist.xls HS_Power1_Assy_Parts.xls

HS_PSL.xls HS_PSL_Codelist.xls

HS_RestraintSupports.xls

HS_ShipSteel.xls Provides ship-style generic supports.

HS_Str-AISC-LRFD-3.0.xls, HS_Str-AISC-Metric.xls, HS_Str-AISC-SHAPES-3.1.xls, HS_Str-AUST-05.xls, HS_Str-AUST.xls, HS_Str-BS.xls, HS_Str-Chile.xls, HS_Str-China-2006.xls, HS_Str-CISC-7.2.xls, HS_Str-CISC-8.1.xls, HS_Str-EURO-OTUA-2002.xls, HS_Str-Euro.xls, HS_Str-Japan-2005.xls, HS_Str-Japan.xls, HS_Str-Russia.xls, Hs_Str-SAISC-2002.xls




HS_Struct-AISC-LRFD-3.0.xls, HS_Struct-AISC-Metric.xls, HS_Struct-AISC-SHAPES-3.1.xls HS_Struct-AUST-05.xls, HS_Struct-AUST.xls, HS_Struct-BS.xls, HS_Struct-Chile.xls, HS_Struct-China-2006.xls, HS_Struct-CISC-7.2.xls, HS_Struct-CISC-8.1.xls, HS_Struct-EURO-OTUA-2002.xls HS_Struct-Euro.xls, HS_Struct-Japan-2005.xls, HS_Struct-Japan.xls, HS_Struct-Russia.xls, Hs_Struct-SAISC-2002.xls

HS_TrayShip.xls, HS_TrayShip_Assy.xls, HS_TrayShip_Assy_Codelist.xls, HS_TrayShip_Codelist.xls

HS_Util_Metric.xls, HS_Util_Metric_Codelist.xls

Provides parts for utility hangers and supports. The data is metric.

StructCrossSections files Provides structural cross section data based on different standards.

StructEmbedments.xls Provides embedded plate assembly for demonstration of importing embedded plates from CIMsteel.

StructMemPartFireproofing.xls Provides properties for fireproofing structural members.

Sample Reference Data

Sample reference data is delivered in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder. You can use these samples as a guide when customizing the data. The table below lists the delivered samples.


1S6470 Catalog.xls 1S6470 Specification.xls

Provides a representative bio- pharm piping specification (1S6470), which allows you to set up and test different types of clamps.

4C0844 Catalog.xls 4C0844 Specification.xls

9L3760 Catalog.xls 9L3760 Specification.xls

Provides a representative hub and clamp specification (9L3760), used in the oilfield industry.




Additional data for ASME B16.47 Flanges Catalog.xls Additional data for ASME B16.47 Flanges Specification.xls Automated Selection of Parts at Spec Break Rules.xls

Axial Roof Ventilator BD40C Sample Data.xls

Provides an axial roof ventilator (HVAC equipment).

Bay Light Fixture Sample Data.xls Provides a bay light fixture (electrical equipment).

Bio Pharm Catalog.xls Provides biopharmaceutical data.

Bio Pharm Specification.xls Provides biopharmaceutical specifications and rules.

Bolt Commodity Code Substitution.xls Provides a representative Bolt Commodity Substitution rule.

Bolt Diameter Equivalence.xls Provides a representative Bolt Diameter Equivalence rule.

BoltSelection Filter for Nozzles Sample data.xls

Provides data for nozzles that require special bolting.

Cable Tray 90 Degree Expanding Reducing Elbow Sample Data.xls

Provides sample data for cable tray expanding and reducing elbows.

Cable Tray Additional Part Data.xls Provides Cooper B-Line cable tray specifications and data.

Cable Tray Barrier Parts.xls Provides cable tray barrier parts

Cable Tray Around Vessels.xls Provides data for vessel tray systems.

Cable Tray Reducing Tee Sample Data.xls Provides cable tray reducing tee data.

Cable Tray Sample Data for Variable Angle Bends.xls

Provides adjustable angle cable tray bend fittings.

Center Web Saddle Component Sample Data.xls

Provides a center web saddle assembly for use with pumps.

Centrifugal Fan BIA SWSI Sample Data.xls Provides a centrifugal fan (HVAC equipment).

Clamp-on Flow Sensor Sample Data.xls Provides representative data for a clamp-on sensor, which is an instrument placed on a pipe.

ComponentInsulationExclusion.xls Provides data for excluding components from having insulation.

Conduit SampleData.xls Includes part information for electrical metallic tubing and PVC conduit.

CustomScaleCodelist.xls

Direct Drive Tubeaxial Fan TA Sample Data.xls

Provides a tube axial fan (HVAC equipment).




E[3-digit number] Equipment Sample Data.xls

Provides data for equipment assemblies.

Electrical Disconnect Switch Sample Data.xls Provides data for an electrical disconnect switch assembly.

Electrical Equipment.xls Provides miscellaneous electrical equipment including a transformer, motor, control switch, and variable frequency drive.

Electrical Panelboard Sample Data.xls Provides an electrical panelboard.

Emergency Beacon Sample Data.xls Provides an emergency beacon light (electrical equipment).

Equipment Ends Component Sample Data.xls

Provides data for different equipment end type assemblies.

Field Lining Thickness.xls Provides sample field lining thickness data for use with the 1C0100 and 1C0101 specifications.

Flange Insulation Kits Sample Data.xls Provides data for flange insulation kits to test bolt length calculations.

Flared Piping Catalog.xls Provides catalog data for a piping spec using flared pipe.

Flared Piping Specification.xls Provides specification data for a piping spec using flared pipe.

FlexibleHoseAssemblyRuleData.xls Assembly Rule Data for the Route Flexible Pipe command is Piping

FlexibleHoseCodelists.xls Select lists used for the Route Flexible Pipe command in Piping

Fluorescent Light Fixture Sample Data.xls Provides a fluorescent light fixture assembly (electrical equipment).

GasketSelection Filter for Nozzles Sample Data.xls

Provides data for nozzles that require a special gasket.

Handrail Mount Fluorescent Light Fixture Sample Data.xls

Hatch Cover Sample Data.xls

High Mast Flood Light Fixture Sample Data.xls

High Pressure Blower Sample Data.xls

Horizontal Pump [Type] Sample Data.xls Provides data for horizontal pumps of various types.

Horizontal Vessel Nested Heads Sample Data.xls

Provides data for a horizontal vessel assembly (variable head options).

Use this workbook as a sample when you want to add customized user attributes to certain




objects. An example is adding attributes to pipe runs.

HVAC Sample Equipments.xls

Hvac SampleData.xls

IFCCustomInterfaces.xls

Instrument Sample Data.xls

Instrument Transmitter Sample Data.xls

Jacketed Piping Catalog.xls

Jacketed Piping Specification.xls

Lighting Fixture BH Type 1 Sample Data.xls

Lighting Fixture BHAR Sample Data.xls

Lighting Fixture BHDR Sample Data.xls

Lighting Fixture BTAR Sample Data.xls

Lighting Fixture BTDR Sample Data.xls

Manhole Cover Sample Data.xls

Marine Hatch Cover Sample Data.xls

McGill HVAC Catalog.xls

Metstrut Cable Tray Data.xls

Non Radial Branches.xls

Offset Web Saddle Component Sample Data.xls

Pipe Bending Manufacturability rules.xls

Pipe Sleeve with Puddle Flange Sample Data.xls

Piping Commodity Procurement Data.xls

Piping Specialty Sample Data.xls

Pressure Transmitter Sample Data.xls

Pullpit or Manhole Sample Data.xls

Reportable Commodities for Filters.xls

Roof Exhauster ACX Sample Data.xls

Roof Exhauster ATB Sample Data.xls

Ruskin HVAC Sample Data.xls

Sample Codelists.xls

Sample Data Flange Face Adapter.xls

Sample Data for 45 Degree Angle Valve.xls




Sample Data for Angle Lift Check Valve.xls

Sample Data for Butterfly Valve.xls

Sample Data for Cable Tray Parts.xls

Sample data for Cable tray Riser Box.xls

Sample Data for Catch Basin Type F.xls

Sample Data for Catch Basin.xls

Sample Data for Check Valve with External Spring Operator.xls

Sample data for Concentric Reducer Biological-pharmaceutical.xls

Sample Data for Coupling.xls

Sample Data for Deck Scupper.xls

Sample Data for Detailed Valves.xls

Sample Data for Double Basket Strainers.xls

Sample Data for Dresser Coupling.xls

Sample Data for Drilling Templates of Flanges.xls

Sample Data for Elbows.xls

Sample Data for Exhaust Heads.xls

Sample data for Expansion Joints.xls

Sample Data for Filters.xls

Sample Data for Fire and Safety Symbols.xls

Sample Data for Fitting Reducer.xls

Sample Data for Fittings.xls

Sample Data for Flame Arresters.xls

Sample Data for Flanged Elbow-Pipet.xls

Sample Data for Flanged Olet.xls

Sample Data for Flex Coupling.xls

Sample Data for Fluorescent Lighting Fixture without Reflector.xls

Sample Data for Foam Chamber.xls

Sample Data for GooseNeck Bull Plug.xls

Sample Data for Grade Ring.xls

Sample Data for Half Coupling.xls

Sample Data for Hose Connection.xls




Sample Data for Hose Couplings.xls

Sample Data for Hydraulic Flanges.xls

Sample Data for Jacketed Piping Symbols.xls

Sample Data for JIS Fittings.xls

Sample Data for Lap Joint Flanges.xls

Sample Data for Latrolet.xls

Sample Data for Long Sweep Tees.xls

Sample Data for Long Tangent Elbows.xls

Sample Data for Manhole.xls

Sample Data for Mining Symbols.xls

Sample Data for Mitered Elbows.xls

Sample Data for MultiCableTransit.xls

Sample Data for On-the-fly Instruments.xls

Sample Data for On-the-fly Specialties.xls

Sample Data for Open and Blind Spacer set.xls

Sample Data for Orifice Flanges with Multi Taps.xls

Sample Data for Orifice Flanges with Two Taps.xls

Sample Data for Rupture Disc with Holder.xls

Sample Data for Saddles.xls

Sample Data for Sight Flow Indicators.xls

Sample Data for Silencers.xls

Sample Data for Siphons.xls

Sample Data for Spectacle Blind.xls

Sample Data for Steam Traps.xls

Sample Data for Strainers.xls

Sample Data for Street Elbows.xls

Sample Data for Surface Mounted Components.xls

Sample Data for Surface Mounted Doubler Plate.xls

Sample Data for Surface Mounted Insert Plate.xls




Sample Data for Surface Mounted Pipe Sleeve With Seal.xls

Sample Data for Surface Mounted Pipe Sleeve.xls

Sample Data for Tapered Spacers.xls

Sample Data for Tee with asymmetric branch.xls

Sample Data for Trimmable Olets.xls

Sample Data for Trimmable Reducing Tee.xls

Sample Data for True Wye.xls

Sample data for Underground and Sanitary Symbols.xls

Sample Data for Vacuum Piping.xls

Sample Data for Valve Operators.xls

Sample Data for Valves.xls

Sample Data for Versionable Pipe Specs.xls

Sample Data for Zero Radius Elbow.xls

Sample Data Piping Specification.xls

Sample Data Torus Miter Equipment Components.xls

Sample End Generic Data for Socket Welded Fittings based on Socket Wall Thickness.xls

Sequence Electrical Parts Naming Rules AMD mode.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type A Component Sample Data.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type B Component Sample Data.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type C Component Sample Data.xls

Skirt Base Plate Type D Component Sample Data.xls

Slip Fitter Flood Light Fixture Sample Data.xls

Socket Offset Rule.xls

Spiral Stair Tank Equipment Comp Sample Data.xls




Spiral Stair Tank Equipment Sample Data.xls

Stanchion Fluorescent Type A Handrail Mount Light Sample Data.xls

Stanchion Fluorescent Type B Handrail Mount Light Sample Data.xls

Standard Nozzle Data.xls

Street Light Fixture Sample Data.xls

Support Legs Component Sample Data.xls

Switch Gear Equipment Sample Data.xls

Switch Gear Sections Component Sample Data.xls

SystemDotNetNamingRules.xls

Systems.xls

SystemUserDefinedDefaultProperties.xls Provides default properties for piping, electrical, and conduit systems.

Titus HVAC Catalog.xls

TJ Cope CableTray Sample Data.xls Provides sample data for cable tray from the TJ Cope catalog.

Union Fitting Assembly Data.xls Provide data for union fitting assemblies.

Utility Blower BIUB Sample Data.xls Provides a utility blower (HVAC equipment).

Vertical Pump Symbol OH3 Sample Data.xls Provides data for vertical pumps (API 610 Type OH3).

Vertical Pump Type [Type] Sample Data.xls Provides data for vertical suspended pumps, single and double casings.

Vertical Vessel Nested Heads Sample Data.xls

Provides data for a vertical vessel assembly (variable head options).

Before bulk loading this workbook, you must bulk load the Equipment Ends Component Sample Data.xls workbook.

Victaulic Catalog.xls

Victaulic Codelists.xls

Victaulic Plant Rules.xls

Victaulic Spec A4.xls

Victaulic Spec A11.xls

Wall Exhauster AWX Sample Data.xls Provides a centrifugal wall exhauster (HVAC equipment).

Wear Plate Equipment Sample Data.xls



Templates

Templates for defining your own reference data are delivered in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\Templates folder. The templates are for the piping and equipment disciplines.

See Also Delivered Excel Workbooks (on page 50)


A P P E N D I X E

This section lists frequently-asked questions about reference data.

Catalog Database

Q: How do I create a new Catalog?

Using the Bulkload utility, you can create a starting Catalog database and Catalog Schema database from a template file named AppRepos.dat for Microsoft SQL Server database or Apprepos.dmp for Oracle databases.

When using the Bulkload utility to create a new catalog, you must use the AppRepos.dat template file to create the Catalog Schema. This file is located in [Product Directory]\DatabaseTemplates on the administrator computer.

Do NOT use the template file named CatalogDB.dat to create a new catalog with the Bulkload utility.

For more information, see Bulk Load Database with Data (on page 82).

Custom Interfaces

Q: What is an interface?

An interface is a collection of attributes. For more information about interfaces, see Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces (on page 61) and Custom Interfaces Sheet (on page 68).

Q: What is the Custom Interfaces sheet for?

The Custom Interfaces sheet provides a method to define user-defined interfaces and add attributes to classes. It also provides a mechanism to link between class attributes and parametric symbol arguments.

Q: How can I create a new interface?

You can create a new interface using the Custom Interfaces sheet and then add it to the Catalog Schema using the Bulkload utility. You can also add an interface by adding an attribute associated with the interface to an existing class sheet and running the Bulkload utility in the modify mode.

Q: Do I need to add the letter A in the first column to add the new interface?

No. The Bulkload utility does not recognize the update modes for the Custom Interfaces sheet. It tries to relate the interface to the classes in the workbook.

Q: Do I need to synchronize the Model with the Catalog after adding new interfaces?

Yes. If the new interfaces were created on existing classes, then you need to synchronize the Model with the Catalog database.

Q: Do I need to re-generate the Reports databases after adding new interfaces?

Yes. You must re-create the Reports databases in order to query or report on the new attributes. You must first synchronize the Model with the Catalog.

Appendix: Questions and Answers about Reference Data



Q: How can I delete user interfaces?

You can delete an existing interface by typing the letter D in the first column of the interface row and running the Bulkload utility in the delete mode. This action does not actually delete the interface from the Catalog Schema; it removes the interface from all of its implemented classes.

Q: What is the limitation of an interface name?

The interface names cannot exceed 23 characters. The Bulkload utility will not include warnings in the log file if interface names exceed this limit. For more information about limitations on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).

Q: Can I add additional attributes on existing user interfaces?

Yes. You can add attributes to existing interfaces by typing A in the first column of the rows to add.

Q: Do I need to synchronize the Model with the Catalog database after adding new attributes on existing interface?

After adding new attributes to an existing interface, the user must synchronize the Model with the Catalog database. Also, you must re-create the Reports databases in order to query and report on the new attributes.

Q: Can I modify any of the data in existing attributes?

No, you cannot modify existing attributes after bulk loading them.

Q: What is the limitation of an attribute name?

Attribute names cannot exceed 23 characters. The Bulkload utility will not include warnings in the log file if attribute names exceed this limit. For more information about limitations on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).

Q: Must the attribute name be unique for all interfaces?

No. An attribute with the same name can exist on more than one interface.

On a part class sheet, you can scope the user attributes based on their interfaces and symbol parameters. The scoping syntax is: Interface::UserAttribute<Symbol Parameter>.

Q: Can I create a new interface with the same name as a deleted interface?

No. If you "delete" an interface and want to re-bulk load it with new properties, you must change the interface name. However, you can restore back the deleted interface by re- bulk loading it with the same attribute.

Q: Why does the system display all the attributes for that interface if the object uses only one of them?

When an object uses a single attribute from an interface, the object also inherits all the attributes for that interface regardless of whether the object uses the other attributes.

Q: I want to add user attributes to a class, such as pipe runs. How do I do this?

Open the Systems.xls file, which is delivered in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\DataFiles\BulkLoad\SampleDataFiles folder. This file provides a sample that you can follow. Create a custom interface, and then map the class name to your new interface. For more information, see Add User Attributes to a Class (on page 67).



Codelists

Q: Where are the user-defined codelist tables stored?

User-defined codelist tables are added to the Catalog Schema under the User Defined Package namespace. For more information about namespaces, see Select List (Codelist) Namespaces (on page 144).

Q: Do I need to add the letter A to add the codelist table?

Yes. The system creates the codelist table using the first column name. You must use the letter A to add the codelist values into the codelist table. The name for a codelist is not necessarily the sheet name in the workbook.

Q: Can the user create a hierarchical codelist table (a two- level codelist, for example)?

Yes. For example, the Commodity Option codelist in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook is a hierarchical codelist. You can find this workbook in the [Product Directory]\CatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles folder.

You can also create hierarchical codelists using the Catalog task functionality.

Q: Can I add new codelist values to existing codelist tables?

Yes, you can add simple codelists (without a hierarchy) unless otherwise specified on the sheet. For existing hierarchical codelists, you can add the lowest level in a hierarchical codelist, but you must not add any higher levels in the codelist.

Q: Can I start the Head Definition at row 1 on the Excel sheet?

Yes. The Head Definition can start at row 1.

Q: Why can I use the same codelist values in some of the codelists?

The codelist values are only required to be unique in each hierarchy level.

Q: What does the Sort Order column do?

The values in this column specify the order in which to display items in the software.

Q: Can I delete a codelist table?

You cannot delete a codelist table. However, you can delete entries in the selected codelist table by running the Bulkload utility in the delete mode. The software marks the selected codelist entries as deleted.

Q: What happens if codelist values are deleted?

The software marks them as deleted items.

Q: Can I modify the short description of a codelist?

Yes. You can modify the short description of a codelist.

Q: Does the name of the codelist have to be unique?

The name for each codelist must be unique in the Catalog Schema.

Q: What is the namespace for user-defined codelists?

The codelist namespace for user-defined codelists is UDP (User Defined Package).

Q: What is the limitation on a codelist name?

The limit for codelist names depends on the server type, SQL Server or Oracle. For more information about limitations on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).

Q: What is the limitation on a codelist description?

The limit for the long and short descriptions in a codelist is 255 characters. For more information about limitations on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).



Part Classes

Q: Does the Custom Interfaces sheet need to be in the same workbook as the part classes?

Yes. The Custom Interfaces sheet must reside in the same workbook as the part classes that you are bulk loading.

Q: Do I need to synchronize the Model with the Catalog if I edit a part class?

If you modify an existing class definition, you must run the Synchronize Model with Catalog command on any model that has occurrences of the class that you modified.

Q: How can I delete classes?

You can delete an existing class by typing the letter D in the first column of the Class Type Definition row and running the Bulkload utility in the delete mode. This action does not actually delete the class from the Catalog Schema. The software marks the class as a deleted item. You cannot reuse the part class name in the same database set.

After deleting the class from the catalog, you also must synchronize the model with the catalog in order to remove all occurrences of the class from the model.

Q: Must the UserClassName field be unique for a class?

Yes. The UserClassName for a class must be unique. If it is not unique, the software will have a problem displaying the name in the graphical user interface.

Q: Does the order of the attributes in the class sheet matter?

Order of the attributes (columns) is not important. The software uses the names of the attributes regardless of the order on the sheet.

Q: What is the length limitation on a piping commodity code?

The limit for piping commodity codes is 128 characters. For more information about limitations on names, see Appendix: Name Limitations in Reference Data (on page 293).

Structure

Q: Can I add additional occurrence attributes on a Cross Section class?

The Cross Section classes do not support occurrence attributes.

Q: Can I edit the Class Type Definition on a cross section class?

You can only edit the SymbolIcon file name. You cannot modify the Reference Standard on any cross section class.

For more information about structural reference data, see the Structure Reference Data Guide available from the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

GUIDs (Globally Unique Identifiers)

Q: What is the purpose of the GUIDs sheet?

GUIDs are registry identifiers for the part classes and interfaces. The primary purpose of the GUIDs is to create a connection between part classes in the Catalog database and the occurrences created in the model from those part classes. Do not modify the contents of the GUIDs sheets in the delivered sample workbooks or in workbooks that you have used to create a Catalog database set for a project. For more information about GUIDs, see GUIDs Sheet (on page 70).

See Also Understanding Reference Data (on page 25)


A P P E N D I X F

Metadata consistency is important when copying objects between models with different catalogs. This topic discusses how to ensure that the metadata in both the source Catalog Schema and the target Catalog Schema is consistent.

The two catalogs must be consistent in their schema and in their data. However, exceptions exist. For example, only the object name for a part must be the same. The rest of the data for a part does not need to be consistent.

While reading the following information about data consistency, it is helpful to know the difference between user classes and system classes in reference data.

System classes are modeled during design time using the Rose model. User classes are those classes that the user creates by bulkloading part sheets. Furthermore, there are two types of user classes that are created during the processing of the part class sheets during bulkloading. The first type is a definition class, and the other type is an occurrence class. The definition class name appears in the Catalog task and in the Catalog browser. You can specify the definition class name in the UserClassName field on the part class sheets. The occurrence class name appears in the business object hierarchy on the Object Type tab on the Filter Properties dialog boxes. You can specify the occurrence class name in the OccClassName field on the part class sheets.

In the delivered reference data, the definition class name and occurrence class name for a part class are often the same name. For example, on the 3WayBallValve part class sheet in Piping Catalog.xls, the definition class name and occurrence class name are both specified as 3-Way Ball Valve.

Catalog Schema Consistency

The user classes must have the same CLSID. A CLSID is an identifier that is assigned when you specify the schema.

Any of the system classes (non-virtual) that implement virtual interfaces (during the bulkload process) in the source catalog should have the same set of implemented interfaces in the target schema.

The user interfaces that are intended to exist in both catalogs must have the same IID. An IID is an identifier that is assigned when you specify the schema.

The user properties that are intended to exist in both catalogs must have the same DispID. A DispID is an identifier that is assigned when you specify the schema.

Each user attribute definition in the original schema should match with the definition in the target catalog’s schema. User attribute definition includes its Type, UnitsType, and PrimaryUnits attributes. For metadata consistency, we are concerned about the following attributes: Name, Type, UnitsType, PrimaryUnits, and Codelist.

User attributes that are codelisted should have the codelist table exist in the target catalog schema. In addition, the target schema should have all the values of the codelist table in the source schema. The valueIDs should match in both schemas. The short and long strings can be different.

Properties that are mapped to symbol parameters must exist in both catalogs.

Properties associated to an interface that exists only in the source model will not be exposed in the target model, even though the value of the property from the source object will probably be copied.

Appendix: Metadata Consistency

Appendix: Metadata Consistency


Properties associated to an interface that does not exist in the source model will be exposed in the target model, but the values will be NULL.

Catalog Consistency

Catalog objects that are related to model objects being copied must exist in the target catalog and must have used the same internal name as in the source catalog.

Inconsistencies between catalogs can arise in the following areas:

User class definitions

Custom class definitions

User interface definitions

User attribute definitions

Symbols

When the source and target catalog schemas are different, the case may be that a definition exists in the source but not in the target. Or, a definition exists in the target but not in the source. Or, the definitions exist in both the source and target, but the definitions are different. The procedures to remedy these situations depend on the exact details of the situation.

If you copy a part with different values in the target catalog and the source catalog, the target or source set of values is used for the part when it is placed in the target model.

For assistance with metadata, contact Intergraph Process, Power & Marine Support.

See Also Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces (on page 61) Describing the Common Sheets in the Workbooks (on page 57)


A P P E N D I X G

General Setup The setup instructions are global for the SmartPlant Reference data. They apply to all of the specs, projects, and product groups in SmartPlant Reference Data.

General configuration settings are defined in the SP3D 10.01 General Configs dialog box. To display this dialog box, click SP3D Interface > SP3D 10 Config.

For the delivered standard database, the DIN specs require a Transfer Type that will need this item be set to Y, but the PIP specs (ANSI) will have a Transfer Type that will allow this be set to N. You can create any Transfer Type that meets your needs.

Appendix: Importing SmartPlant Reference Data Specs into SmartPlant 3D



Exporting from the SmartPlant Reference Data Standard Database

The Standard Database holds the information that is compatible with the SmartPlant 3D specifications. That includes codelists, plant level reference data and rules, specification-level rules, part data in the catalog, generic piping component data, and piping specification data. The general idea is that all that information is created, managed and modified in SmartPlant Reference Data, and then exported to SmartPlant 3D catalogs when needed.

Output from SmartPlant Reference Data is Excel sheets which can be manually bulkloaded into SmartPlant 3D. These Excel sheets should not be modified prior to downloading, because then you lose control of further modifications. Output Excel file names are not by default what you see in this document, but you can rename them to meet your requirements.

Export is done with export job definitions in SmartPlant Reference Data. This is done using the SP3D 20.01 Export Jobs dialog box available from SP 3D Interface > SP 3D 20 Transfer.

The export job definition is different for ANSI specs and for EN/DIN specs. This appendix does not deal with ANSI specs.

General Notes

It is better to start with a new destination. The data that you input there is for documentation purposes only, but the destination itself holds a hook to inventory. If you export again to the same destination, you might not get a full export but an incremental export related to what you exported before (that information is stored in the inventory). If you start with a new destination, you can be sure that inventory is empty.

You create a destination in the form: “SP 3D Interface” – “SP 3D 10 Config” – “SP 3D 10.05 Destinations”

You can empty a destination in the form: “SP 3D Interface” – “SP 3D 20 Transfer” – “SP 3D 20.02 Destination Data”

To make sure that your export is not incremental, check the first column in your Excel sheets. There should be only “A” letters and not A,M and D –letters. The problem arises if you try to append a worksheet with A,M,D letters, the end result is unpredictable and very likely bad.

Use Validate Job and Start Job to validate and run these jobs. The Progress tab tells you how the run went.

If you use Write XLS as the job goal, you need to click Cancel after each run when it is finished. If you do not, your next run, even for a different export, will end in an error because of this unfinished export job.



EN/DIN Specifications The transfer types that need to be extracted from Standard Database are as follows:

SDB_CODE_LISTS - All codelists.

SDB_GENERIC_DATA - Generic dimensional data for EN/DIN specifications.

SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL - EN/DIN specs.

The following dialog boxes specify the export job definitions for each of these exports. Matters of interest in these dialog boxes include:

Destination - Specifies where you are going to use the export. If changes are made to data in the standard database and exported to a destination, worksheets in Add/Modify/Delete can be created based on previously exported data for the specific destination.

Bulkload mode - The default value is ADD_MODIFY_DELETE mode.

Item Mapping - Select SDB_ITEM_MAPPING or DIN_MAPPING depending on the export. SDB_CODE_LISTS will use SDB_ITEM_MAPPING, SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL and SDB_GENERIC_DATA will use SDB_DIN_MAPPING

Template - The template is automatically populated when Item Mapping is chosen.

Transfer type - Predefined sets of worksheets to be exported.

Job goal - Select write XLS for a standalone job. The other job goals are designed for the upcoming .NET interface.

Config - Select SDB config for everything.

Sheet config - This is not an input field, but is typed in automatically based on other selections

Use Validate Job and Start Job to validate and run these jobs. The Progress Tab tells you how the run went.



SDB_CODE_LISTS - Selected Sheets tab gets populated based on the Transfer Type in the upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.



SDB_DIN_CODE_LISTS - Selected Sheets tab gets populated based on the Transfer Type in the upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.

SDB_GENERIC_DATA - This is a specific transfer type not related to any particular piping specification. Use DIN_MAPPING to get EN/DIN standard data.



The selected Sheets tab is populated based on the selections in the upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.

SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL - Selected Sheets tab gets populated based on the Transfer Type in the upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.

The selected Sheets tab is populated based on the selections in the upper part of the dialog box after you click Save.

On the Selected Spec Items tab you need to select the specs to export. You can select them one by one, or you can select them all with the Insert Specs command and then delete the unnecessary specs with the Delete Record command. The Delete Record command is on the top bar of the screen.



The selected Idents tab gets populated with idents when you click Validate Job or Start Job.



Bulkloading into SmartPlant 3D In order to use specs in SmartPlant 3D, you need to bulkload them into a catalog. Start with an empty catalog that you can create with SmartPlant 3D tools. You can use either Project Manager or the Database Wizard for that. For the catalog template in the case of an empty catalog, you need to use the AppRepos template. For further information how catalogs are created in SmartPlant 3D, please refer to the SmartPlant 3D documentation.

For successful creation of a catalog, you need to follow the correct order, correct bulkloading methods, and you need to bulkload all the necessary files needed for a certain discipline.

This document deals only with the data needed for piping discipline.

The files that you need to bulkload are slightly different for ANSI and EN/DIN specs. This appendix does not deal with ANSI specs.



EN/DIN Bulkloading You need to bulkload files in the following manner. Bulkloading is presented below in two steps for clarity. You can combine these two step in one bulkload task because the software automatically selects the correct order.

First:

sdb_code_lists

Codelists are bulkloaded using a different section of the Bulkload dialog box. The order of those files is not significant if there is no overlapping data. You will get warnings of overlapping data if the same data is present in multiple files.

Second:

generic naming rules.xls

insulation data.xls

sdb_generic_data

SDB_DIN_ALL_WO_CDL



For SmartPlant 3D to work, you need to have generic naming rules in the catalog. For the piping discipline, you also need insulation data for modeling. Those do not come from SDB, but they are delivered with SmartPlant 3D catalog data. Intergraph Corporation also recommends bulkloading Reports.xls.

For EN/DIN specific data, you load generic data and the actual spec data.

These are the requirements for getting the piping discipline to work. For other matters, such as running isometrics and reports, creating drawings and modeling equipment, you need other data in your catalog. For a complete list of the data required for each task, see Using Excel Workbooks to Configure Reference Data (on page 49).


A

abstract part

A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the organization that defines the specification.

Active Template Library (ATL)

Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can use an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the Component Object Model (COM) model. Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft Foundation Classes (MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more closely tied to the COM model.

angle

The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.

approval state

Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and govern the ability of users to alter specific data about a product.

arrangement (accommodation)

Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and piping.

attribute

A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end preparation.

Glossary

Glossary


axis

An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms of an x, y, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the center or axis for rotations.

B

basic design

Engineering definition of the model and its systems.

bill of material (BOM)

Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).

bulkload

The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog database.

C

catalog

Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project. This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.

Catalog database

The database that contains the reference data. Each Plant/Ship database can reference a different Catalog database.

chain

A set of continuous and tangent segments.

Glossary


change history

Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.

change management

Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model.

change propagation

Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a higher order object.

class

Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.

classification folder

A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft Excel workbooks define the classification folders.

codelist

A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.

commodity code

A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.

commodity item

A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).

component

Physical part that a feature generates.

Glossary


concurrent access

Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of a model.

consolidated tasks

A collection of tasks run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a set of drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.

constraints

A logical restriction that controls how part symbols ports relate to each other and to reference ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.

contract

A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown Structure hierarchy.

coordinate

The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.

coordinate system

A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0,0,0.

cutting plane

A plane that cuts through an object.

D

damage records

Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after construction of a plant.

Glossary


data interchange

Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or movement to another computer software system.

database

Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.

database backup

Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes since the date that the last complete copy was created.

database break and recovery

Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.

database copy

Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another design project.

database management

Functionality related to managing a product model database.

database monitor record

Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with a minimum of lost data.

degree

The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree 1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.

design alternative

Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so the user can uniquely refer to the design alternatives.

Glossary


design approval log

Record of review and approval of parts of the design.

design data auto input

Automation in loading existing design data into a new design database.

design documents

Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design phase.

design object

Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type.

design progress check

Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of completion.

design review

Functionality to support rapid viewing of the design and markup of features with comments.

design service

Any general system services related to the design function.

design standard

Feature or object used in plant design that has been determined to the normal or approved way of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers to computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.

detail schedule

Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress.

Glossary


distributed systems

Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads).

distribution systems

Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems.

documentation

Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the design.

drawing tool

Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are PinPoint and SmartSketch.

E

easting

A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system.

edge

A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex.

edge distance

The distance from the center of a bolt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange.

element

Primitive geometric shape such as a line, circle, or arc.

equipment catalog

Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and visualize equipment and its placement in the model. The catalog is not the source for the total specification and ordering data for the object.

F

Glossary


fabricate

To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.

face-to-face

The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face.

fasteners

Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.

fence

Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence.

field adjustment

Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for fit up in the case that extra material is required due to uncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and construction process.

flavor

A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values.

focus of rotation

A point or line about which an object or view turns.

full penetration weld

A type of weld where the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the components being joined.

function points

Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs.

functional block diagram

Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipment and components. A connecting network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network illustrate the function of the system.

Glossary


furnishings

Parts, like movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for example, a chair).

G

generic specific

Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example, International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified. See also specific and specific object.

GUIDs

Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid.

H

host location

The first Location created for a Site. This Host Location is defined when the Database Wizard creates the Site database.

host server

The database server where the Site database was created using the Database Wizard. Alternatively, if it is a restored database set, the Host Server is the database server where the Site database is restored. The Host Server in a Workshare environment contains the origin for the Site, Site Schema, Catalog, and Catalog Schema databases. Consequently, most Project Management and reference data work must take place at the Host.

I

Glossary


initial design

Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and provide a rough concept of the intended plant. Contains information relating to a plant created during its initial (concept) design period.

initial structural plan

Principal structural plan for the plant; also called a construction profile.

instantiation

Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model.

interference checking

A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the model.

J

job order

Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.

K

kinematics analysis

Analysis of mechanical motion.

ksi

Kips per square inch.

L

leg length analysis

Preferred term is welding length analysis.

Glossary


library

Resource of reference information that a software user can access in developing a plant design.

life cycle database

Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered plants.

link

Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that changes in the file appear in your document.

lintel

A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.

load group

A grouping in which all components feature uniform load limits and stress safety characteristics. For example, a pipe clamp from load group 5 will have a maximum nominal load of 20 kN and so will a threaded rod from load group 5.

location

A Location is defined by three user-defined inputs: 1) a unique name, 2) a unique name rule ID, and 3) the server where the Site databases reside for that Location. A Location is defined and created when the Site database is created using the Database Wizard. Additional Locations can be created in the Project Management task. Each Location is a Site-level object, thus other Plants within the same Site collection can use the Locations when the Plants are configured for Workshare.

logical member

An object in the model used to represent the design topology.

M

machinery

Major pieces of equipment installed in a plant.

Glossary


macro

A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro, the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth.

maintenance envelope

A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations.

maintenance records

Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment.

material analysis

Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called material lists.

material list

An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials.

methods

Objects in the database that describe the manufacturing methods to the component parts of a plant.

move from point

Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From point determines the point of origin for the move.

move to point

Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To point determines where you want the move to stop.

MTO neutral file

A non-graphic output file that can be fed into a material control system. MTO stands for Material Take-Off.

N

Glossary


node

1) One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph. 2) A terminal of any branch of a network or a terminal common to two or more branches of a network. 3) An end point of any branch or a network or graph, or a junction common to two or more branches.

northing

A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system.

nozzle

A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.

nozzle standout

The shortest allowable distance between the connection point of a nozzle and the start point of a turn on the leg connected to the nozzle.

NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)

The diameter of a pipe.

O

object

A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application.

occurrence (of part or equipment)

Instantiation of a part of equipment in the plant that refers to the part library; an instance of a specific object. The design can be built several times and therefore the occurrence can apply to more than one hull. Typically, an occurrence points back to a specific object, either for its complete definition, as in the case of a particular valve, or for its made from material, as in the case of a steel plate part cut from sheets. Thus, when a designer selects a component from the catalog and places it at a location in the space of the plant, the software creates an occurrence of that object in the plant design.

occurrence property

A characteristic that applies to an individual object in the model. Occurrence properties are designated with 'oa:' in the reference data workbooks. You can view and modify occurrence properties on the Occurrence tab of the properties dialog boxes in the software. Depending on the object, some occurrence properties are read-only.

Glossary


origin

In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect.

origin point

The point at which the coordinate system is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin point, represented by the X, Y, and Z values.

orthogonal

The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree angles. A square is an orthogonal element.

orthographic

A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular to the plane.

P

P&ID

Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping system; generally represents the engineering design of the system.

package

Set of closely related classes. (UML)

painting

Computation of paint surface and recording of paint system requirements.

parameter

A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.

part class

A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat exchangers with different dimensions.

Glossary


part number

Unique identifier of a part.

PDS (Plant Design System)

A comprehensive, intelligent computer-aided design and engineering application for the process, power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that correspond to engineering tasks in the design workflow.

PinPoint

Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference point.

principle of superposition

The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis.

Product Data Management (PDM) System

Software intended to manage both product data and documents associated to the product data. Functionality typically includes: object-based data modeling tools, user administration, business rules, and document management. Document management typically includes document editing or reviewing, document mark-up or redline, document storage, and full-text retrieval.

product structure

Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volumes, or units. (For example, a bill of material is one possible type of product structure.)

production planning

Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a plant.

promotion

Process of associating approval state with a product version. A product version begins its existence at a working approval state. When the version is at some level of maturity, its approval state is elevated to a higher approval state (that is, promoted). Then, further changes must be carefully controlled and generally require the data set demoted to a working state. One or more promotions can occur successively higher approval states (between working and approved) to represent various intermediate levels of review or progressive approval.

Q

Glossary


query select sets

Set of objects that are selected in a query or queries on the database.

R

reference data

The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical dimensions and piping specifications.

resource estimation

Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the design and construction of the plant.

route

1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2) The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection.

S

satellite server

The database server where the replicated databases reside for Workshare. The Satellite Server is not used unless Workshare is activated.

schema

A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database.

schema update utility

Functionality used to assist in processing existing product models to an updated database structure after users modify or add to the database structure.

site

The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several Catalogs, each shared by multiple Plants.

Glossary


site administrator

Person responsible for managing the standards and general parameters for a given plant site within a Site database.

site setup

Functionality associated with establishing a new plant site or hull for design development.

sketch and trace

User interface for rough definition of a required design feature that typically works in a 2-D mode.

specifications

Contracted requirements for the plant.

stud

A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components.

suspended floor

A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.

symmetric node

Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a symmetric node has the same curvature on each side of the node. A handle can be attached to a symmetric node for editing.

system

A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type, properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system.

T

tag number

User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve, HE-2002 for a heat exchanger).

Glossary


target point

The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point anywhere on the drawing sheet or view.

tolerant geometry

A type of ACIS geometry - either an edge or a vertex - that is outside the tolerance for ACIS and requires special handling.

trimmed surface

A surface whose boundary is fully or partially inside the 'natural' geometric definition of the surface. Some or the entire control polygon extends outside the face boundary.

trunk

Feature that quickly reserves space for the distributive systems and other systems that have a path. Along the trunk are stations that define the cross section and identify part or system membership.

U

unit/module modeler

Facility of the system to structure collections of equipment and components into a single identifiable object.

user attributes

A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part class sheets.

V

version control

Ability of the system to manage multiple versions of a single part of the design. Version control should support conditional analysis and promotion status, as well as alternate design features among hulls within a plant site.

Glossary


vertex

A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model.

viewset

Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) that a view operation uses. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a viewset does not affect the actual stored representation of the object, but only its availability or desirability for viewing in the current scenario.

W

weight and CG analysis

Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of material and equipment, as well as the complete plant.

welding

Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis.

wirebody

A topological object that represents a collection of edges jointed at their common endpoints.

wizard

Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to a user to complete one of the functionalities of the application.

work content

Estimation development of metrics from the database that relates to the work hour content of the various construction units.

work order

Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.

Glossary


working plane

The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.

workset

Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object. Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds the object container.

workspace

Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and includes the user modeling settings.

workspace document

Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.

Workspace Explorer

Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.


A abstract part • 325 Active Template Library (ATL) • 325 Add Part Classes to Existing Classification

Folders • 77 Add Part Classes to New Classification

Folders • 76 Add User Attributes to a Class • 67 Adding and Modifying Custom Interfaces •

61 Adding Part Classes to the Catalog • 75 Administrative Sheets • 59 Align Component • 144 AllCommon Reference Data • 101 AllCommon Sheets • 101 AllCommon Sheets and Disciplines • 102 AllCommon.xls Workbook • 101 angle • 325 Anvil_Constant_Dir • 145 Anvil_Constant_Sus • 145 Anvil_Dyn_Config • 145 Anvil_Dyn_Finish • 145 Anvil_Dyn_PipeDia • 145 Anvil_Dyn_ResOrient • 145 Anvil_Dyn_ResType • 146 Anvil_Dyn_Stroke • 146 Anvil_Dyn_ValveType • 146 Anvil_Dyn2_PipeDia • 146 Anvil_FIG137_Nuts • 146 Anvil_FIG167_Insulat • 146 Anvil_FIG218_FlangeW • 147 Anvil_FIG255_Insulat • 147 Anvil_FIG292_FlangeW • 147 Anvil_FIG299_Config • 147 Anvil_FIG86_Finish • 147 Anvil_Finish • 147 Anvil_Rod_Finish • 148 Anvil_Shoe_Base • 148 Anvil_Shoe_Finish • 148 Anvil_Shoe_Type • 148 Anvil_Stanchion_Dia • 148 Anvil_Strut_Finish • 148 Anvil_Variable_ColType • 149 Anvil_Variable_Dir • 149 Anvil_Variable_RollMat • 149 Anvil_Variable_Top • 149 Anvil_WithWithout • 149 Anvil_YesNo • 149

Appendix Importing SmartPlant Reference Data

Specs into SmartPlant 3D • 313 Metadata Consistency • 311 Name Limitations in Reference Data •

293 Other Reference Data • 295 Questions and Answers about Reference

Data • 307 Select Lists (Codelists) • 133 Units of Measure • 261

approval state • 325 ApprovalReason • 150 arrangement (accommodation) • 325 Aspect Code • 150 Assembly Inclusion • 151 Assembly YesNoAuto • 151 Assembly_BBXAlignment • 151 Assembly_RefPorts • 151 Assembly_Variable_Dir • 152 Assembly_WithWithout • 152 attribute • 325 Automated Flange Selection Option • 152 Auxiliary Treatment • 152 Axial Profile Category • 153 axis • 326

B basic design • 326 Bend To Bend Tangent Basis • 153 bill of material (BOM) • 326 Bolt Diameter Equivalence Option • 153 Bolt Extension Option • 153 Bolt Hole Patterns • 105 Bolt Length Calculation Option • 154 Bolt Length Round Off Option • 154 Bolt Lubrication Requirements • 154 Bolt Option • 154 Bolt Type • 154 Bolting Requirements • 155 Bracket Category • 157 Branch Reporting Ownership • 157 bsWeldSide • 158 bsWeldType • 158 Bulk Load Database with Data • 82 bulkload • 326 Bulkload Dialog Box • 86 Bulkload from the Command Line • 88

Index

Index


C Cable Nozzle Sheet • 129 Cable Route Status • 158 Cable Tray Component Class • 158 Cable Tray Component Type • 158 Cable Tray Materials • 159 Cable Tray Part Data Basis • 159 Cable Tray Ports Sheet • 129 Cable Tray Type • 159 Cable Type • 159 Cap Screw Length Round Off Option • 159 catalog • 326 Catalog database • 326 Catalog Hierarchy Sheets • 73 Catalog Units of Measure Basis • 160 CatalogRoot Sheet • 74 chain • 326 change history • 327 change management • 327 change propagation • 327 Check Piping Mfg Priority • 160 Check Piping Priority • 160 Check Planning Priority • 160 Clamp Option • 160 Clamp Requirement • 160 Clamp Selection Basis • 161 class • 327 classification folder • 327 ClassNodeType Sheet • 74 Cleaning Requirement • 161 Cleaning Responsibility • 161 Coating Color • 161 Coating Type • 161 codelist • 327 Collar Category • 161 commodity code • 327 Commodity Code Builder Option • 161 commodity item • 327 Commodity Option • 162 Compart Coating Color • 162 Compart Coating Process • 163 Compart Coating Responsibility • 163 Compart Coating Status • 163 Compart Coating Type • 163 Compartment Authorization Class • 163 Compartment Bulk Cargo Type • 163 Compartment Bulkhead Tightness • 164 Compartment Capacity Context • 164 Compartment Cargo Context • 164 Compartment Coating Applicability • 164 Compartment Coating Certification • 164 Compartment Coating Inspection • 164 Compartment Compartment Group • 165

Compartment Compartment Type • 165 Compartment Contact Material Type • 165 Compartment Damage Location • 165 Compartment Damage Type • 165 Compartment Design Requirement • 165 Compartment Function Type • 166 Compartment Insulation Category • 166 Compartment Naval Nuclear Class • 166 Compartment Naval Safety Category • 166 Compartment Naval Security Class • 166 Compartment Noise Category • 166 Compartment Positional Rel Type • 167 Compartment Property Context • 167 Compartment Relevant Cargos • 167 Compartment Structure Type • 167 Compartment Surface Preparation • 167 component • 327 Component Insulation Exclusion Sheet •

118 concurrent access • 328 Conduit Ports Sheet • 129 Conduit Selection Basis • 167 Connection Type • 168 consolidated tasks • 328 constraints • 328 Construction Type • 168 contract • 328 Control Point Subtype • 168 Control Point Type • 168 Controlling Access to Attributes • 63 coordinate • 328 coordinate system • 328 Create Commodity Codes • 39 Create Exclusive WBS Item • 168 Create PDS Export Data Files • 30 Creating and Distributing Naming Rules •

123 Cross Section Cardinal Points • 169 Cross Section Edges • 169 Cross Section Shape Types • 169 Custom Class Interface List Sheet • 70 Custom Interfaces Sheet • 68 Custom Interfaces Sheets • 61 cutting plane • 328

D damage records • 328 data interchange • 329 database • 329 database backup • 329 database break and recovery • 329 database copy • 329 database management • 329

Index


database monitor record • 329 Deck Category • 169 Define Component Insulation Exclusion •

119 Define Manual Information after Translation

• 33 degree • 329 Delivered Excel Workbooks • 50 Describing the Common Sheets in the

Workbooks • 57 design alternative • 329 design approval log • 330 design data auto input • 330 design documents • 330 design object • 330 design progress check • 330 Design Responsibility • 169 design review • 330 design service • 330 design standard • 330 Design Standard • 169 detail schedule • 330 DIN Wall Thickness Data Sheet • 103 distributed systems • 331 distribution systems • 331 documentation • 331 Documentation Comments • 21 Door Frame Position • 170 Door Type • 170 Doors Windows Kinematics • 170 Drawing Style Codelist • 170 drawing tool • 331 Drilling Template Pattern • 170

E easting • 331 Eccentric Offset Basis • 170 edge • 331 edge distance • 331 Edge Reinforcement Category • 171 Edit the Piping Translation Rules Workbook

• 30 element • 331 Elevation Plane Type • 171 EMI • 171 EMI Radiator • 171 EMI Suceptor • 171 End Preparation • 171 End Standard • 172 Environmental Zone • 172 equipment catalog • 331 Equipment Component Types • 172 Equipment Insulation Material Sheet • 117

Equipment Types • 172 Examination • 173 Exterior Surface Treatment • 173 External Welded Pipe Part • 173

F fabricate • 332 Fabrication Responsibility • 173 Fabrication Type • 173 Fabrication Type Basis • 174 face-to-face • 332 fasteners • 332 Feature Type • 174 fence • 332 field adjustment • 332 Fireproofing Exposure Type • 174 Fireproofing Method • 174 Fireproofing Type • 174 Flange Category • 174 Flange Face Surface Finish • 175 Flange Facing • 175 Flange Insulation Kit Type • 175 flavor • 332 Flip Component • 175 Flow Direction • 175 Fluid Code • 176 focus of rotation • 332 Front End Type • 176 full penetration weld • 332 function points • 332 functional block diagram • 332 furnishings • 333

G Gasket Inside Diameter Basis • 176 Gasket Option • 176 Gasket Outside Diameter Basis • 176 Gasket Requirement Override • 176 Gasket Requirements • 177 Gasket Selection Based on Fluid Code •

177 Gasket Selection for Mismatched Bolted

Ends Option • 177 Gasket Style Number • 177 Gasket Type • 177 generic specific • 333 GenericNamingRules.xls Workbook • 125 Geometric Industry Standard • 178 Geometry Type • 179 Grid Plane Type • 197 GUIDs • 333 GUIDs Sheet • 70

Index


H Hand Wheel Orientation • 197 Handrail Connection Type • 197 Handrail End Treatment • 197 Handrail Inline Connection Type • 198 Handrail Offset • 198 Handrail Orientation • 198 Handrail Side Connection Type • 198 Hazardous Fluid Category • 198 Header Branch Size Basis Option • 198 Heat Tracing Medium • 199 HngSup Associated Part Type • 199 HngSup Association Type • 199 HngSup BOM Type • 199 HngSup Bounding Box Type • 199 HngSup Class Node Type • 200 HngSup Command • 200 HngSup Connect Obj • 200 HngSup Connection Type • 200 HngSup Cut Type • 200 HngSup Discipline • 201 HngSup ET Type • 201 HngSup Face Selection Type • 201 HngSup Joint Type • 201 HngSup Manufacturer • 201 HngSup Mating Joint Type • 202 HngSup Part Class Type • 202 HngSup Physical Connection • 202 HngSup Port Category • 202 HngSup Port Type • 202 HngSup Rule Type • 203 HngSup Strict Face Selection • 203 HngSup Support Type • 203 HngSup Type Selection Rule • 203 host location • 333 host server • 333 HVAC Component Types • 203 HVAC Insulation Material Sheet • 117 HVAC Lining Material • 204 HVAC Part Data Basis • 204 HVAC Part Generation Basis • 204 HVAC Width and Depth Basis • 204

I Icarus Column Base Option • 204 Icarus Concrete Type • 205 Icarus Exclude End Bent • 205 Icarus Grating Type • 205 Icarus Pipe Rack Type • 205 Icarus Struct Steel Analysis • 205 Icarus Third Column • 205 IFC Process Status • 206

IFC Required Action • 206 IFC Type • 206 IFCAspectCodeValue • 205 Ignore Boundaries • 206 Index Sheet • 61 Industry Commodity Code Option • 206 initial design • 334 initial structural plan • 334 Inlet Port Geometry Type • 207 Installation Responsibility • 207 instantiation • 334 Instrument Functional Type • 207 Insulation Material • 207 Insulation Material Sheet • 117 Insulation Purpose • 207 Insulation Reference Data • 115 Insulation Sheets • 115 Insulation Specification Sheet • 116 Insulation Temperature Basis • 207 Insulation Thickness Basis • 208 Insulation Thickness Table Sheet • 116 InsulationData.xls Workbook • 115 IntelliShip Data Integrity Msgs • 208 IntelliShip Msgs • 208 interference checking • 334 Interior Surface Treatment • 208 Is Bend Planar • 208

J Jacketed Closure Method • 209 Jacketed Piping Basis • 209 job order • 334

K kinematics analysis • 334 ksi • 334

L Learning about Reference Data Types • 26 leg length analysis • 334 Legend Sheet • 60 library • 335 life cycle database • 335 Lining Material • 209 link • 335 lintel • 335 Load Case Liquid Pressure • 209 Load Case Sea Pressure • 209 load group • 335 Load Span Classification • 210

Index


Loading Reference Data into the Catalog • 79

location • 335 logical member • 335 Longitudinal Beam Category • 210 Longitudinal Bulkhead Category • 210 Longitudinal Profile Category • 210 Longitudinal Seam Category • 210 Longitudinal Tube Category • 210 Looking at How the Catalog Database Fits

In • 27 Loose Material Requirements • 210

M Mach Bolt Length Round Off Option • 211 machinery • 335 macro • 336 maintenance envelope • 336 maintenance records • 336 Manufacturer • 211 Manufacturing Method • 211 Map Type • 211 material analysis • 336 Material Description Builder Option • 212 material list • 336 Material Sheet • 111 Materials Grade • 212 Materials of Construction Class • 212 Materials Type • 212 Member Fireproofing Application Method •

213 Member Fireproofing Application Type • 213 Member Fireproofing Exposure Type • 213 Member Orientation • 213 methods • 336 Methods of Jacket Pipe Construction • 213 Methods of Trimming • 214 Min Bend To Bend Tangent Len Option •

214 Minimum Reference Data • 54 Mirror Behavior Option • 214 Misc Requisition Classification • 215 Module Type Sheets • 121 Module Types Reference Data • 121 ModuleTypes.xls Workbook • 121 Moniker Information for Special Process

Sheets • 98 Move Custom DLLs to SharedContent

Directory (Option 1) • 124 move from point • 336 move to point • 336 MTO neutral file • 336 Multiport Valve Op Req • 215

N Naming Rules Reference Data • 123 Naming Rules Sheet • 126 Naming Rules Sheets • 125 node • 337 northing • 337 Note Purpose • 215 nozzle • 337 Nozzle Data Sheets • 127 Nozzle Entrance Type • 215 Nozzle Flange Type • 215 Nozzle Function • 215 nozzle standout • 337 NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 337 Nut Creation Option • 216 Nut Option • 216 Nut Type • 216

O object • 337 occurrence (of part or equipment) • 337 occurrence property • 337 OD to NPD Utility • 47 Open or Blind Spacer Install State • 216 Opening Category • 216 Orifice Flange Tap Orientation • 217 origin • 338 origin point • 338 orthogonal • 338 orthographic • 338 Outfitting Cross Sections Sheet • 112 Outlet Port Geometry Type • 217

P P&ID • 338 package • 338 painting • 338 Painting Responsibility • 217 parameter • 338 part class • 338 Part Class Sheet • 71 Part Class Sheets • 71 Part Class Types • 217 Part Data Basis • 217 Part Data Source • 218 part number • 339 PDS (Plant Design System) • 339 PDS Piping Reference Data Translator

Dialog Box • 39 PinPoint • 339 Pipe Bend Radius By User Option • 218

Index


Pipe Bend Radius Multiplier Option • 218 Pipe Bend Type • 218 Pipe Bending Machine Type • 218 Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility • 43 Pipe Stock Usage • 219 Piping Commodity Catalog Part Number

Basis Option • 219 Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup Utility • 41 Piping Commodity Override Option • 219 Piping Commodity Procurement Data

Option • 219 Piping Commodity Type • 220 Piping Elbow Nozzles Sheet • 128 Piping Generic Data Bolted Sheet • 104 Piping Generic Data Female Sheet • 110 Piping Generic Data Mechanical Sheet •

111 Piping Point Usage • 221 Piping Reference Data Spreadsheet Merge

Utility • 44 Piping Spec Status • 221 Piping Spec Version Management Option •

221 Piping Specification Notes Option • 222 Piping Straight Nozzles Sheet • 128 Plain Piping Generic Data Sheet • 102 Plane Of Flip • 222 Plane of Turn • 222 Plate Part Category • 222 Populate Dimension Table Name Rules • 31 Preface • 15 Pressure Rating • 222 principle of superposition • 339 Product Data Management (PDM) System •

339 product structure • 339 production planning • 339 Profile Part Category • 223 ProfileEncasementType • 223 promotion • 339 Property Categories • 223 Purchase Length Basis Option • 224

Q query select sets • 340

R R-ClassNodeDescribes Sheet • 74 Rear End Type • 224 reference data • 340 Reference Plane View Directions • 224 Reporting Requirement Basis • 225

Reporting Type • 225 Required Worksheets • 35 Requisition Responsibility • 225 Requisition Type • 225 resource estimation • 340 Respect Assembly Boundaries • 226 Revision History Notes Option • 226 Revision History Sheet • 59 R-Hierarchy Sheet • 75 Ring Number • 226 Ring Profile Category • 226 Rotation Offset Type • 227 route • 340 Route Direction • 227 Route Layout • 227 Route on Face • 227 Rule Class Type • 228 Rule Type • 228

S satellite server • 340 Schedule Thickness • 228 schema • 340 schema update utility • 340 Select List (Codelist) Column Descriptions •

134 Select List (Codelist) Disciplines • 134 Select List (Codelist) Namespaces • 144 Selection Basis • 229 Shell Category • 230 Ship Design Loading Condition Type • 230 Short Code Hierarchy • 231 Signal Type • 233 site • 340 site administrator • 341 site setup • 341 Size Reduction Preference • 234 Size Reduction Type • 234 sketch and trace • 341 Slab Boundary Reference • 234 Slab Composition • 234 Slab Continuity • 234 Slab Corner Type • 235 Slab Cross Section Symbol • 235 Slab Direction Reference • 235 Slab Face Position • 235 Slab Fastener Type • 236 Slab Layer Role • 236 Slab Manufacturing Process • 236 Slab Nosing Material • 236 Slab Nosing Type • 236 Slab Priority • 236 Slab Reference Direction • 237

Index


SmartMarine 3D Data Integrity Msgs • 237 SmartMarine 3D Msgs • 237 SmartPlant 3D Documentation Set • 17 Space Access Type • 237 Space Adjacency Contact Type • 237 Space Adjacency Geometry Type • 237 Space Arrangement Orientation • 238 Space Arrangement Type • 238 Space Item Purpose • 238 Space Physical Orientation Type • 238 Space Positional Relationship Type • 239 Space Product Structure Type • 239 specifications • 341 Spectacle Position • 239 Spool Break by Control Point • 239 Spool Include Welded Parts • 239 Spool Sequence Type • 240 Spooling Basis • 240 Standard Nozzle Data • 127 Standard Nozzle Data.xls Workbook • 127 Steamout Requirement • 240 Stress Relief • 240 Stress Relief Requirement • 240 Struct 2L Back to Back Rule • 241 Struct AC Left Right Both • 241 Struct AC Pad Type • 241 Struct AC Sizing Rule • 241 Struct AC Splice Types • 241 Struct AC To Do Messages • 241 Struct Alignment • 241 Struct Boundary Conditions • 242 Struct Can Diameter Rule • 242 Struct Can Length Compute Method • 242 Struct Can Type • 242 Struct Compute Rule • 242 Struct Cone Length Compute Method • 242 Struct Continuity • 243 Struct Coord Sys Reference • 243 Struct Custom Plate Part Type • 243 Struct End Releases • 243 Struct Eqp To Do Messages • 243 Struct FC Chevron WPO • 243 Struct FC End Controlling • 244 Struct FC Offset Along • 244 Struct FC Offset Direction • 244 Struct FC Supported Edge • 244 Struct FC Supporting CPs • 244 Struct FC Supporting Side • 244 Struct FC To Do Messages • 245 Struct Feature Radius Type • 245 Struct Feature To Do Messages • 245 Struct Footing Comp Sizing Rule • 245 Struct Footing To Do Messages • 245

Struct Frm Conn Position Ref • 245 Struct Insulation Purpose • 246 Struct Member End Selection Rule • 246 Struct Member Position Rule • 246 Struct Plate Part To Do Messages • 246 Struct Prismatic Footing Shapes • 246 Struct SC To Do Messages • 246 Struct Wall Boundary Size • 247 Struct Wall Boundary Type • 248 Struct Wall Connection Type • 248 Struct Wall Reference Attribute • 248 StructInsulationSetbackReference • 248 Structural Load Case Source • 249 Structural Member Priority • 249 Structural Member Type • 249 Structural WPO Intersection Index • 249 stud • 341 Supplementary Nut Requirement • 249 Supplementary Washer Requirement • 250 Supply Responsibility • 250 Surface Preparation • 250 suspended floor • 341 symmetric node • 341 system • 341

T tag number • 341 Tap End Stud Bolt Length Round Off Option

• 250 target point • 342 Testing Responsibility • 250 Testing Type • 250 Tightness • 251 tolerant geometry • 342 Translate PDS Reference Data • 32 Translating and Migrating Reference Data •

29 Transverse Beam Category • 251 Transverse Bulkhead Category • 251 Transverse Profile Category • 251 Transverse Seam Category • 251 Transverse Tube Category • 251 Tray Specification Type • 251 trimmed surface • 342 trunk • 342 Type • 252

U Undefined Service Limits Rule Option • 252 Understanding Reference Data • 25 Uniqueness of Objects • 90 unit/module modeler • 342

Index


UoM Conversion Utility • 46 UOM Sheet • 113 Use the OD to NPD Utility • 47 Use the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility • 42 Use the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup

Utility • 41 Use the Piping Reference Data Merge

Utility • 44 Use the UoM Conversion Utility • 45 user attributes • 342 Using Catalog Data in an Integrated

Environment • 131 Using Catalog Hierarchy Sheets to Add Part

Classes • 75 Using Excel Workbooks to Configure

Reference Data • 49 Using the Bulkload Modes • 79 Using the OD to NPD Utility • 46 Using the Pipe Branch Cleanup Utility • 42 Using the Piping Commodity Filter Cleanup

Utility • 40 Using the Piping Reference Data Merge

Utility • 43 Utility BOM Units • 252 Utility Brace Orient • 253 Utility_Holes • 253 Utility_Nuts • 253 Utility_PlateThickness • 254 Utility_Tabs • 254 Utility_YesNo • 254

V Valve Flow Pattern • 254 Valve Model Number • 254 Valve Operator Geometric Industry

Standard • 255 Valve Operator Is Rotatable • 255 Valve Operator Part Data Basis • 255 Valve Operator Type • 255 Valve Port Option • 255 Valve Trim • 256 Vendor • 256 version control • 342 vertex • 343 Vertical Beam Category • 256 Vertical Profile Category • 256 Vertical Seam Category • 256 Vertical Tube Category • 256 Vessel Head Type • 257 viewset • 343 Voltage Grade • 257

W Washer Creation Option • 257 Washer Option • 257 Washer Type • 257 WBS Assignment • 258 WBS Auto Grouping Rule Type • 258 WBS Item Purpose • 258 WBS Project Purpose • 258 WBS Pull In Associated Items • 259 weight and CG analysis • 343 Weld Type • 259 welding • 343 Welding Procedure Specification • 259 Welding Requirement • 260 What's New in Reference Data • 23 wirebody • 343 wizard • 343 work content • 343 work order • 343 Working in an Integrated Environment • 131 working plane • 344 workset • 344 workspace • 344 workspace document • 344 Workspace Explorer • 344

ref data guide help 409

Documents

software product

intergraph corporation

restricted computer

applicable license agreement

valid signed license

unpublished rights

terms of use use

copyright laws